Home

ZyXEL AMG1302 User's Manual

1. 65 Connection Sralus and System Info SONOS aueieecicesupisseiue racconti oet bte brc a De Eoi doe rese du epi ce ii 67 mine r mE 73 TOE S EAN aaa EE 91 Fome METWORING ieena E 121 e aE A E AE E E PE E dd bs N T A Sdn E TE A OR e DD 135 duality ol Serice Q05 em 139 Nowoik Address Translation NAT iissaesp a ecce Dade c ae px ida iR EE Naeem ieee glas gp ia REN MP rU AS 151 Py EARNS gel c ue gota ain ca Saat a as dae dma cacti ude 161 Dynami ees ca ionien in n E EA E OE EA A 165 GU N EA A UU T I T MM I AA EA T E ANEA E 167 e E A A E E E A 173 ax i re pe E 191 Bs 2 L L ane Som eT eee end ean A tein de ace OMS pent ene EUM OU idus ud TTT mormon Mrmr DoD A E 195 isl d Sanan ater ed oa ia 201 VSI SIRIUS A E A A AETA eon mene A TT 203 dig esi ee TP TT 207 EIS eI e setts ace fancied Seep dae wine Swale a eee a a een 209 curru ce UT 213 uii cuales MM Rp C TE 217 BACKUP ROSTONE M 219 Pee IES Bit eA a v RET o TET 223 Ew ic ae C ee M 235 Toude sp RTT M ME 239 AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide 3 Contents Overview 4 AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Table of Contents Table of Contents Pollo i ol oJ 8 3 iri 1 Reo lg 5 Part Users GUIE 13 Chapter 1 ijui
2. 15 EEE c S 15 1 2 Ways to Manage the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries sse eene 15 1 3 Good Habits for Managing the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries sse 15 1 4 Applications for the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries sssssssssssssseeeeeee enne nnne 16 S ANMNU ji oor TN re rS 16 14 2 Wireless ACCOSS e 16 1 5 Gaia ral Hardware Fea OS accha N RA ANAA R Eo oem id 17 Le Usno vie NFS PUNON aote tato nna N Fon rem rere ter tr renner treet errr bue URP HEX Bein EON 18 pap dci RN ie e M 19 Tent US Tis dis Rasa DUITO usua e tadeadue in rtp ack ruri da Reus Dad reum map k cu din db Ex ad Sp dm aa pun ta 19 1 8 Ways to Manage the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries 0 2 ceeeccececeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeaeeeeeaaeeeseneessaaeeesenes 19 Chapter 2 iniroducing the Web Configurator 4X 21 eT OO E E odes 21 21 1 Accassing the Web Congo RIEF ica cc s a Sissons cadanreuss tdi beta eed ist Conan debt AKAA SRE a 21 22 The Web ete ge lel gs i ales e E 23 CISCN E em UE 24 vt cupi s tI TED 25 2 208 Navigation PONG T 25 Chapter 3 Internet Wireless Setup Wizard LL inna tein tao eeann IR kan ai pk aea Enae a EENEN 29 EAE S PRSE ETT TT T TT TT OTT TDI TL en dan era 29 2 2 Internet 7 Wireless Wizard SetU ie ooo e rictu ea Na aaar IIS SMS E aaaea 29 Chapter 4 UU X H 37
3. Devices Hardware DNS Hosts ac You may configure network devices associated with a5 physical hardware here Multiple logical devices can be 1 associated with a single piece of hardware 2 Double click on the profile of the network card you wish to configure The Ethernet Device General screen displays as shown Figure 151 Red Hat 9 0 KDE Ethernet Device General WY Ethernet Device A x General Route Hardware Device Nickname ethO Activate device when computer starts Allow all users to enable and disable the device Automatically obtain IP address settings with dhcp DHCP Settings Hostname optional Automatically obtain DNS information from provider Statically set IP addresses Manual IP Address Settings Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway Address OK 3 Cancel e If you have a dynamic IP address click Automatically obtain I P address settings with and select dhcp from the drop down list e If you have a static IP address click Statically set IP Addresses and fill in the Address Subnet mask and Default Gateway Address fields 3 Click OK to save the changes and close the Ethernet Device General screen AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide EB Appendix A Setting up Your Computer s IP Address 4 Ifyou know your DNS server IP addres
4. The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 72 Security Certificates Trusted CA Import LABEL DESCRIPTION Certificate File Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse to Path find it Browse Click Browse to find the certificate file you want to upload Apply Click Apply to save the certificate on the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries Back Click Back to return to the previous screen 17 6 View Certificate Use this screen to view in depth information about the certification authority s certificate change the certificate s name and set whether or not you want the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries to check a certification authority s list of revoked certificates before trusting a certificate issued by the certification authority 198 AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 17 Certificate Click Security gt Certificates gt Trusted CA to open the Trusted CA screen Click the View icon to open the View Certificate screen Figure 98 Trusted CA View Certificate Details Name cert Type request Subject CN ZyXEL O TW ST NA C US null Certificate The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 73 Trusted CA View LABEL DESCRIPTION Certificate Name This field displays the identifying name of this certificate If you want to change the name type up to 31 characters to identify this key certificate
5. Ethernet Connections Table AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 6 Broadband Table 13 Network Setting Broadband More Connections continued LABEL DESCRIPTION This is an index number indicating the number of the corresponding connection Active This field indicates whether the connection is active or not Clear the check box to disable the connection Select the check box to enable it Node Name This is the name you gave to the Internet connection VID This field displays the VLAN ID number used by this connection Encapsulation This field indicates the encapsulation method of the Internet connection Modify The first ISP connection is read only in this screen Use the Broadband gt Internet Connection screen to edit it Click the Edit icon to edit the Internet connection settings Click this icon on an empty configuration to add a new Internet access setup Click the Remove icon to delete the Internet access setup from your connection list 6 3 1 More Connections Edit Use this screen to configure a connection Click the edit icon in the More Connections screen to display the following screen AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 6 Broadband Figure 23 Network Setting Broadband More Connections Edit General C Active Node Name Mode Encapsulation Multiplex IPv6 IPv4 Dual Stack VPI VCI IP Address
6. AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Table 16 Network Setting gt Wireless gt General LABEL DESCRIPTION Security Mode Select Basic WEP or More Secure WPA 2 PSK WPA 2 to add security on this wireless network The wireless clients which want to associate to this network must have same wireless security settings as the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries When you select to use a security additional options appears in this screen Or you can select No Security to allow any client to associate this network without any data encryption or authentication See the following sections for more details about this field Apply Click this to save your changes Cancel Click this to restore your previously saved settings 7 2 1 No Security Select No Security to allow wireless stations to communicate with the access points without any data encryption or authentication Note If you do not enable any wireless security on your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries your network is accessible to any wireless networking device that is within range Figure 27 Wireless General No Security Wireless Setup Channel Selection Common Setup I Enable Wireless LAN Joe xj Current Channel 6 Scan 7 2 2 Basic WEP Encryption WEP encryption scrambles the data transmitted between the wireless stations and the access points AP to keep network communications private Bo
7. ES EHS PEAR DEAE PE FISE AIEA Notices Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Cet appareil num rique de la classe B est conforme a la norme NMB 003 du Canada Viewing Certifications Go to www zyxel com to view the product s documents and certifications ZyXEL Limited Warranty ZyXEL warrants to the original end user purchaser that this product is free from any defects in materials or workmanship for a period of up to two years from the date of purchase During the warranty period and upon proof of purchase should the product have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and or materials ZyXEL will at its discretion repair or replace the defective products or components without charge for either parts or labor and to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore the product or components to proper operating condition Any replacement will consist of a new or re manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal or higher value and will be solely at the discretion of ZyXEL This warranty shall not apply if the product has been modified misused tampered with damaged by an act of God or subjected to abnormal working conditions Note Repair or replacement as provided under this warranty is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser This warran
8. MBSSID LAN Isolation More Secure Recommended ees v v v Security Mode WPA PSK Enter 8 63 characters or 64 hexadecimal digits a f A F and 0 9 Pre Shared Key more Cancel The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 21 More AP Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Wireless Network Setup Wireless Select Enable Wireless LAN to activate wireless LAN Wireless Network Settings Wireless Network Name The SSID Service Set IDentity identifies the service set with which a wireless SSID device is associated Wireless devices associating to the access point AP must have the same SSID Enter a descriptive name up to 32 English keyboard characters for the wireless LAN Hide SSID Select this check box to hide the SSID in the outgoing beacon frame so a station cannot obtain the SSID through scanning using a site survey tool Client Isolation Select this to keep the wireless clients in this SSID from communicating with each other through the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries MBSSID LAN Isolation Security Level Select this to keep the wireless clients in this SSID from communicating with clients in other SSIDs or wired LAN devices through the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries Select both Client I solation and MBSSI D LAN I solation to allow this SSID s wireless clients to only connect to the Internet through the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries AMG1302 AMG
9. Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Note At the time of writing WDS is compatible with other ZyXEL APs only Not all models support WDS links Check your other AP s documentation Click Network Setting Wireless WDS The following screen displays Figure 35 Network Setting gt Wireless gt WDS WDS Security O AES 1 bpe DW pw 5 N TKIP ZyAIR Series Compatible L Remote Bridge MAC Address PSK 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 i 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 24 Network Setting gt Wireless gt WDS LABEL DESCRIPTION WDS Security Select the type of the key used to encrypt data between APs All the wireless APs including the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries must use the same pre shared key for data transmission The option is available only when you set the security mode to WPA 2 or WPA 2 PSK in the Wireless gt General screen TKIP Select this to use TKIP Temporal Key Integrity Protocol encryption AES Select this to use AES Advanced Encryption Standard encryption This is the index number of the individual WDS link Active Select this to activate the link between the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries and the peer device to which this entry refers When you do not select the check box this link is down Remote Bridge MAC Address Type the MAC address of the peer device in a
10. Czech ZyXEL t mto prohla uje Ze tento za zen je ve shod se z kladn mi po adavky a dal mi p slu n mi ustanoven mi sm rnice 1999 5 EC Danish Undertegnede ZyXEL erkl rer herved at f lgende udstyr udstyr overholder de v sentlige krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999 5 EF German Hiermit erkl rt ZyXEL dass sich das Ger t Ausstattung in bereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den brigen einschl gigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999 5 EU befindet Estonian K esolevaga kinnitab ZyXEL seadme seadmed vastavust direktiivi 1999 5 EU p hin uetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele s tetele English Hereby ZyXEL declares that this equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999 5 EC AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Appendix G Legal Information Spanish Por medio de la presente ZyXEL declara que el equipo cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999 5 CE Greek ME THN NAPOYZA ZyXEL AHAQNEI OTI amp amp onAicu c ZYMMOPOONETAI lIPOZ TIZ OYZIOAEIZ ANAITHZEIZ KAI TIZ AOINES ZXETIKEZ AIATA EIZ THZ OAHIIAZ 1999 5 EC French Par la pr sente ZyXEL d clare que l appareil quipements est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pert
11. 22 1 1 What You Can Do in the System Settings Screens e Use the System screen Section 22 2 on page 213 to configure system settings e Use the Time Setting screen Section 22 3 on page 213 to set the system time 22 2 The System Screen Use this screen to configure system admin password Click Maintenance gt System to open the screen as shown Figure 106 Maintenance System Administrator Inactivity Timer 300 seconds 0 means no timeout The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 81 Maintenance System LABEL DESCRIPTION Administrator Inactivity Timer Apply Type how many seconds a management session either via the web configurator can be left idle before the session times out and you have to log in again Very long idle timeouts may have security risks A value of 0 means a management session never times out no matter how long it has been left idle not recommended Click this to save your changes Cancel Click this to restore your previously saved settings 22 3 The Time Screen Use this screen to configure the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries s time based on your local time zone To change your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries s time and date click Maintenance System Time Setting The screen appears as shown AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide 213 Chapter 22 System Settings Figure 107 Maintenance System Time Setting Curre
12. AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 11 Network Address Translation NAT AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Port Binding 12 1 Overview This chapter describes how to configure the port binding settings Port binding allows you to aggregate port connections into logical groups You may bind WAN PVCs to Ethernet ports and WLANs to specify how traffic is forwarded Different ATM QoS settings can be specified for each WAN PVC to meet bandwidth requirements for the type of traffic to be transferred For example three port binding groups could be created on the device R1 for three different WAN PVC connections The first PVC PVCO is for non time sensitive data traffic The second and third PVCs PVC1 and PVC2 are for time sensitive Media On Demand MOD video traffic and VoIP traffic respectively Figure 73 Port Binding Groups AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 12 Port Binding If a WAN PVC is bound to an ethernet port traffic from the ethernet port will only be forwarded through the specified WAN PVC and vice versa If a port is not in a port binding group traffic to and from the port will be forwarded according to the routing table See the tutorial section Section on page 37 for more details on configuring port binding for multiple WAN connections 12 1 1 What You Can Do in the Port Binding Screens e Use the General screen Section 12 3 on page 162 to activate port binding
13. Add new service Click this to show a screen in which you can add a new service rule You can configure the Service Name Protocol and Name of the new rule Active Service Name This shows whether a configured service is activated or not This shows the name of the rule Protocol This shows the protocol of the rule Port This shows the port of the rule Modify Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the rule Click the Delete icon to delete an existing rule Blocked Site URL Enter the URL of web sites or URL keywords to which the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries blocks access Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 16 Parental Control AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide 17 Certificate 17 1 Overview The AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries can use certificates also called digital IDs to authenticate users Certificates are based on public private key pairs A certificate contains the certificate owner s identity and public key Certificates provide a way to exchange public keys for use in authentication 17 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter e Use the Local Certificates screen to view and import the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries s CA signed certificates Section 17 3 on page 195 The Trusted CA screen lets you save the certificates of trusted CAs to
14. Is it possible to modify the rule to be more specific For example if IRC is blocked for all users will a rule that blocks just certain users be more effective Does a rule that allows Internet users access to resources on the LAN create a security vulnerability For example if FTP ports TCP 20 21 are allowed from the Internet to the LAN Internet users may be able to connect to computers with running FTP servers Does this rule conflict with any existing rules Once these questions have been answered adding rules is simply a matter of entering the information into the correct fields in the web configurator screens 15 6 4 Triangle Route When the firewall is on your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries acts as a secure gateway between your LAN and the Internet In an ideal network topology all incoming and outgoing network traffic passes through the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries to protect your LAN against attacks Figure 90 Ideal Firewall Setup LAN WAN 15 6 4 1 The Triangle Route Problem 188 A traffic route is a path for sending or receiving data packets between two Ethernet devices You may have more than one connection to the Internet through one or more ISPs If an alternate gateway is on the LAN and its IP address is in the same subnet as the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries s LAN IP address the triangle route also called asymmetrical route problem may occur The steps below describe the triangle route problem AMG1302 AMG
15. MAC 00 13 49 E 34 56 EUI 64 02 13 49 o 34 56 Stateless Autoconfiguration With stateless autoconfiguration in IPv6 addresses can be uniquely and automatically generated Unlike DHCPv6 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol version six which is used in IPv6 stateful autoconfiguration the owner and status of addresses don t need to be maintained by a DHCP server Every IPv6 device is able to generate its own and unique IP address automatically when IPv6 is initiated on its interface It combines the prefix and the interface ID generated from its own Ethernet MAC address see Interface ID and EUI 64 to form a complete IPv6 address When IPv6 is enabled on a device its interface automatically generates a link local address beginning with fe80 When the interface is connected to a network with a router and the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries is set to automatically obtain an IPv6 network prefix from the router for the interface it generates AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide 297 Appendix E IPv6 DHCPv6 3another address which combines its interface ID and global and subnet information advertised from the router This is a routable global IP address The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol for IPv6 DHCPv6 RFC 3315 is a server client protocol that allows a DHCP server to assign and pass IPv6 network addresses prefixes and other configuration information to DHCP clients DHCPv6 servers and c
16. Parental Control Use this screen to define time periods and days during which the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries performs parental control and or block web sites with the specific URL AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator Table 2 Navigation Panel Summary LINK TAB FUNCTION Certificates Local Certificates Use this screen to export self signed certificates or certification requests and import the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries s CA signed certificates Trusted CA Use this screen to save CA certificates to the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries System Monitor Log Log Use this screen to view the logs for the level that you selected You can export or e mail the logs Traffic Status WAN Use this screen to view the status of all network traffic going through the WAN port of the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries LAN Use this screen to view the status of all network traffic going through the LAN ports of the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries NAT Use this screen to view the status of NAT sessions on the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries Maintenance Users Account Users Account Use this screen to configure the passwords your user accounts TR 069 Client TR 069 Client Use this screen to configure the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries to be managed by an Auto Configuration Server ACS System System Use this screen to configure management inactivity time out setting Time Time S
17. 2 The AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries reroutes the packet to Gateway A which is in Subnet 2 3 The reply from the WAN goes to the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries 4 The AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries then sends it to the computer on the LAN in Subnet 1 AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 15 Firewall Figure 92 IP Alias AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Parental Control 16 1 Overview Parental control allows you to block web sites with the specific URL You can also define time periods and days during which the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries performs parental control on a specific user 16 2 The Parental Control Screen Use this screen to enable parental control view the parental control rules and schedules Click Security Parental Control to open the following screen Figure 93 Security gt Parental Control General Parental Control Enable Disable settings are invalid when disabled Add new PCP The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 68 Security gt Parental Control LABEL DESCRIPTION Parental Control Use this field to activate or deactivate parental control Add new PCP Click this to create a new parental control rule This is the index number of the rule Status This indicates whether the rule is active or not A yellow bulb signifies that this rule is active A gray bulb signifies that this rule is not active PCP Name This shows the name o
18. Group Key Update The Group Key Update Timer is the rate at which the RADIUS server sends a new Timer group key out to all clients Encryption This field displays the encryption type for data encryption If you choose WPA PSK as the security mode the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries uses TKIP for data encryption If you choose WPA2 PSK as the security mode and enable WPA PSK Compatible the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries uses either TKIP and AES TKI PAES MI X for data encryption If you choose WPA2 PSK as the security mode but disable WPA PSK Compatible the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries uses AES for data encryption 7 2 4 WPA 2 Authentication The WPA2 security mode is currently the most robust form of encryption for wireless networks It requires a RADIUS server to authenticate user credentials and is a full implementation the security protocol Use this security option for maximum protection of your network However it is the least backwards compatible with older devices AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN The WPA security mode is a security subset of WPA2 It requires the presence of a RADIUS server on your network in order to validate user credentials This encryption standard is slightly older than WPA2 and therefore is more compatible with older devices Click Network Setting Wireless to display the General screen Select More Secure as the security level Then select WPA or WPA2 from the Secu
19. If your computer is connected to the DSL port or is connected wirelessly use a computer that is connected to a ETHERNET port I can see the Login screen but I cannot log in to the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries 1 Make sure you have entered the password correctly The default user and default admin password can be found on the cover page of this User s Guide The field is case sensitive so make sure Caps Lock is not on 2 You cannot log in to the web configurator while someone is using Telnet to access the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries Log out of the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries in the other session or ask the person who is logged in to log out 3 Turn the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries off and on 4 If this does not work you have to reset the device to its factory defaults See Section 1 7 on page 19 I cannot Telnet to the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries See the troubleshooting suggestions for I cannot see or access the Login screen for the web configurator Ignore the suggestions about your browser I cannot use FTP to upload download the configuration file I cannot use FTP to upload new firmware See the troubleshooting suggestions for I cannot see or access the Login screen for the web configurator Ignore the suggestions about your browser AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 27 Troubleshooting 27 3 Internet Access I cannot access the Internet Check the hardware connections and make sure the LEDs
20. Priority Select the priority level from 1 to 3 of this queue The smaller the number the higher the priority level Traffic assigned to higher priority queues gets through faster while traffic in lower priority queues is dropped if the network is congested Weight Select the weight from 1 to 8 of this queue If two queues have the same priority level the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries divides the bandwidth across the queues according to their weights Queues with larger weights get more bandwidth than queues with smaller weights Rate Limit Specify the maximum transmission rate in Kbps allowed for traffic on this queue OK Click OK to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving E AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 10 Quality of Service QoS 10 4 The Class Setup Screen Use this screen to add edit or delete QoS classifiers A classifier groups traffic into data flows according to specific criteria such as the source address destination address source port number destination port number or incoming interface For example you can configure a classifier to select traffic from the same protocol port such as Telnet to form a flow You can give different priorities to traffic that the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries forwards out through the WAN interface Give high priority to voice and video to make them run more smoothly Similarly give low priority to many large file
21. SNMP Setup Get Community Set Community Trap Community IPv4 Trap Destination IPv6 Trap Destination B Note Secured Client IP Address G AI 1 The session will be reset after apply 2 The Range IP could be IPv4 or IPv6 161 LAN v O Enable 9 Disable O From To 3 From To Range From To public public public 0 0 0 0 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 88 Maintenance RemoteMGMT SNMP LABEL DESCRIPTION Server Port This displays the port the SNMP agent listens on If the number is grayed out it is not editable Server Access Secured Client IP Address Select the interface s through which a computer may access the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries using this service A secured client is a trusted computer that is allowed to access the SNMP agent on the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries Select All to allow any computer to access the SNMP agent Choose Range to just allow the computer s with an IP address in the range that you specify to access the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries using this service Get Community Enter the Get Community which is the password for the incoming Get and GetNext requests from the management station The default is public and allows all requests Set Community Enter the Set community which is the password for incoming Set requests from the management station The default is public and allows all requests Apply Click
22. 1 0 Finding Out More See Section 8 7 on page 131 for technical background information on LANs 8 1 3 Before You Begin Find out the MAC addresses of your network devices if you intend to add them to the DHCP Client List screen 8 2 The LAN Setup Screen Use this screen to set the Local Area Network IP address subnet mask and advanced networking settings such as RIP multicast of your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries Click Network Setting gt Home Networking to open the LAN Setup screen Figure 47 Network Setting Home Networking LAN Setup LAN IP Setup IP Address 192 168 1 153 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 RIP Version RIP1 Direction None v Multicast IGMP Snooping DHCP Server State DHCP IP Addressing Values IP Pool Starting Address Pool Size DHCP Server Lease Time Lease Time DNS Values DNS Server 1 DNS Server 2 IGMP v1 IGMP v2 IGMP v3 Disabled 9 Enabled Disable 9 Enable DHCP Relay 192 168 1 33 32 259200 seconds DNS Proxy v None x Cancel AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 8 Home Networking The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 30 Network Setting gt Home Networking gt LAN Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION LAN IP Setup IP Address Enter the LAN IP address you want to assign to your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries in dotted decimal notation for example 192 168 1 1 factory default Subnet Mask
23. 192 168 255 255 You can obtain your IP address from the IANA from an ISP or it can be assigned from a private network If you belong to a small organization and your Internet access is through an ISP the ISP can provide you with the Internet addresses for your local networks On the other hand if you are part of a much larger organization you should consult your network administrator for the appropriate IP addresses Note Regardless of your particular situation do not create an arbitrary IP address always follow the guidelines above For more information on address assignment please refer to RFC 1597 Address Allocation for Private Internets and RFC 1466 Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space 8 7 5 RIP Setup RIP Routing Information Protocol allows a router to exchange routing information with other routers The RIP Direction field controls the sending and receiving of RIP packets When set to e Both the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries will broadcast its routing table periodically and incorporate the RIP information that it receives In Only the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries will not send any RIP packets but will accept all RIP packets received e Out Only the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries will send out RIP packets but will not accept any RIP packets received e None the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries will not send any RIP packets and will ignore any RIP packets received The Version field controls the format and the broadcastin
24. AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 4 Tutorials LAN WAN 1 Click Security gt Firewall and select Custom Click Apply to save your settings Firewall O High This setting blocks all traffic to and from the Internet Only local network traffic and LAN to WAN service Telnet FTP HTTP HTTPS DNS POP3 SMTP is permitted O Medium This is the recommended setting It allows traffic to the Internet but blocks anyone from the Internet from accessing any services on your local network O Low This setting allows traffic to the Internet and also allows someone from the Internet to access services on your local etwork This would be used with Port Forwarding Default Server his setting allows the customer to create and edit individual firewall rules O of This setting is not recommended It disables firewall protection for your network and could potentially expose your network to significant security risks This option should only be used for troubleshooting or if you intend using another firewall in conjunction with your ZyXEL router 2 Click the Rules tab In the Packet Direction field select WAN to LAN and click Add Rules Firewall Rules Storage Space in Use 096 096 0096 Packet Direction WANtoLAN v Create a new rule after rule number o v Add Active Source IP Address n Sonico L Action ECT ee Moy Orde 3 The Add New Firewall Rule screen will appear Click the Edit Customized S
25. Advanced Setup RIP amp Multicast Setup RIP Direction RIP Version Multicast ATM Qos ATM QoS Type Peak Cell Rate Sustain Cell Rate Maximum Burst Size MTU MTU Both v RIP1 v None UBR With PCR 0 cell sec 0 cell sec 0 cell 1500 v The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 15 Network Setting gt Broadband gt More Connections Edit Advanced Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION RIP amp Multicast Setup RIP Direction Select the RIP Direction from None Both In Only and Out Only ATM QoS Select the RI P Version from RI P 1 RIP2 B and RIP2 M RIP Version This field is not configurable if you select None in the RIP Direction field Multicast Internet Group Multicast Protocol IGMP is a network layer protocol used to establish membership in a multicast group The AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries supports I GMP v1 I GMP v2 and IGMP v3 Select None to disable it ATM QoS Type Select CBR Continuous Bit Rate to specify fixed always on bandwidth for voice or data traffic Select UBR Unspecified Bit Rate for applications that are non time sensitive such as e mail Select nrtVBR Variable Bit Rate non Real Time or rtVBR Variable Bit Rate Real Time for bursty traffic and bandwidth sharing with other applications Peak Cell Rate Divide the DSL line rate bps by 424 the size of an ATM cell to find the Peak Cell Rate PCR This is the maximum rate at which the send
26. Chapter 6 Broadband Figure 20 Network Setting gt Broadband gt Internet Connection gt Ethernet ETH1 Line Type General Mode Encapsulation User Name Password Service Name IPvG IPv4 Dual Stack PPP Authentication Enable VLAN 802 1Q VLAN ID 5 4094 IP Address Obtain an IP Address Automatically Static IP Address IP Address DNS Server Primary DNS Secondary DNS IPv6 Address Obtain an IP Address Automatically Static IP Address DHCP IPv6 DHCP PD WAN Identifier Type WAN Identifier Connection 9 Keep Alive Connect on Demand Ethernet ETH1 v Router PPPoE ChangeMe IPv4 IPv6 v Auto Obtained From ISP k 0 0 0 0 Obtained From ISP DHCP 9 SLAAC Enable Disable 2 Manual EUI64 Max Idle Time 3600 0 0 0 0 Auto Sec Apply Cancel Advanced Setup 76 AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 6 Broadband The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 11 Network Setting Broadband Internet Connection LABEL DESCRIPTION Line Type Select the DSL mode supported by your ISP Use Auto Sync Up if you are not sure which mode to choose from The AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries dynamically diagnoses the mode supported by the ISP and selects the best compatible one for your connection Other options are ADSL2 ADSL2 G DMT T1 413 and G lite The P 1302 T10B device suppo
27. Check the signal strength If the signal strength is low try moving your computer closer to the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries if possible and look around to see if there are any devices that might be interfering with the wireless network for example microwaves other wireless networks and so on Turn the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries off and on AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 27 Troubleshooting 4 If the problem continues contact the network administrator or vendor or try one of the advanced suggestions Advanced Suggestions e Check the settings for QoS If it is disabled you might consider activating it If it is enabled you might consider raising or lowering the priority for some applications AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 27 Troubleshooting AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Setting up Your Computer s IP Address All computers must have a 10M or 100M Ethernet adapter and TCP IP installed Windows 95 98 Me NT 2000 XP Vista Macintosh OS 7 and later operating systems and all versions of UNIX LINUX include the software components you need to install and use TCP IP on your computer Windows 3 1 requires the purchase of a third party TCP IP application package TCP IP should already be installed on computers using Windows NT 2000 XP Macintosh OS 7 and later operating systems After the appropriate TCP IP components are installed configure the TCP IP settings in order to communi
28. Inside outside denotes where a host is located relative to the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries for example the computers of your subscribers are the inside hosts while the web servers on the Internet are the outside hosts Global local denotes the IP address of a host in a packet as the packet traverses a router for example the local address refers to the IP address of a host when the packet is in the local network while the global address refers to the IP address of the host when the same packet is traveling in the WAN side Note that inside outside refers to the location of a host while global local refers to the IP address of a host used in a packet Thus an inside local address ILA is the IP address of an inside host in AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 11 Network Address Translation NAT a packet when the packet is still in the local network while an inside global address IGA is the IP address of the same inside host when the packet is on the WAN side The following table summarizes this information Table 52 NAT Definitions ITEM DESCRIPTION Inside This refers to the host on the LAN Outside This refers to the host on the WAN Local This refers to the packet address source or destination as the packet travels on the LAN Global This refers to the packet address source or destination as the packet travels on the WAN NAT never changes the IP address either local or global o
29. Registering a DDNS Account on www dyndns org e Configuring DDNS on Your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries e Testing the DDNS Setting Note If you have a private WAN IP address then you cannot use DDNS 4 11 1 Registering a DDNS Account on www dyndns org 1 Open a browser and type http www dyndns org AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 4 Tutorials 2 Apply for a user account This tutorial uses UserName1 and 12345 as the username and password 3 Log into www dyndns org using your account 4 Add a new DDNS host name This tutorial uses the following settings as an example e Hostname zyxelrouter dyndns org e Service Type Host with IP address e IP Address Enter the WAN IP address that your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries is currently using You can find the IP address on the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries s Web Configurator Status page Then you will need to configure the same account and host name on the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries later 4 11 2 Configuring DDNS on Your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries Configure the following settings in the Network Setting gt Dynamic DNS screen e Select Active Dynamic DNS e Select www dyndns org in the Service Provider field e Type zyxelrouter dyndns org in the Host Name field e Enter the user name UserName1 and password 12345 Dynamic DNS Configuration Dynamic DNS O Enable Disable Service Provider www dyndns org w Host Name Username Password canes Click Appl
30. Type the subnet mask of your network in dotted decimal notation for example 255 255 255 0 factory default Your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries automatically computes the subnet mask based on the IP Address you enter so do not change this field unless you are instructed to do so Dynamic Route RIP Routing Information Protocol allows a router to exchange routing information with other routers Select the RIP version from RIP1 and RI P2 Direction Use this field to control how much routing information the VDSL Router sends and receives on the subnet Select the RIP Direction from None Both IN Only and OUT Only Multicast IGMP Internet Group Multicast Protocol is a network layer protocol used to establish membership in a multicast group The AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries supports I GMP v1 I GMP v2 IGMP v3 Select None to disable it IGMP Snooping Select Enabled to activate IGMP Snooping This allows the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries to passively learn memberships in multicast groups Otherwise select Disabled to deactivate it DHCP Server State DHCP If set to Enable your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries can assign IP addresses an IP default gateway and DNS servers to Windows 95 Windows NT and other systems that support the DHCP client If set to Disable the DHCP server will be disabled If set to DHCP Relay the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries acts as a surrogate DHCP server and relays DHCP requests and responses between the remote s
31. Upload Click this to begin the upload process This process may take up to two minutes After you see the fi rmware updating screen wait two minutes before logging into the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries again AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide 217 Chapter 23 Firmware Upgrade Figure 109 Firmware Uploading I Firmware upgrading now Please wait The AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect In some operating systems you may see the following icon on your desktop Figure 110 Network Temporarily Disconnected D Local Area Connection Network cable unplugged After two minutes log in again and check your new firmware version in the Status screen If the upload was not successful an error screen will appear Click OK to go back to the Firmware Upgrade screen Figure 111 Error Message Software Upload Error e The uploaded file was not accepted by the router Please return to the previous page and select a valid upgrade file AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Backup Restore 24 1 Overview The Backup Restore screen allows you to backup and restore device configurations You can also reset your device settings back to the factory default 24 2 The Backup Restore Screen Click Maintenance Backup Restore Information related to factory defaults backup configuration and restoring configuration appears in this
32. ATM Loopback Test DSL Line Status Reset ADSL Line The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 93 Maintenance Diagnostic DSL Line LABEL DESCRIPTION ATM Status Click this to view your DSL connection s Asynchronous Transfer Mode ATM statistics ATM is a networking technology that provides high speed data transfer ATM uses fixed size packets of information called cells With ATM a high QoS Quality of Service can be guaranteed The Segmentation and Reassembly SAR driver translates packets into ATM cells It also receives ATM cells and reassembles them into packets These counters are set back to zero whenever the device starts up inPkts is the number of good ATM cells that have been received inDiscards is the number of received ATM cells that were rejected inF4Pkts is the number of ATM Operations Administration and Management OAM F4 cells that have been received See ITU recommendation I 610 for more on OAM for ATM inF5Pkts is the number of ATM OAM F5 cells that have been received outPkts is the number of ATM cells that have been sent outDiscards is the number of ATM cells sent that were rejected outF4Pkts is the number of ATM OAM F4 cells that have been sent outF5Pkts is the number of ATM OAM F5 cells that have been sent ATM Loopback Test Click this to start the ATM loopback test Make sure you have configured at least one PVC with proper VPIs VCIs bef
33. Back Click this to return to the previous screen without saving Next Click this to continue to the next wizard screen Exit Click this to close the wizard screen without saving AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide 35 Chapter 3 Internet Wireless Setup Wizard Note The wireless stations and AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries must use the same SSID and channel ID for wireless communication 7 The configuration settings are saved and applied Click Close to complete the Internet Wireless setup Figure 14 Results Summary Quick Start x Result Summary You have successfully walked through the Quick Start Please close this Quick Start window Close 8 Launch your web browser and navigate to www zyxel com Internet access is just the beginning Refer to the rest of this guide for more detailed information on the complete range of AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries features If you cannot access the Internet open the web configurator again to confirm that the Internet settings you configured in the wizard setup are correct AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Tutorials 4 1 Overview This chapter shows you how to use the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries s various features e Setting Up Your DSL Connection see page 37 e IPv6 Address Configuration see page 39 Setting Up a Secure Wireless Network see page 40 e Configuring the MAC Address Filter for Restricting Wireless Internet Access see page 47 Settin
34. HTTP 1 1 settings v Use HTTP 1 1 Gl Use HTTP 1 1 through proxy connections 3 Microsoft v gt Java ae Use Java 214107 for lt appleb eques rea Jaa 2 v1 4 1 07 for applet requires Use Java 214107 for lt appleb eques rea O Java console enabled requires restart O Java logging enabled JIT compiler for virtual machine enabled requires restart Multimedia O Always show Internet Explorer 5 0 or later Radio toolbar O Don t display online media content in the media bar Enable Automatic Image Resizing x b Restore Defaults Apply AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Appendix C Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions Mozilla Firefox Mozilla Firefox 2 0 screens are used here Screens for other versions may vary You can enable Java Javascripts and pop ups in one screen Click Tools then click Options in the screen that appears Figure 170 Mozilla Firefox Tools Options m Web Search Ctrl K Downloads Ctri 3 Add ons Web Developer Error Console Adblock Plus Page Info CtriH Shift A FireFTP Clear Private Data Ctrl Shift Del Tab Mix Plus Options Session Manager Click Content to show the screen below Select the check boxes as shown in the following screen Figure 171 EST 5 Me Main Tabs Feeds Mozilla Firefox Content Security Privacy ao m Security Ix A Advanced w Block
35. NAT sessions they can establish If your network has a large number of users using peer to peer applications you can lower this number to ensure no single client is exhausting all of the available NAT sessions Apply Cancel Click this to save your changes Click this to restore your previously saved settings AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 11 Network Address Translation NAT 11 3 The Port Forwarding Screen Use this screen to forward incoming service requests to the server s on your local network You may enter a single port number or a range of port numbers to be forwarded and the local IP address of the desired server The port number identifies a service for example web service is on port 80 and FTP on port 21 In some cases such as for unknown services or where one server can support more than one service for example both FTP and web service it might be better to specify a range of port numbers You can allocate a server IP address that corresponds to a port or a range of ports The most often used port numbers and services are shown in Appendix F on page 305 Please refer to RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers Note Many residential broadband ISP accounts do not allow you to run any server processes such as a Web or FTP server from your location Your ISP may periodically check for servers and may suspend your account if it discovers any active services at your loca
36. SSH 231 SSID 110 activation 98 MBSSID 112 static route 135 configuration 136 138 example 135 status 67 ATM 236 DSL connections 237 WPS 103 subnet 265 subnet mask 122 132 266 subnetting 268 Sustain Cell Rate see SCR SYN attack 174 syslog protocol 201 severity levels 201 system 213 firmware 217 passwords 21 reset 19 status 67 time 213 System Info 68 system name 69 T Telnet 226 three way handshake 184 thresholds data fragment 106 109 DoS 175 184 185 P2P 185 time 213 TR 069 15 trademarks 309 traffic shaping 88 example 89 triangle route 188 solutions 189 trusted CAs and certificates 197 U UBR 80 85 90 unicast 74 Universal Plug and Play see UPnP upgrading firmware 217 UPnP 126 cautions 122 NAT traversal 122 URL 167 URL filter URL 167 V VBR 89 VBR nRT 80 85 90 VBR RT 680 85 89 VCI 77 84 87 version firmware version 69 Virtual Channel Identifier see VCI Virtual Path Identifier see VPI VPI 77 84 87 W WAN 73 ATM QoS 80 85 89 encapsulation 73 77 84 IGMP 74 IP address 73 78 84 87 mode 77 84 MTU 80 86 multicast 74 80 multiplexing 77 84 87 nailed up connection 79 88 NAT 84 RIP 80 AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Index setup 74 traffic shaping 88 example 89 VCI 77 84 87 VPI 77 84 87 warranty 310 note 310 WDS 103 113 compatibility 104 example 113 Web Configurator 21 web configurator 15 passwords 21 WE
37. UPnP UPnP State UPnP Enable Disable The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 33 Network Setting gt Home Networking gt UPnP LABEL DESCRIPTION UPnP Select Enable to activate UPnP Be aware that anyone could use a UPnP application to open the web configurator s login screen without entering the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries s IP address although you must still enter the password to access the web configurator Otherwise select Disable to deactivate UPnP Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving 8 5 The IP Alias Screen IP alias allows you to partition a physical network into different logical networks over the same Ethernet interface The AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries supports multiple logical LAN interfaces via its physical Ethernet interface with the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries itself as the gateway for the LAN network 126 AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 8 Home Networking When you use IP alias you can also configure firewall rules to control access to the LAN s logical network subnet 8 5 1 Configuring the LAN IP Alias Screen Use this screen to change your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries s IP alias settings Click Network Setting gt Home Networking gt IP Alias to open the following screen Figure 51 Network Setting gt Home Networking gt IP Alias IP Alias IP Alias Enable Disable sett
38. e Accounting Keeps track of the client s network activity AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs RADIUS is a simple package exchange in which your AP acts as a message relay between the wireless client and the network RADIUS server Types of RADIUS Messages The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point and the RADIUS server for user authentication e Access Request Sent by an access point requesting authentication Access Reject Sent by a RADIUS server rejecting access Access Accept Sent by a RADIUS server allowing access e Access Challenge Sent by a RADIUS server requesting more information in order to allow access The access point sends a proper response from the user and then sends another Access Request message The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point and the RADIUS server for user accounting e Accounting Request Sent by the access point requesting accounting e Accounting Response Sent by the RADIUS server to indicate that it has started or stopped accounting In order to ensure network security the access point and the RADIUS server use a shared secret key which is a password they both know The key is not sent over the network In addition to the shared key password information exchanged is also encrypted to protect the network from unauthorized access Types of EAP Authentication This section discuss
39. gt Firewall gt Rules Edit Edit Customized Services Add Edit Config Service Name Service Type TCP S Port Configuration Type Single PortRange Port Number From To 0 Apply Cancel Ed AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 15 Firewall The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 65 Security gt Firewall gt Rules Edit Edit Customized Services Add Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Config Service Name Type a unique name for your custom port Service Type Choose the IP port TCP or UDP that defines your customized port from the drop down list box Port Configuration Type Click Single to specify one port only or Port Range to specify a span of ports that define your customized service Port Number Type a single port number or the range of port numbers that define your customized service Back Click this to return to the previous screen without saving Apply Click this to save your changes Cancel Click this to restore your previously saved settings Delete Click this to delete the current rule AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide 183 Chapter 15 Firewall 15 5 The DoS Screen Use this screen to enable DoS protection Click Security gt Firewall gt Dos to display the following screen Figure 87 Security gt Firewall gt Dos DoS Denial of Services 9 Enabled Disabled
40. the interface type is ADSL and the connection has the following information General Mode Router Encapsulation PPPoE User Name 1234 DSL Ex com Password ABCDEF Service Name My DSL Multiplex LLC IPv6 IPv4 Dual Enabled Stack PPP Auto Authentication VPI 0 VCI 33 Others IP Address Obtain IP Address Automatically DNS Server Obtained From ISP IPv6 Address Obtain IPv6 Address Automatically DHCP IPv6 DHCP DHCP PD Enable WAN Identifier Type EUI64 AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 4 Tutorials Go to Network Setting Broadband enter or select these values and click Apply Line Type Auto Sync Up v General Encapsulation User Name ChangeMe Password Multiplex IPv6 IPv4 Dual Stack IPv4 IPv6 PPP Authentication Auto Virtual Circuit ID VPI 0 Range 0 255 VCI 33 Range 32 65535 IP Address 9 Obtain an IP Address Automatically Static IP Address DNS Server Primary DNS Obtained From ISP v 0 0 0 0 Secondary DNS Obtained From ISP 0 0 0 0 IPv6 Address Obtain an IP Address Automatically Static IP Address DHCP IPv6 DHCP SLAAC Auto DHCP PD Enable O Disable WAN Identifier Type Manual 9 EUI64 WAN Identifier Connection Keep Alive Connect on Demand Max Idle Time 0 Apply Cancel Advanced Setup This completes your DSL WAN connection setti
41. 0 0 0 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 Primary DNS Server 0 0 0 0 Secondary DNS Server 0 0 0 0 Back Next Close AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide st Chapter 3 Internet Wireless Setup Wizard The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 4 Internet Connection with ENET ENCAP LABEL DESCRIPTION Encapsulation Select the encapsulation type your ISP uses from the Encapsulation drop down list box IPoA ENET ENCAP PPPOA or PPPoE Multiplex Select the multiplexing method used by your ISP from the Multiplex drop down list box either VC based or LLC based VPI Enter the Virtual Path Identifier VPI assigned to you This field may already be configured VCI Enter the Virtual Channel Identifier VCI assigned to you This field may already be configured your Internet Select Yes to enter specific IP information from your Internet service provider Enter access information exactly as your service provider gave it to you IP Address Enter the IP address of the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask in dotted decimal notation Refer to the appendix to calculate a subnet mask if you are implementing subnetting Default You must specify a gateway IP address supplied by your ISP when you Gateway use ENET ENCAP in the Encapsulation field in the previous screen Primary DNS Enter the primary DNS server I
42. 11g compliant WLAN devices to associate with the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries The transmission rate of your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries might be reduced Select 802 11n to allow only IEEE 802 11n compliant WLAN devices to associate with the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries Select 802 11g n to allow either IEEE 802 11g or IEEE 802 11n compliant WLAN devices to associate with the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries The transmission rate of your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries might be reduced Select 802 11b g n to allow IEEE 802 11b IEEE 802 11g or IEEE802 11n compliant WLAN devices to associate with the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries The transmission rate of your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries might be reduced Channel Width Select whether the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries uses a wireless channel width of 20MHz or Auto If Auto is selected the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries will use 40MHz if it is supported A standard 20MHz channel offers transfer speeds of up to 150Mbps whereas a 40MHz channel uses two standard channels and offers speeds of up to 300 Mbps 40MHz channel bonding or dual channel bonds two adjacent radio channels to increase throughput The wireless clients must also support 40 MHz It is often better to use the 20 MHz setting in a location where the environment hinders the wireless signal Select 20MHz if you want to lessen radio interference with other wireless devices in your neighborhood or the wireless clients do not support channel bonding This field is available on
43. 7 Wireless Distribution System WDS The AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries can act as a wireless network bridge and establish WDS Wireless Distribution System links with other APs You need to know the MAC addresses of the APs you want to link to Once the security settings of peer sides match one another the connection between devices is made At the time of writing WDS security is compatible with other ZyXEL access points only Refer to your other access point s documentation for details The following figure illustrates how WDS link works between APs Notebook computer A is a wireless client connecting to access point AP 1 AP 1 has no wired Internet connection but it can establish a WDS link with access point AP 2 which has a wired Internet connection When AP 1 has a WDS link with AP 2 the notebook computer can access the Internet through AP 2 Figure 41 WDS Link Example INTERNEJ 7 10 8 WiFi Protected Setup WPS Your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries supports WiFi Protected Setup WPS which is an easy way to set up a secure wireless network WPS is an industry standard specification defined by the WiFi Alliance WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security without having to configure security settings manually Each WPS connection works between two devices Both devices must support WPS check each device s documentation to make sure Depending on the devices you have you can either press a button on the de
44. AMG1202 TSeries Modify Click the Delete icon to delete the entry Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving 7 5 The WPS Screen Use this screen to configure WiFi Protected Setup WPS on your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security without having to configure security settings manually Set up each WPS connection between two devices Both devices must support WPS See Section 7 10 8 3 on page 115 for more information about WPS Note The AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries applies the security settings configured in the General screen see Section 7 2 on page 92 If you want to use the WPS feature make sure you have set the security mode to WPA2 PSK or No Security Click Network Setting gt Wireless gt WPS The following screen displays Select Enable and click Apply to activate the WPS function Then you can configure the WPS settings in this screen AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Figure 34 Network Setting gt Wireless gt WPS General WPS had Method Step 1 Click WPS AP PIN Status Lock Status 802 11 Mode SSID Security Pre Shared Key B Note 1 f you enable WPS Add a new device with WPS Method Step 2 Press the WPS button on your new wireless client devicewithin 120 seconds WPS Configuration Summary 2 This feature is avai
45. AMG1202 TSeries Use the MAC Authentication screen to allow or deny wireless clients based on their MAC addresses from connecting to the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries Section 7 4 on page 100 Use the WPS screen see Section 7 5 on page 101 to enable or disable WPS generate a security PIN Personal Identification Number and see information about the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries s WPS status e Use the WDS screen see Section 7 6 on page 103 to set up a Wireless Distribution System in which the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries acts as a bridge with other ZyXEL access points e Use the WMM screen to enable WiFi MultiMedia WMM to ensure quality of service in wireless networks for multimedia applications Section 7 7 on page 104 e Use the Scheduling screen see Section 7 8 on page 105 to configure the dates times to enable or disable the wireless LAN e Use the Advanced screen to configure wireless advanced features Section 7 9 on page 106 You don t necessarily need to use all these screens to set up your wireless connection For example you may just want to set up a network name a wireless radio channel and security in the General screen AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN 7 1 2 What You Need to Know About Wireless Wireless Basics Wireless is essentially radio communication In the same way that walkie talkie radios send and receive information over the airwaves wireless networking devices exchange
46. AMG1202 TSeries indicate to hosts that DHCPv6 is not available and they should use the prefix in the router advertisement message Other config flag on Select this to have the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries indicate to hosts to obtain DNS information through DHCPv6 Clear this to have the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries indicate to hosts that DNS information is not available in this network Advertisement interval option on Select this to have the Router Advertisement messages the VDSL Router sends specify the allowed interval between Router Advertisement messages Hop limit Enter the maximum number of network segments that a packet can cross before reaching the destination When forwarding an IPv6 packet IPv6 routers are required to decrease the Hop Limit by 1 and to discard the IPv6 packet when the Hop Limit is O Possible value for this field are 0 255 AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 8 Home Networking LABEL DESCRIPTION Router Lifetime Enter the time in seconds that hosts should consider the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries to be the default router Possible values for this field are 0 9000 Router Preference Select the router preference Low Medium or High for the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries The AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries sends this preference in the router advertisements to tell hosts what preference they should use for the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries This helps hosts to choose their default r
47. About NAT Inside Outside Inside outside denotes where a host is located relative to the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries for example the computers of your subscribers are the inside hosts while the web servers on the Internet are the outside hosts Global Local Global local denotes the IP address of a host in a packet as the packet traverses a router for example the local address refers to the IP address of a host when the packet is in the local network while the global address refers to the IP address of the host when the same packet is traveling in the WAN side NAT In the simplest form NAT changes the source IP address in a packet received from a subscriber the inside local address to another the inside global address before forwarding the packet to the WAN side When the response comes back NAT translates the destination address the inside global address back to the inside local address before forwarding it to the original inside host AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide 151 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation NAT Port Forwarding A port forwarding set is a list of inside behind NAT on the LAN servers for example web or FTP that you can make visible to the outside world even though NAT makes your whole inside network appear as a single computer to the outside world Finding Out More See Section 11 5 on page 156 for advanced technical information on NAT 11 2 The NAT General Screen Use this sc
48. Account to open the following screen Figure 103 Maintenance User Account User Name Old Password New Password Retype to Confirm Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 79 Maintenance gt User Account LABEL DESCRIPTION User Name You can configure the password for the Power User and Admin accounts Old Password Type the default password or the existing password you use to access the system in this field New Password Type your new system password up to 30 characters Note that as you type a password the screen displays a for each character you type After you change the password use the new password to access the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries Retype to Type the new password again for confirmation Confirm Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide 207 Chapter 20 User Account AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide TR 069 Client 21 1 Overview The AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries supports TR 069 Amendment 1 CPE WAN Management Protocol Release 2 0 and TR 069 Amendment 2 CPE WAN Management Protocol v1 1 Release 3 0 TR 069 is a protocol that defines how your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries ZD can be managed via a management server MS such as ZyXEL s Vantage Access Figure 104 LAN and WAN INTERNEJ ZD MS An administrator can use a managemen
49. Advanced the screen appears as shown See Section 7 10 2 on page 109 for detailed definitions of the terms listed in this screen Figure 38 Network Setting gt Wireless Advanced Channel Width Fragmentation Threshold 2346 256 2346 even numbers only Output Power 10096 v Preamble Long v 802 11 Mode 802 11b g n Auto The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 27 Network Setting Wireless Advanced Output Power LABEL DESCRIPTION Fragmentation This is the maximum data fragment size that can be sent Enter a value between 256 and Threshold 2346 Set the output power of the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries If there is a high density of APs in an area decrease the output power to reduce interference with other APs Select one of the following 10096 7596 5096 or 2596 Preamble Select a preamble type from the drop down list menu Choices are Long or Short See the Appendix D on page 285 for more information AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Table 27 Network Setting Wireless Advanced LABEL DESCRIPTION 802 11 Mode Select 802 11b Only to allow only IEEE 802 11b compliant WLAN devices to associate with the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries Select 802 11g Only to allow only IEEE 802 11g compliant WLAN devices to associate with the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries Select 802 11b g to allow either IEEE 802 11b or IEEE 802
50. Configure a queue to assign the highest priority queue 1 to e mail traffic from the LAN interface so that e mail traffic would not get delayed when there is network congestion e Note the MAC address AA FF AA FF AA FF for example of your computer and map it to queue 1 Note QoS is applied to traffic flowing out of the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries Traffic that does not match this class is assigned a priority queue based on the internal QoS mapping table on the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries Your computer MAC AA FF AA FF AA FF E mail Queue 1 fj T N By A colleague s computer Other traffic Automatic classifier AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 4 Tutorials 1 Click Network Setting QoS and check Active QoS Click Apply O Active QoS Traffic priority will be automatically assigned by None 2 Goto Network Setting gt QoS gt Queue Setup Click the Edit icon next to an entry to configure a queue Inde Status Name Interface Priority Weight Rate Limit Modify 1 N A N A NIA NIA N A NIA ii 2 N A NIA NIA NIA NIA NIA Egi 3 N A N A NIA NIA N A N A Ci T 4 N A NIA N A NIA N A N A i2 W B note If queue is deleted then related classifiers will be removed too 3 Select Active and give it a name Queuel1 in this example Select WAN in the Interface field and 1 in the Priority and Weight fields Then click OK Queue Edit x Active Name Queue1 Interface WAN v
51. Date Setup to Manual enter the new date in this field and then click Apply Get from Time Server Select this radio button to have the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries get the time and date from the time server you specified below Time Server Address 1 2 Enter the IP address or URL up to 20 extended ASCII characters in length of your time server Check with your ISP network administrator if you are unsure of this information Time Zone Setup Time Zone Choose the time zone of your location This will set the time difference between your time zone and Greenwich Mean Time GMT AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 22 System Settings Table 82 Maintenance gt System gt Time continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Daylight Savings Daylight saving is a period from late spring to early fall when many countries set their clocks ahead of normal local time by one hour to give more daytime light in the evening Select this option if you use Daylight Saving Time Start Date Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time starts if you selected Enable Daylight Saving The o clock field uses the 24 hour format Here are a couple of examples Daylight Saving Time starts in most parts of the United States on the second Sunday of March Each time zone in the United States starts using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A M local time So in the United States you would select Second Sunday March
52. Encapsulation drop down list box IPoA ENET ENCAP PPPOA or PPPoE Multiplex Select the multiplexing method used by your ISP from the Multiplex drop down list box either VC based or LLC based VPI Enter the Virtual Path Identifier VPI assigned to you This field may already be configured VCI Enter the Virtual Channel Identifier VCI assigned to you This field may already be configured IP Address Enter the IP address of the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries Default Enter the default gateway of the ZyXEL Device Gateway Primary DNS Enter the primary DNS server IP address for the AMG1302 AMG1202 Server TSeries Secondary Enter the secondary DNS server IP address for the AMG1302 AMG1202 DNS Server TSeries Back Click this to return to the previous screen without saving Next Click this to continue to the next wizard screen The next wizard screen you see depends on what protocol you chose above Exit Click this to close the wizard screen without saving Note Virtual Path Identifier VPI and Virtual Channel Identifier VCI define a virtual circuit Figure 10 Internet Connection with ENET ENCAP Quick Start x Internet Configuration STEP 1 Encapsulation ENET ENCAP v Multiplex LLC v VPI 0 Range 0 255 VCI 33 Range 32 65535 Is there specific IP address information from your Internet Service Provider ISP 5 No IP Address 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask 255
53. End Port field To forward a series of ports enter the start port number here and the end port number in the End Port field External End Port Enter a port number in this field To forward only one port enter the port number in the Start Port field above and then enter it again in this field To forward a series of ports enter the last port number in a series that begins with the port number in the Start Port field above Server IP Address Enter the IP address of the server in your local network Trigger Protocol Select the protocol of the service TCP UDP or ALL TCP UDP Open Start Port Enter the first port number here to which you want the device to translate the incoming port For a range of ports you only need to enter the first number of the range to which you want the incoming ports translated the device automatically calculates the last port of the translated port range Open End Port Enter the last port number here to which you want the device to translate the incoming port For a range of ports you only need to enter the first number of the range to which you want the incoming ports translated the device automatically calculates the last port of the translated port range Back Click this to return to the previous screen without saving Apply Click this to save your changes Cancel Click this to restore your previously saved settings AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s
54. IP address assigned to the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries IPv6 Global IP This is the current IPv6 address of the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries in the WAN Click this to go to the screen where you can change it IPv6 Prefix Length This is the current IPv6 prefix length in the WAN IPv6 Gateway This is the IPv6 address of the default gateway if applicable IPv6 WAN This is the primary secondary DNS server IPv6 address assigned to the AMG1302 DNS1 2 AMG1202 TSeries Link Local This is the link local address assigned to the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries within the Address LAN IPv4 IPv6 MTU This is the MTU Maximum Transmission Unit for IPv4 and IPv6 packets passing through the WAN interface VPI VCI LAN Information This is the Virtual Path Identifier and Virtual Channel Identifier that you entered in the Network Setting gt Broadband gt Internet Connection screen IP Address This field displays the current IP address of the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries in the LAN IP Subnet Mask This field displays the current subnet mask in the LAN IPv6 Address This is the current IPv6 address of the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries in the LAN Click this to go to the screen where you can change it IPv6 Prefix This is the current IPv6 prefix length in the LAN Length IPv6 Prefix This is the current IPv6 prefix in the LAN IPv6 Global IP This is the current global IPv6 address of the AMG1302 AMG12
55. IP address you want to add e Configure additional default gateways in the IP Settings tab by clicking Add in Default gateways In TCP IP Gateway Address type the IP address of the default gateway in Gateway To manually configure a default metric the number of transmission hops clear the Automatic metric check box and type a metric in Metric Click Add e Repeat the previous three steps for each default gateway you want to add Click OK when finished Figure 135 Windows XP Advanced TCP IP Properties Advanced TCP IP Settings IP Settings DNS WINS Options IP addresses IP address Subnet mask DHCP Enabled Default gateways Gateway Metric Automatic metric 7 Inthe Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties window the General tab in Windows XP Click Obtain DNS server address automatically if you do not know your DNS server IP address es e If you know your DNS server IP address es click Use the following DNS server addresses and type them in the Preferred DNS server and Alternate DNS server fields on have previously configured DNS servers click Advanced and then the DNS tab to order them AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide 251 Appendix A Setting up Your Computer s IP Address Figure 136 Windows XP Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties General Alternate Configuration You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network suppo
56. IPv6 Finding Out More See Section 6 4 on page 86 for technical background information on WAN 6 1 3 Before You Begin You need to know your Internet access settings such as encapsulation and WAN IP address Get this information from your ISP 6 2 The Internet Connection Screen Use this screen to change your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries s WAN settings Click Network Setting Broadband Internet Connection The screen differs by the WAN type and encapsulation you select AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 6 Broadband Figure 19 Network Setting gt Broadband gt Internet Connection gt Auto Sync Up Line Type Auto Sync Up General Mode Router Encapsulation PPPoA User Name ChangeMe Password Eon Multiplex LC e IPv6 IPv4 Dual Stack IPv4 IPv6 PPP Authentication Auto z Virtual Circuit ID VPI o Range 0 255 VCI 33 Range 32 65535 IP Address 9 Obtain an IP Address Automatically Static IP Address IP Address 0 0 0 0 DNS Server Primary DNS Obtained From ISP 0 0 0 0 Secondary DNS Obtained From ISP 0 0 0 0 IPv6 Address 9 Obtain an IP Address Automatically Static IP Address DHCP IPv6 9 DHCP SLAAC Auto DHCP PD Enable O Disable WAN Identifier Type D Manual EUI64 WAN Identifier Connection 9 Keep Alive Connect on Demand Max Idle Time 0 Sec Apply Cancel Advanced Setup AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide 75
57. MAC Restrict Mode Disable Allow Deny MAC address List Add new MAC address ZyXEL 7DC8 v The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 22 Network Setting gt Wireless gt MAC Authentication LABEL DESCRIPTION SSID Select the SSID for which you want to configure MAC filter settings MAC List Define the filter action for the list of MAC addresses in the MAC Address table Select Disable to turn off MAC filtering Select Allow to permit access to the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries MAC addresses not listed will be denied access to the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries Select Deny to block access to the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries MAC addresses not listed will be allowed to access the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Table 22 Network Setting Wireless MAC Authentication continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Add new MAC Click this if you want to add a new MAC address entry to the MAC filter list below address Enter the MAC addresses of the wireless devices that are allowed or denied access to the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries in these address fields Enter the MAC addresses in a valid MAC address format that is six hexadecimal character pairs for example 12 34 56 78 9a bc This is the index number of the entry MAC Address This is the MAC addresses of the wireless devices that are allowed or denied access to the AMG1302
58. Manage Add ons Synchronize Windows Update Windows Messenger Internet Options You can also check if pop up blocking is disabled in the Pop up Blocker section in the Privacy tab 1 In Internet Explorer select Tools Internet Options Privacy 2 Clear the Block pop ups check box in the Pop up Blocker section of the screen This disables any web pop up blockers you may have enabled AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide 273 Appendix C Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions Figure 163 Internet Options Privacy Internet Options PIR General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Settings Move the slider to select a privacy setting for the Internet A zone Medium Blocks third party cookies that do not have a compact privacy policy Blocks third party cookies that use personally identifiable LJ information without your implicit consent Restricts first party cookies that use personally identifiable information without implicit consent Pop up Blocker S Prevent most pop up windows from appearing Block pop ups 3 Click Apply to save this setting Enable Pop up Blockers with Exceptions Alternatively if you only want to allow pop up windows from your device see the following steps 1 In Internet Explorer select Tools Internet Options and then the Privacy tab 2 Select Settings to open the Pop up Blocker Settings screen 274 AMG
59. Numbers 802 1p 148 A activation CWMP 210 dynamic DNS 166 DYNDNS wildcard 166 NAT 152 port binding 162 port forwarding 155 QoS 141 SSID 98 wireless LAN scheduling 105 WPS 102 address mapping types 158 administrator password 21 alternative subnet mask notation 267 antenna directional 293 gain 293 omni directional 293 anti probing 175 AP access point 283 applications NAT 158 Asynchronous Transfer Mode see ATM ATM 236 MBS 80 85 PCR 80 85 QoS 80 85 89 SCR 80 85 status 236 authentication 109 110 RADIUS server 110 automatic logout 22 Index backup configuration 219 Basic Service Set See BSS 281 Basic Service Set see BSS broadcast 74 BSS 112 281 example 112 C CA 195 288 CBR 80 85 89 certificate factory default 196 Certificate Authority See CA certificates 195 authentication 195 CA public key 195 replacing 196 storage space 196 trusted CAs 197 Certification Authority 195 Certification Authority see CA certifications 309 notices 310 viewing 310 channel 283 interference 283 channel wireless LAN 108 CLI 15 client list 125 Command Line Interface see CLI compatibility WDS 104 configuration backup 219 AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Index CWMP 209 DHCP 124 IP alias 127 IP precedence 146 IP MAC filter 168 port forwarding 153 reset 220 restoring 220 static route 136 138 WAN 74 wizard 30 connection nailed up 88 copyright
60. OiPPITOS ODSCP IP Precedence Mark Type Of Service Mark inge DSCP Mark 0 63 Unchange v 802 10 Tag Same v Ethernet Priority VLAN ID Jvatue Range 1 4094 Kal AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 4 Tutorials Interface Select From LAN To Queue Link this to a queue created in the Network Setting QoS gt Queue Setup screen which is the 1 queue created in this example Source MAC Address Type the MAC address of your computer AA FF AA FF AA FF Type the Source Mac Netmask if you know it Source Port Range Enter the port number to which the rule should be applied 25 for SMTP Protocol ID Select the IP protocol type TCP This maps e mail traffic to queue 1 created in the previous screen see the Source Port Range field This also maps your computer s MAC address to queue 1 see the Source MAC Address field 4 11 Access the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries from the Internet Using DDNS If you connect your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries to the Internet and it uses a dynamic WAN IP address it is inconvenient for you to manage the device from the Internet The AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries s WAN IP address changes dynamically Dynamic DNS DDNS allows you to access the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries using a domain name http zyxelrouter dyndns org To use this feature you have to apply for DDNS service at www dyndns org This tutorial shows you how to
61. Priority 4 Highest v Weight 11 is Rate Limit kbps 4 Go to Network Setting gt QoS gt Class Setup and click Add new Classifier rm many eee DSCP Irafic 9024PMQ To Modify Class Mark Mark Queue 5 Select Active and follow the settings as shown in the screen below Then click OK Note that you have to select TCP in the IP Protocol field first then you can configure the source port range setting AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 4 Tutorials Add new Classifier Xx Rule Index v Class Configuration Ether Type IPv4 0x0800 x Interface To Queue Criteria Configuration Use the configurations below to specify the characteristics of a data flow need to be managed by this QoS rule Basic From Interface Cant Oranz Canas Clans Crao Orai L ra2 Dra Source C IP Address f IP Subnet Mask Exclude Port Range Exclude C MAC Address n MAC Mask Ce Exclude Destination C IP Address e IP Subnet Mask Exclude Port Range Exclude MAC Mask Exclude Others C Serice Exclude TCP ACK Exclude C DHCP p Exclude C Packet Length Exclude IPP DS Field IPP TOS DSCP IP Precedence Range Exclude Type of Service Exclude DSCPRange 0 863 lt Exclude C 802 1P x Exclude E VLAN ID tatue Range 1 4094 Exclude Action Forward to Unchange IPP DS Field
62. Select All to allow any computer to send DNS queries to the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries Choose Range to just allow the computer s with an IP address in the range that you specify to send DNS queries to the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries Apply Click this to save your changes Cancel Click this to restore your previously saved settings 25 7 The ICMP Screen To change your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries s security settings click Maintenance gt RemoteMGMT gt ICMP The screen appears as shown If an outside user attempts to probe an unsupported port on your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries an ICMP response packet is automatically returned This allows the outside user to know the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 25 Remote Management AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries exists Your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries supports anti probing which prevents the ICMP response packet from being sent This keeps outsiders from discovering your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries when unsupported ports are probed Note If you want your device to respond to pings and requests for unauthorized services you will also need to configure the firewall accordingly by disabling SPI Figure 123 Maintenance RemoteMGMT ICMP Respond to Ping on LAN v Secured Client IP Address AI From To From To Range From To B Note 1 The Range IP could be IPv4 or IPv6 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 90 Maintenance Remot
63. Use the Port Binding screen Section 12 3 on page 162 to set up port binding groups Use the Port Binding Summary screen Section 12 3 1 on page 163 to view configured port binding groups 12 2 The Port Binding General Screen Use this screen to activate port binding and set up port binding groups Click Network Setting gt Port Binding to display the following screen Figure 74 Network Setting gt Port Binding Oknable Port Binding Disable The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 54 Network Setting gt Port Binding LABEL DESCRIPTION Activated Port Binding Activate or deactivate the port binding feature Apply Add the selected port binding group configuration 12 3 The Port Binding Screen Use this screen to set up port binding groups Click Network Setting gt Port Binding gt Port Binding to display the following screen AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 12 Port Binding Figure 75 Network Setting gt Port Binding gt Port Binding Port Binding Active Group Index ATM VCs Ethernet Wireless LAN Group Summary Enable Port Binding ODisable Group Summary O Activated Deactivated Ov PVC o 4 2 3 4 5 6 7 En 4 2 3 4 A P 5 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 55 Network Setting gt Port Binding gt Port Binding LABEL DE
64. User s Guide Chapter 11 Network Address Translation NAT One to One In One to One mode the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries maps one local IP address to one global IP address e Many to One In Many to One mode the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries maps multiple local IP addresses to one global IP address This is equivalent to SUA for instance PAT port address translation ZyXEL s Single User Account feature that previous ZyXEL routers supported the SUA Only option in today s routers e Many to Many Overload In Many to Many Overload mode the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries maps the multiple local IP addresses to shared global IP addresses e Many to Many No Overload In Many to Many No Overload mode the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries maps each local IP address to a unique global IP address e Server This type allows you to specify inside servers of different services behind the NAT to be accessible to the outside world Port numbers do NOT change for One to One and Many to Many No Overload NAT mapping types The following table summarizes these types Table 53 NAT Mapping Types TYPE IP MAPPING One to One ILA1 2 IGA1 Many to One SUA PAT ILA1 IGA1 ILA2 IGA1 Many to Many Overload ILA1 IGA1 ILA2 2 IGA2 ILA3 2 IGA1 ILA4 5 IGA2 Many to Many No Overload ILA1 IGA1 ILA2 gt IGA2 ILA3 2 IGA3 Server Server 1 IP gt IGA1 Server 2 IP gt IGA1 Server 3 IP gt IGA1
65. WPS Works When two WPS enabled devices connect each device must assume a specific role One device acts as the registrar the device that supplies network and security settings and the other device acts as the enrollee the device that receives network and security settings The registrar creates a secure EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol tunnel and sends the network name SSID and the WPA2 PSK pre shared key to the enrollee If the registrar is already part of a network it sends the existing information If not it generates the SSID and WPA2 PSK randomly The following figure shows a WPS enabled client installed in a notebook computer connecting to a WPS enabled access point AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide ns Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Figure 43 How WPS works ACTIVATE ACTIVATE WPS WPS WITHIN 2 MINUTES WPS HANDSHAKE SECURE TUNNEL SECURITY INFO COMMUNICATION X The roles of registrar and enrollee last only as long as the WPS setup process is active two minutes The next time you use WPS a different device can be the registrar if necessary The WPS connection process is like a handshake only two devices participate in each WPS transaction If you want to add more devices you should repeat the process with one of the existing networked devices and the new device Note that the access point AP is not always the registrar and the wireless client is not always the enrollee
66. You may use any character not including spaces Certificate Detail This read only text box displays the certificate or certification request in Privacy Enhanced Mail PEM format PEM uses 64 ASCII characters to convert the binary certificate into a printable form You can copy and paste the certificate into an e mail to send to friends or colleagues or you can copy and paste the certificate into a text editor and save the file on a management computer for later distribution via floppy disk for example Back Click this to return to the previous screen AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 17 Certificate AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Logs 18 1 Overview The web configurator allows you to choose which categories of events and or alerts to have the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries log and then display the logs or have the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries send them to an administrator as e mail or to a syslog server 18 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter e Use the Log screen to see the system logs for the categories that you select Section 18 2 on page 202 18 1 2 What You Need To Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter Alerts and Logs An alert is a type of log that warrants more serious attention They include system errors attacks access control and attempted access to blocked web sites Some categories such as System Errors consist of both logs
67. and System Info Screens Figure 16 Connection Status List View LAN Device Viewing mode Refresh Interval DeviceName IPAddress LinklocallPv6 Address Global IPv6 Address MAC Address Reserve m Unknown 192 168 1 60 NIA MIA m Unknown 192 168 1 11 NIA N A 6C F0 49 70 12 C5 El 00 24 1D 7F 34 05 El In I con View if you want to view information about a client click the client s name and then click on Info In List View you can also view the client s information 5 3 The System Info Screen Click Connection Status System Info to open this screen Figure 17 System Info Screen ZyXEL amc1302 m108 Wizard System Info Device Information Host Name ir f a Model Name 1 MAC Address FCFS Firmware Version N A N A N A DSL Version WAN Information DSL Mode Annex Type IP Address Default Gateway Primary DNS Secondary DNS IPv6 Global IP IPv6 Prefix Length IPV6 Gateway IPV6 WAN DNS1 IPv6 WAN DNS2 Link Local Address IPv4IPv6 MTU VPUVCI LAN Information IP Address DHCP IPv6 Address Link local IPv6 Address IPv6 Prefix IP amp IPvA Dual 5 iss Stack TET IP Subnet Mask IP SubnetMask 2 DSL Up Time System Up Time Current Date Time PPPoE Up Time System Resource CPU Usage Memory Usage DSL Down Bandwith Usage DSL Up Bandwith Usage Each field is des
68. and could potentially expose your network to significant security risks This option should only be used for troubleshooting or if you intend using another firewall in conjunction with your ZyXEL router Apply Click this to save your changes Cancel Click this to restore your previously saved settings 15 3 The Default Action Screen Use this screen to set the default action that the firewall takes on packets that do not match any of the firewall rules Click Security gt Firewall gt Default Action to display the following screen Figure 82 Security gt Firewall gt Default Action Packet Direction Default Action WAN to LAN Drop LAN to WAN Permit v WAN to Router Drop LAN to Router Permit ncs 176 AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 15 Firewall The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 61 Security Firewall Default Action LABEL DESCRIPTION Packet Direction This is the direction of travel of packets LAN to Router LAN to WAN WAN to Router WAN to LAN Firewall rules are grouped based on the direction of travel of packets to which they apply For example LAN to Router means packets traveling from a computer subnet on the LAN to the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries itself Default Action Use the drop down list boxes to select the default action that the firewall is to take on packets that are traveling in the selected direction an
69. and type 2 in the o clock field Daylight Saving Time starts in the European Union on the last Sunday of March All of the time zones in the European Union start using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment 1 A M GMT or UTC So in the European Union you would select Last Sunday March The time you type in the o clock field depends on your time zone In Germany for instance you would type 2 because Germany s time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC GMT 1 End Date Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time ends if you selected Enable Daylight Saving The o clock field uses the 24 hour format Here are a couple of examples Daylight Saving Time ends in the United States on the first Sunday of November Each time zone in the United States stops using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A M local time So in the United States you would select First Sunday November and type 2 in the o clock field Daylight Saving Time ends in the European Union on the last Sunday of October All of the time zones in the European Union stop using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment 1 A M GMT or UTC So in the European Union you would select Last Sunday October The time you type in the o clock field depends on your time zone In Germany for instance you would type 2 because Germany s time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC GMT 1 Apply Click this to save your changes Cancel Click this to restore your previousl
70. are behaving as expected See the Quick Start Guide and Section 27 1 on page 225 Make sure you entered your ISP account information correctly in the wizard These fields are case sensitive so make sure Caps Lock is not on If you are trying to access the Internet wirelessly make sure the wireless settings in the wireless client are the same as the settings in the AP If you are trying to access the Internet wirelessly make sure you enabled the wireless LAN and have selected the correct country and channel in which your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries operates in the Wireless LAN gt AP screen Disconnect all the cables from your device and follow the directions in the Quick Start Guide again If the problem continues contact your ISP I cannot access the Internet anymore I had access to the Internet with the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries but my Internet connection is not available anymore Check the hardware connections and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected See the Quick Start Guide and Section 27 1 on page 225 Turn the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries off and on If the problem continues contact your ISP The Internet connection is slow or intermittent There might be a lot of traffic on the network Look at the LEDs and check Section 27 1 on page 225 If the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries is sending or receiving a lot of information try closing some programs that use the Internet especially peer to peer applications
71. authentication These two features are optional and may not be supported in all wireless devices Key caching allows a wireless client to store the PMK it derived through a successful authentication with an AP The wireless client uses the PMK when it tries to connect to the same AP and does not need to go with the authentication process again Pre authentication enables fast roaming by allowing the wireless client already connecting to an AP to perform IEEE 802 1x authentication with another AP before connecting to it Wireless Client WPA Supplicants A wireless client supplicant is the software that runs on an operating system instructing the wireless client how to use WPA At the time of writing the most widely available supplicant is the WPA patch for Windows XP Funk Software s Odyssey client The Windows XP patch is a free download that adds WPA capability to Windows XP s built in Zero Configuration wireless client However you must run Windows XP to use it AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs WPA 2 with RADIUS Application Example To set up WPA 2 you need the IP address of the RADIUS server its port number default is 1812 and the RADIUS shared secret A WPA 2 application example with an external RADIUS server looks as follows A is the RADIUS server DS is the distribution system 1 The AP passes the wireless client s authentication request to the RADIUS server 2 The RADIUS serv
72. clicking Network Setting Port Binding and select Activated Port Binding to turn on the port binding feature 2 Click the Port Binding tab specify the Group Index and select the ports to include in the port binding group Click Apply AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 4 Tutorials Enable Port Binding Opisable Port Binding Active Group Index ATM VCs Ethernet Wireless LAN Group Summary Group Summary O Activated O Deactivated 0 v OOOoOoOoO oO 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 PVC Port Binding Summary o zm Group PVC1 eth2 APO Group1 PVCO eth1 3 The configured groups can be viewed by clicking the Port Binding Summary button See the Port Binding chapter Chapter 12 on page 161 for more details on configuring port binding 4 10 Configuring QoS to Prioritize Traffic This section contains tutorials on how you can configure the QoS screen Let s say you are a team leader of a small sales branch office You want to prioritize e mail traffic because your task includes sending urgent updates to clients at least twice every hour You also upload data files such as logs and e mail archives to the FTP server throughout the day Your colleagues use the Internet for research as well as chat applications for communicating with other branch offices In the following figure you want to configure QoS so that e mail traffic gets the highest priority You can do the following e
73. eRe TT rT etre RTT Ten VERI REEMEIVIUREEVRDRCHRDUKRERV KE nr re rrr rrr Tren nr errr 224 282 1 Cetaunna die WWW SEOFOB ie quete vc vdaeeee sata tage rre T EE 224 2o The IBN SUPBEUL accede epr CURRERE S NESEEFUS MEE SA UC FE LEE EAR MEAS A uii F alan E AIR REM idis RC Mdg RAE ES 226 gs THE T CP o TE NE NAAA E en Dub DIS RE EUR di n v A A cusan dud p CS 226 255 Thg SNIME Seo cci etc ul d tee Quin p EFL en IEEE I Ioco Die Ee ded pee Qupd n daghieee vui iE pom diinhe 227 em d Conana SNMP airiai kr Go wer Gad pt an a re C a teda tus va ad rada 228 CX NM T Bl eges DM SOUPE T 230 Wadi tuc MR 230 zm Icons M ET BEN Loin ud GERE RPORRRR aab OF ael PERI a ERR ub UREAV ob a ERE CEA n A ao A 231 ZERO SSH ESHIDDIG cus ieu ieboee uiiibereladed tute Uie be i lapin aed Leru Hd ubbpcE Dedi Pes qiudun Fra tade ide qU dddonbe 232 AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide EN Table of Contents Chapter 26 i o M 235 Bo qu E UB Meee een RD EHE Ene eter eee a eT enon Ee OM let Meters ei iT d 235 26 1 1 What You Gan Do in the Diagnostic DOFGOINE xicccdascescsceasteisceredastedctateenaed nadieeeasdedeniereasuaniees 235 CORE Xe D IE ri RTT MMC 235 253 The DSL Lie ODIT o eiie pp UD RE TK INE PPAU MIS PETAT FUR Ret P Y kN E PPY REOR UP MN UD REM PA OIN PPAR BE DI QUE E DPTM EP EO 236 Chapter 27 icu 239 27 Power Hardware Connections
74. enrollee by pressing the WPS button on the registrar and the first enrollee for example then check that it successfully enrolled then set up the second device in the same way WPS works only with other WPS enabled devices However you can still add non WPS devices to a network you already set up using WPS WPS works by automatically issuing a randomly generated WPA2 PSK pre shared key from the registrar device to the enrollee devices You can check the configuration interface of the registrar device to discover the key the network is using if the device supports this feature Then you can enter the key into the non WPS device and join the network as normal the non WPS device must also support WPA2 PSK When you use the PBC method there is a short period from the moment you press the button on one device to the moment you press the button on the other device when any WPS enabled device could join the network This is because the registrar has no way of identifying the correct enrollee and cannot differentiate between your enrollee and a rogue device This is a possible way for a hacker to gain access to a network You can easily check to see if this has happened WPS works between only two devices simultaneously so if another device has enrolled your device will be unable to enroll and will not have access to the network If this happens open the access point s configuration interface and look at the list of associated clients u
75. flows All packets in the same flow are given the same priority 802 1p is a way of managing traffic in a network by grouping similar types of traffic together and treating each type as a class You can use 802 1p to give different priorities to different packet types Tagging and Marking In a QoS class you can configure whether to add or change the DiffServ Code Point DSCP value and IEEE 802 1p priority level in a matched packet When the packet passes through a compatible network the networking device such as a backbone switch can provide specific treatment or service based on the tag or marker Finding Out More See Section 10 6 on page 148 for advanced technical information on QoS 10 2 The Quality of Service General Screen Use this screen to enable or disable QoS and set the upstream bandwidth Click Network Setting QoS General to open the screen as shown next Figure 60 Network Setting QoS General C Active QoS Traffic priority will be automatically assigned by None v AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 10 Quality of Service QoS The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 40 Network Setting gt QoS gt General LABEL DESCRIPTION Active QoS Use this field to turn on QoS to improve your network performance Traffic priority will be automatically assigned by Apply Select how the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries assigns priorities to va
76. for private use please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise Let s say you select 192 168 1 0 as the network number which covers 254 individual addresses from 192 168 1 1 to 192 168 1 254 zero and 255 are reserved In other words the first three numbers specify the network number while the last number identifies an individual computer on that network Once you have decided on the network number pick an IP address that is easy to remember for instance 192 168 1 1 for your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries but make sure that no other device on your network is using that IP address The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address Your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered You don t need to change the subnet mask computed by the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries unless you are instructed to do otherwise Private IP Addresses Every machine on the Internet must have a unique address If your networks are isolated from the Internet for example only between your two branch offices you can assign any IP addresses to the hosts without problems However the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority IANA has reserved the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks e 10 0 0 0 10 255 255 255 e 172 16 0 0 172 31 255 255 132 AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 8 Home Networking e 192 168 0 0
77. installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this device does cause harmful interference to radio television reception which can be determined by turning the device off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help FCC Radiation Exposure Statement This transmitter must not be co located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter e IEEE 802 11b 802 11g or 802 11n 20MHz operation of this product in the U S A is firmware limited to channels 1 through 11 IEEE 802 11n 40MHz operation of this product in the U S A is firmware limited to channels 3 through 9 To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons Note only channels 1 to 11 frequency band 2 412 GHz to 2 462 GHz are available for use in the United States of America AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Appendix G Legal Information
78. low level of latency delay and a low level of jitter variations in delay such as Voice over IP VoIP or Internet gaming and those for which jitter alone is a problem such as Internet radio or streaming video In the following figure your Internet connection has an upstream transmission speed of 50 Mbps You configure a classifier to assign the highest priority queue 6 to VoIP traffic from the LAN interface so that voice traffic would not get delayed when there is network congestion Traffic from the boss s IP address 192 168 1 23 for example is mapped to queue 5 Traffic that does not match these two classes are assigned priority queue based on the internal QoS mapping table on the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries Figure 59 QoS Example VoIP Queue 6 10 1 1 What You Can Do in the QoS Screens e Use the General screen Section 10 2 on page 140 to enable QoS on the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries and specify the type of scheduling AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 10 Quality of Service QoS Use the Queue screen Section 10 3 on page 141 to configure QoS settings on the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries Use the Class Setup screen Section 10 4 on page 143 to configure QoS settings on the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries Use the Game List screen Section 10 5 on page 147 to give priority to traffic for specific games 10 1 2 What You Need to Know About QoS 802 1p QoS is used to prioritize source to destination traffic
79. negotiation The AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries supports the IPCP DNS server extensions through the DNS proxy feature Please note that DNS proxy works only when the ISP uses the IPCP DNS server extensions It does not mean you can leave the DNS servers out of the DHCP setup under all circumstances If your ISP gives you explicit DNS servers make sure that you enter their IP addresses in the DHCP Setup screen 8 7 4 LAN TCP IP The AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries has built in DHCP server capability that assigns IP addresses and DNS servers to systems that support DHCP client capability IP Address and Subnet Mask Similar to the way houses on a street share a common street name so too do computers on a LAN share one common network number Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation If the ISP or your network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP addresses follow their instructions in selecting the IP addresses and the subnet mask If the ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number then most likely you have a single user account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when the connection is established If this is the case it is recommended that you select a network number from 192 168 0 0 to 192 168 255 0 and you must enable the Network Address Translation NAT feature of the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries The Internet Assigned Number Authority IANA reserved this block of addresses specifically
80. nfo screen the Connection Status screen appears See Chapter 5 on page 67 for more information about the Connection Status screen If you click Virtual Device on the System Info screen a visual graphic appears showing the connection status of the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries s ports The connected ports are in color and disconnected ports are gray 2 2 3 Navigation Panel Use the menu items on the navigation panel to open screens to configure AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries features The following table describes each menu item Table 2 Navigation Panel Summary Authentication LINK TAB FUNCTION Connection Status This screen shows the network status of the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries and computers devices connected to it Network Setting Broadband Internet Use this screen to configure ISP parameters WAN IP address Connection assignment DNS servers and other advanced properties More Connections Use this screen to configure additional WAN connections Wireless General Use this screen to turn the wireless connection on or off specify the SSID s and configure the wireless LAN settings and WLAN authentication security settings More AP Use this screen to configure multiple BSSs on the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries MAC Use this screen to block or allow wireless traffic from wireless devices of certain SSIDs and MAC addresses to the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries WPS Use this screen to use WPS Wi Fi Protected Se
81. on this interface 19 4 The NAT Screen Click System Monitor gt Traffic Status gt NAT to open the following screen You can view the NAT status of the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries s client s in this screen Figure 102 System Monitor gt Traffic Status gt NAT Refresh Interval 10 Sec Device Name IP Address MAC Address No of Open Session Unknown 192 168 1 60 6C F0 49 70 12 C5 103 Total 103 The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 78 System Monitor gt Traffic Status gt NAT LABEL DESCRIPTION Refresh Interval Select how often you want the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries to update this screen from the drop down list box Set Interval Click this button to apply the new poll interval you entered in the Refresh Interval field Stop Click Stop to stop refreshing statistics Device Name This shows the name of the client IP Address This shows the IP address of the client MAC Address This shows the MAC address of the client No of Open This shows the number of NAT sessions used by the client Session AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide 205 Chapter 19 Traffic Status AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide User Account 20 1 Overview You can configure system password for different user accounts in the User Account screen 20 2 The User Account Screen Use the User Account screen to configure system password Click Maintenance gt User
82. or click Browse to find it Browse Click this to find the file you want to upload Remember that you must decompress compressed ZIP files before you can upload them Upload Click this to begin the upload process Reset Click this to reset your device settings back to the factory default Do not turn off the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries while configuration file upload is in progress After the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries configuration has been restored successfully the login screen appears Login again to restart the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries The AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect In some operating systems you may see the following icon on your desktop Figure 113 Network Temporarily Disconnected Local Area Connection Network cable unplugged 10 44 If you restore the default configuration you may need to change the IP address of your computer to be in the same subnet as that of the default device IP address 192 168 1 1 See Appendix A on page 245 for details on how to set up your computer s IP address If the upload was not successful an error screen will appear Click OK to go back to the Configuration screen Reset to Factory Defaults Click the Reset button to clear all user entered configuration information and return the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries to its factory defaults The following warning screen appears Figure 114 Reset Warnin
83. password 1 The default admin user name and password can be found on the cover of this User s Guide 2 If this does not work you have to reset the device to its factory defaults See Section 1 7 on page 19 I cannot see or access the Login screen for the web configurator 1 Make sure you are using the correct IP address e The default IP address is 192 168 1 1 e If you changed the IP address Section 8 2 on page 123 use the new IP address e If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it see the troubleshooting suggestions for I forgot the IP address for the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries 2 Check the hardware connections and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected See the Quick Start Guide 3 Make sure your Internet browser does not block pop up windows and has JavaScripts and Java enabled See Appendix C on page 273 AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 27 Troubleshooting 4 Reset the device to its factory defaults and try to access the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries with the default IP address See Section 1 7 on page 19 5 If the problem continues contact the network administrator or vendor or try one of the advanced suggestions Advanced Suggestions e Try to access the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries using another service such as Telnet If you can access the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries check the remote management settings and firewall rules to find out why the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries does not respond to HTTP
84. please see sections 4 and 5 of RFC 2236 The class D IP address is used to identify host groups and can be in the range 224 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 The address 224 0 0 0 is not assigned to any group and is used by IP multicast computers The address AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide 133 Chapter 8 Home Networking 224 0 0 1 is used for query messages and is assigned to the permanent group of all IP hosts including gateways All hosts must join the 224 0 0 1 group in order to participate in IGMP The address 224 0 0 2 is assigned to the multicast routers group At start up the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries queries all directly connected networks to gather group membership After that the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries periodically updates this information IP multicasting can be enabled disabled on the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries LAN and or WAN interfaces in the web configurator LAN WAN Select None to disable IP multicasting on these interfaces AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Static Route 9 1 Overview The AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries usually uses the default gateway to route outbound traffic from computers on the LAN to the Internet To have the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries send data to devices not reachable through the default gateway use static routes For example the next figure shows a computer A connected to the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries s LAN interface The AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries routes most traffic from A to the Interne
85. pop up windows IV Load images automatically v Enable JavaScript IV Enable Java Exceptions Exceptions Advanced r Fonts amp C olors Default font Times New Roman Size 16 Advanced Colors E r File Types Configure how FireFox handles certain types of Files E 5 Cancel Help AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide 279 Appendix C Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Wireless LANs Wireless LAN Topologies This section discusses ad hoc and infrastructure wireless LAN topologies Ad hoc Wireless LAN Configuration BSS The simplest WLAN configuration is an independent Ad hoc WLAN that connects a set of computers with wireless adapters A B C Any time two or more wireless adapters are within range of each other they can set up an independent network which is commonly referred to as an ad hoc network or Independent Basic Service Set IBSS The following diagram shows an example of notebook computers using wireless adapters to form an ad hoc wireless LAN Figure 172 Peer to Peer Communication in an Ad hoc Network A Basic Service Set BSS exists when all communications between wireless clients or between a wireless client and a wired network client go through one access point AP Intra BSS traffic is traffic between wireless clients in the BSS When Intra BSS is enab
86. slu n ustanovenia Smernice 1999 5 EC Finnish ZyXEL vakuuttaa t ten ett laitteet tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999 5 EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sit koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen Swedish H rmed intygar ZyXEL att denna utrustning st r I verensst mmelse med de v sentliga egenskapskrav och vriga relevanta best mmelser som framgar av direktiv 1999 5 EC Bulgarian C Hacrosujoro ZyXEL Aeknapupa ue roBa O60pyABaHe e B CbOTBeTCTBMe CbC CblljecTBeHuTe N3ZNCKBAHNA N Apyrute npunoxuMau pasnopez6ure Ha Aupektusa 1999 5 EC Icelandic H r me l sir ZyXEL v yfir a essi b na ur er samr mi vi grunnkr fur og nnur vi eigandi kv i tilskipunar 1999 5 EC Norwegian Erkl rer herved ZyXEL at dette utstyret er I samsvar med de grunnleggende kravene og andre relevante bestemmelser I direktiv 1999 5 EF Romanian Prin prezenta ZyXEL declar c acest echipament este n conformitate cu cerin ele esen iale si alte prevederi relevante ale Directivei 1999 5 EC National Restrictions This product may be used in all EU countries and other countries following the EU directive 1999 5 EC without any limitation except for the countries mentioned below Ce produit peut tre utilis dans tous les pays de l UE et dans tous les pays ayant transpos s la directive 1999 5 CE sans aucune limitation except pour les pays mentionn s ci dessous Questo prodott
87. that can be sent in the wireless network before the AP will fragment the packet into smaller data frames A large Fragmentation Threshold is recommended for networks not prone to interference while you should set a smaller threshold for busy networks or networks that are prone to interference If the Fragmentation Threshold value is smaller than the RTS CTS value see previously you set then the RTS Request To Send CTS Clear to Send handshake will never occur as data frames will be fragmented before they reach RTS CTS size AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs Preamble Type Preamble is used to signal that data is coming to the receiver Short and long refer to the length of the synchronization field in a packet Short preamble increases performance as less time sending preamble means more time for sending data All IEEE 802 11 compliant wireless adapters support long preamble but not all support short preamble Use long preamble if you are unsure what preamble mode other wireless devices on the network support and to provide more reliable communications in busy wireless networks Use short preamble if you are sure all wireless devices on the network support it and to provide more efficient communications Use the dynamic setting to automatically use short preamble when all wireless devices on the network support it otherwise the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries uses long preamble Note The wireles
88. that the device translates for the service in your local network This is the ending port number that the device translates for the service in your local network Server IP Address This is the server s IP address in your local network Modify Click the edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the port forwarding rule Click the delete icon to delete an existing port forwarding rule Note that subsequent address mapping rules move up by one when you take this action 11 3 2 Port Forwarding Rule Add Edit Use this screen to add or edit a port forwarding rule Click the Add new rule button or a rule s edit icon in the Port Forwarding screen to display the screen as shown next AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 11 Network Address Translation NAT Figure 69 Network Setting gt NAT gt Port Forwarding Add Edit Active Service Name External Start Port External End Port Server IP Address Protocol Open Start Port Open End Port User Define v ALL w The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 50 Network Setting gt NAT gt Port Forwarding Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Click this check box to enable the rule Service Name Enter a name to identify this port forwarding rule External Start Port Enter a port number in this field To forward only one port enter the port number again in the
89. the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries automatically generate a password The password field will not be configurable when you select this option Password The password WEP key are used to encrypt data Both the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries and the wireless stations must use the same password WEP key for data transmission If you chose 64 bit WEP then enter any 5 ASCII characters or 10 hexadecimal characters 0 9 A F If you chose 128 bit WEP then enter 13 ASCII characters or 26 hexadecimal characters 0 9 A F WEP Encryption Select 64 bits or 128 bits This dictates the length of the security key that the network is going to use 7 2 3 More Secure WPA 2 PSK The WPA PSK security mode provides both improved data encryption and user authentication over WEP Using a Pre Shared Key PSK both the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries and the connecting client share a common password in order to validate the connection This type of encryption while robust is not as strong as WPA WPA2 or even WPA2 PSK The WPA2 PSK security mode is a newer more robust version of the WPA encryption standard It offers slightly better security although the use of PSK makes it less robust than it could be AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Click Network Setting Wireless to display the General screen Select More Secure as the security level Then select WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK from the Security Mode list
90. the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries s default rules 15 6 2 Guidelines For Enhancing Security With Your Firewall 6 7 10 Change the default password via web configurator Think about access control before you connect to the network in any way Limit who can access your router Don t enable any local service such as telnet or FTP that you don t use Any enabled service could present a potential security risk A determined hacker might be able to find creative ways to misuse the enabled services to access the firewall or the network For local services that are enabled protect against misuse Protect by configuring the services to communicate only with specific peers and protect by configuring rules to block packets for the services at specific interfaces AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide 187 Chapter 15 Firewall Protect against IP spoofing by making sure the firewall is active 12 Keep the firewall in a secured locked room 15 6 3 Security Considerations Note Incorrectly configuring the firewall may block valid access or introduce security risks to the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries and your protected network Use caution when creating or deleting firewall rules and test your rules after you configure them Consider these security ramifications before creating a rule Does this rule stop LAN users from accessing critical resources on the Internet For example if IRC is blocked are there users that require this service
91. the mode you select in the Mode field If you select Router in the Mode field select PPPoA RFC 1483 ENET ENCAP or PPPoE If you select Bridge in the Mode field method of encapsulation is not available Multiplex Select the method of multiplexing used by your ISP from the drop down list Choices are VC or LLC By prior agreement a protocol is assigned a specific virtual circuit for example VC1 will carry IP If you select VC specify separate VPI and VCI numbers for each protocol For LLC based multiplexing or PPP encapsulation one VC carries multiple protocols with protocol identifying information being contained in each packet header In this case only one set of VPI and VCI numbers need be specified for all protocols IPv6 IPv4 Dual Stack If you select Enable the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries can connect to IPv4 and IPv6 networks and choose the protocol for applications according to the address type If you select Disable the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries will operate in IPv4 mode VPI The valid range for the VPI is 0 to 255 Enter the VPI assigned to you VCI The valid range for the VCI is 32 to 65535 0 to 31 is reserved for local management of ATM traffic Enter the VCI assigned to you IP Address This option is available if you select Router in the Mode field A static IP address is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you A dynamic IP address is not fixed the ISP assigns you a different one each time you connect t
92. the same network segment as the device s LAN or WAN port The gateway helps forward packets to their destinations Subnet Mask This parameter specifies the IP network subnet mask of the final destination Metric Modify This is the number of transmission hops between this AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries and the destination Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can set up a static route on the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries Click the Delete icon to remove a static route from the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries A window displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete the route 9 2 1 Static Route Add Edit Use this screen to add or edit a static route Click Add new Static Route Entry in the Routing screen or the Edit icon next to the static route you want to edit The screen shown next appears AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 9 Static Route Figure 56 Network Setting Static Route Add Edit IP Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address Metric Add New Static Route x Destination IP Address 192 168 10 0 255 255 255 0 192 168 1 253 1 Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 37 Network Setting gt Static Route Add Edit LABEL Destination IP Address DESCRIPTION This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination Routing is always based on network number If you need to specify a route to a single host use a sub
93. to a static DHCP entry the following screen displays Figure 49 Static DHCP Add Edit Add New Static Lease x MAC Address IP Address AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 8 Home Networking The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 32 Static DHCP Add Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION MAC Address If you select Manual Input in the Select Device I nfo field enter the MAC address of a computer on your LAN IP Address If you select Manual I nput in the Select Device I nfo field enter the IP address that you want to assign to the computer on your LAN with the MAC address that you will also specify OK Click OK to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving 8 4 The UPnP Screen Universal Plug and Play UPnP is a distributed open networking standard that uses TCP IP for simple peer to peer network connectivity between devices A UPnP device can dynamically join a network obtain an IP address convey its capabilities and learn about other devices on the network In turn a device can leave a network smoothly and automatically when it is no longer in use See page 122 for more information on UPnP Use the following screen to enable or disable the UPnP function on your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries Click Network Setting gt Home Networking gt UPnP to display the screen shown next Figure 50 Network Setting gt Home Networking gt
94. to enable or disable the wireless LAN Click Network Setting gt Wireless gt Scheduling The following screen displays Figure 37 Network Setting gt Wireless gt Scheduling WLAN Power Off Scheduling Enable Disable settings are invalid when disabled AddNewRule RuleName Days Startfime EndTime Modify 1 Everyday pagoi 0 0 23 59 ZW B Note Specify the same begin time and end time means the whole day schedule The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 26 Network Setting gt Wireless gt Scheduling LABEL DESCRIPTION Wireless LAN Select Enable or Disable to activate or deactivate wireless LAN scheduling on your Scheduling AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries State Select On or Off to enable or disable the wireless LAN Day Check the day s you want to turn the wireless LAN on or off AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide 105 Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Table 26 Network Setting Wireless Scheduling LABEL DESCRIPTION Time 24 Hour Specify a time frame during which the schedule would apply SOROR For example if you set the time range from 12 00 to 23 00 the wireless LAN will be turned on only during this time period Apply Click this to save your changes Cancel Click this to restore your previously saved settings 7T 9 The Advanced Screen Use this screen to configure advanced wireless settings Click Network Setting gt Wireless gt
95. valid MAC address format six hexadecimal character pairs for example 12 34 56 78 9a bc PSK Enter a Pre Shared Key PSK from 8 to 63 case sensitive ASCII characters including spaces and symbols Apply Click this to save your changes Cancel Click this to restore your previously saved settings 7 7 The WMM Screen Use this screen to enable WiFi MultiMedia WMM and WMM Power Save in wireless networks for multimedia applications AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Click Network Setting Wireless WMM The following screen displays Figure 36 Network Setting Wireless WMM Enable WMM of SSID1 Enable WMM of SSID2 Enable WMM of SSID3 Enable WMM of SSID4 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 25 Network Setting gt Wireless gt WMM LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable WMM of Use the checkboxes to determine whether to have the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries SSID1 4 automatically give a service a priority level according to the ToS value in the IP header of packets it sends for a wireless network WMM QoS WiFi MultiMedia Quality of Service gives high priority to voice and video which makes them run more smoothly Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings 7 8 The Scheduling Screen Use the wireless LAN scheduling to configure the days you want
96. your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries and restart your computer when prompted Verifying Settings 1 Click Start and then Run 2 Inthe Run window type winipcfg and then click OK to open the IP Configuration window 3 Select your network adapter You should see your computer s IP address subnet mask and default gateway Windows 2000 NT XP The following example figures use the default Windows XP GUI theme 1 Click start Start in Windows 2000 NT Settings Control Panel Figure 130 Windows XP Start Menu Internet Explorer _ My Documents a Outlook Express W Paint 8 Files and Settings Transfer W BJ Command Prompt e My Music E Acrobat Reader 4 0 Ws My Computer Tour Windows XP Windows Movie Maker B control Panel 2 My Recent Documents gt e My Pictures ue 1 Printers and Faxes Q9 Help and Support Search All Programs gt 17 Run Log Off 0 Turn Off Computer 5 untitled Paint 2 Inthe Control Panel double click Network Connections Network and Dial up Connections in Windows 2000 NT AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Appendix A Setting up Your Computer s IP Address Figure 131 Windows XP Control Panel amp Control Panel File Edit View Favorites Tools Help B PP Search E Folders Ez Address Control Panel Vg Control Panel Je Switch to Category View Connections rnm See Also GA Fonts Ab Windows Update A
97. 02 TSeries AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 5 Connection Status and System Info Screens 70 LABEL DESCRIPTION DHCP This field displays what DHCP services the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries is providing to the LAN Choices are Server The AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries is a DHCP server in the LAN It assigns IP addresses to other computers in the LAN Relay The AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries acts as a surrogate DHCP server and relays DHCP requests and responses between the remote server and the clients None The AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries is not providing any DHCP services to the LAN IPv6 LAN DNS1 2 WLAN Information This is the first second DNS server IPv6 address the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries passes to the DHCP clients Status This displays whether wireless LAN is turned on or off SSID This is the descriptive name used to identify the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries in the wireless LAN Channel This is the channel number used by the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries now Security Mode This displays the type of security the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries is using in the wireless LAN WPS Configured displays when the WPS security settings have been configured and wireless clients can connect with the device through WPS Unconfigured displays when the device has not been configured and wireless clients can t establish a link with the device through WPS Scheduling This displays whether WLAN schedul
98. 1000000 10101000 00000001 10000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 129 192 168 1 128 Broadcast Address Highest Host ID 192 168 1 190 192 168 1 191 Table 101 Subnet 4 IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER LAST OCTET BIT VALUE IP Address 192 168 1 192 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 11000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address 192 168 1 192 Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 193 Broadcast Address 192 168 1 255 Highest Host ID 192 168 1 254 Eight Subnets Similarly use a 27 bit mask to create eight subnets 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 and 111 The following table shows IP address last octet values for each subnet Table 102 Eight Subnets SUBNET ADDRESS FIRST ADDRESS ADDRESS ADDRESS 1 0 1 30 31 2 32 33 62 63 3 64 65 94 95 4 96 97 126 127 5 128 129 158 159 6 160 161 190 191 7 192 193 222 223 8 224 225 254 255 270 AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting Subnet Planning The following table is a summary for subnet planning on a network with a 24 bit network number Table 103 24 bit Network Number Subnet Planning NO BORROWED SUBNET MASK NO SUBNETS NO HOSTS PER 1 255 255 255 128 25 2 126 2 255 255 255 192 26 4 62 3
99. 1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Table 21 More AP Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Security Mode Select Basic WEP or More Secure WPA 2 PSK WPA 2 to add security on this wireless network The wireless clients which want to associate to this network must have same wireless security settings as the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries After you select to use a security additional options appears in this screen Or you can select No Security to allow any client to associate this network without any data encryption or authentication OK Click OK to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving 7 4 The MAC Authentication Screen This screen allows you to configure the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries to give exclusive access to specific devices Allow or exclude specific devices from accessing the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries Deny Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC Media Access Control address The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters for example 00 A0 C5 00 00 02 You need to know the MAC addresses of the devices to configure this screen Use this screen to view your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries s MAC filter settings and add new MAC filter rules Click Network Setting Wireless MAC Authentication The screen appears as shown Figure 33 Network Setting Wireless MAC Authentication General SSID
100. 1202 TSeries User s Guide Firewall 15 1 Overview This chapter shows you how to enable the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries firewall Use the firewall to protect your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries and network from attacks by hackers on the Internet and control access to it The firewall allows traffic that originates from your LAN computers to go to all other networks e blocks traffic that originates on other networks from going to the LAN e blocks SYN and port scanner attacks By default the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries blocks DDOS LAND and Ping of Death attacks whether the firewall is enabled or disabled The following figure illustrates the firewall action User A can initiate an IM Instant Messaging session from the LAN to the WAN 1 Return traffic for this session is also allowed 2 However other traffic initiated from the WAN is blocked 3 and 4 Figure 80 Default Firewall Action LAN WAN 15 1 1 What You Can Do in the Firewall Screens Use the General screen Section 15 2 on page 175 to select the firewall protection level on the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries e Use the Default Action screen Section 15 3 on page 176 to set the default action that the firewall takes on packets that do not match any of the firewall rules Use the Rules screen Section 15 4 on page 178 to view the configured firewall rules and add edit or remove a firewall rule e Use the Dos screen Section 15 5 on page 184 to set the thresholds that the A
101. 1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 15 Firewall 1 Acomputer on the LAN initiates a connection by sending out a SYN packet to a receiving server on the WAN 2 The AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries reroutes the SYN packet through Gateway A on the LAN to the WAN 3 The reply from the WAN goes directly to the computer on the LAN without going through the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries As a result the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries resets the connection as the connection has not been acknowledged Figure 91 Triangle Route Problem LAN WAN 15 6 4 2 Solving the Triangle Route Problem If you have the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries allow triangle route sessions traffic from the WAN can go directly to a LAN computer without passing through the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries and its firewall protection Another solution is to use IP alias IP alias allows you to partition your network into logical sections over the same Ethernet interface Your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries supports up to three logical LAN interfaces with the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries being the gateway for each logical network It s like having multiple LAN networks that actually use the same physical cables and ports By putting your LAN and Gateway A in different subnets all returning network traffic must pass through the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries to your LAN The following steps describe such a scenario 1 Acomputer on the LAN initiates a connection by sending a SYN packet to a receiving server on the WAN
102. 1202 TSeries forwards traffic of this class according to the default routing table If traffic of this class comes from a WAN interface and is in a queue that forwards traffic through the LAN WLAN interface the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries ignores the setting here IPP DS Field Select I PP TOS to specify an IP precedence range and type of services Select DSCP to specify a DiffServ Code Point DSCP range AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 10 Quality of Service QoS Table 44 QoS gt Class Setup Add Edit continued LABEL DESCRIPTION IP Precedence Enter a range from 0 to 7 to re assign IP precedence to matched traffic 0 is the lowest Mark priority and 7 is the highest Type Of Select a type of service to re assign the priority level to matched traffic Service Mark Available options are Normal service Minimize delay Maximize throughput Maximize reliability and Minimize monetary cost DSCP This field is available only when you select I P in the Ether Type field Mark 0 63 If you select Mark enter a DSCP value with which the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries replaces the DSCP field in the packets If you select Unchange the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries keep the DSCP field in the packets 802 1Q Tag If you select Remark select a priority level in the Ethernet Priority field and enter a VLAN ID number in the VLAN ID field with which the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries replaces the IEEE 802 1p priority
103. 1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Appendix C Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions Figure 164 Internet Options Privacy Internet Options PR General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Settings Move the slider to select a privacy setting for the Internet RR zone Medium Blocks third party cookies that do not have a compact privacy policy Blocks third party cookies that use personally identifiable LJ information without your implicit consent Restricts first party cookies that use personally identifiable information without implicit consent Pop up Blocker Prevent most pop up windows from appearing Type the IP address of your device the web page that you do not want to have blocked with the prefix http For example http 192 168 167 1 Click Add to move the IP address to the list of Allowed sites Figure 165 Pop up Blocker Settings Pop up Blocker Settings Exceptions Pop ups are currently blocked You can allow pop ups from specific Web sites by adding the site to the list below ddress of Web site to allow http 4 192 168 1 1 Add Allowed sites Notifications and Filter Level Play a sound when a pop up is blocked Show Information Bar when a pop up is blocked Filter Level M edium E Block most aut omatic pop ups v Pop up Blocker FAQ AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide 275 Appendix C Pop up Win
104. 1302 AMG1202 TSeries is well suited 1 4 1 Internet Access Your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries provides shared Internet access by connecting the DSL port to the DSL or MODEM jack on a splitter or your telephone jack Computers can connect to the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries s Ethernet ports or wirelessly Figure 1 AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries s Router Features LAN WAN You can also configure firewall and filtering feature on the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries for secure Internet access When the firewall is on all incoming traffic from the Internet to your network is blocked unless it is initiated from your network This means that probes from the outside to your network are not allowed but you can safely browse the Internet and download files Use the filtering feature to block access to specific web sites or Internet applications such as MSN or Yahoo Messenger You can also configure IP MAC filtering rules for incoming or outgoing traffic Use QoS to efficiently manage traffic on your network by giving priority to certain types of traffic and or to particular computers For example you could make sure that the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries gives voice over Internet calls high priority and or limit bandwidth devoted to the boss s excessive file downloading 1 4 2 Wireless Access The ZyXEL Device is a wireless Access Point AP for IEEE 802 11b g n compliant clients such as notebook computers or PDAs and iPads It allows them to connect to the Internet witho
105. 168 255 0 The Internet Assigned Number Authority IANA reserved this block of addresses specifically for private use please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise You must also enable Network Address Translation NAT on the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide 271 Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting Once you have decided on the network number pick an IP address for your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries that is easy to remember for instance 192 168 1 1 but make sure that no other device on your network is using that IP address The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address Your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered You don t need to change the subnet mask computed by the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries unless you are instructed to do otherwise Private IP Addresses 272 Every machine on the Internet must have a unique address If your networks are isolated from the Internet running only between two branch offices for example you can assign any IP addresses to the hosts without problems However the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority IANA has reserved the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks e 10 0 0 0 10 255 255 255 e 172 16 0 0 172 31 255 255 e 192 168 0 0 192 168 255 255 You can obtain your IP address from the IANA from an ISP or it can be
106. 202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Table 23 Network Setting gt Wireless gt WPS LABEL DESCRIPTION Register Enter the PIN of the device that you are setting up a WPS connection with and click Register to authenticate and add the wireless device to your wireless network You can find the PIN either on the outside of the device or by checking the device s settings Note You must also activate WPS on that device within two minutes to have it present its PIN to the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries WPS Configuration Summary AP PIN The PIN Personal Identification Number of the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries is shown here Enter this PIN in the configuration utility of the device you want to connect to using WPS The PIN is not necessary when you use WPS push button method Click the Generate New PIN button to have the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries create a new PIN Status This displays Configured when the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries has connected to a wireless network using WPS or Enable WPS is selected and wireless or wireless security settings have been changed The current wireless and wireless security settings also appear in the screen This displays Unconfigured if WPS is disabled and there is no wireless or wireless security changes on the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries or you click Release to remove the configured wireless and wireless security settings Release The default WPS status is Configured Configuration Cli
107. 255 255 255 224 27 8 30 4 255 255 255 240 28 16 14 5 255 255 255 248 29 32 6 6 255 255 255 252 30 64 7 255 255 255 254 31 128 1 The following table is a summary for subnet planning on a network with a 16 bit network number Table 104 16 bit Network Number Subnet Planning NO BORROWED SUBNET MASK NO SUBNETS NO HOSTS PER 1 255 255 128 0 17 2 32766 2 255 255 192 0 18 4 16382 3 255 255 224 0 19 8 8190 4 255 255 240 0 20 16 4094 5 255 255 248 0 21 32 2046 6 255 255 252 0 22 64 1022 7 255 255 254 0 23 128 510 8 255 255 255 0 24 256 254 9 255 255 255 128 25 512 126 10 255 255 255 192 26 1024 62 11 255 255 255 224 27 2048 30 12 255 255 255 240 28 4096 14 13 255 255 255 248 29 8192 14 255 255 255 252 30 16384 15 255 255 255 254 31 32768 1 Configuring IP Addresses Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation If the ISP or your network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP addresses follow their instructions in selecting the IP addresses and the subnet mask If the ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number then most likely you have a single user account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when the connection is established If this is the case it is recommended that you select a network number from 192 168 0 0 to 192
108. 309 CPE WAN Management Protocol see CWMP CTS Clear to Send 284 customized services 181 183 CWMP 209 activation 210 configuration 209 D data fragment threshold 106 109 DDoS 174 default LAN IP address 21 default server address 156 default server NAT 153 Denials of Service see DoS DHCP 70 122 124 131 diagnostic 235 DiffServ Code Point see DSCP digital IDs 195 disclaimer 309 DMZ 156 DNS 122 131 230 documentation related 2 Domain Name System see DNS DoS 174 three way handshake 184 thresholds 175 184 185 DSCP 146 DSL connections status 237 dynamic DNS 165 activation 166 wildcard 165 activation 166 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol see DHCP dynamic WEP key exchange 288 DYNDNS wildcard 165 activation 166 E EAP Authentication 287 encapsulation 73 77 84 ENET ENCAP 86 PPPoA 87 PPPoE 86 RFC 1483 87 encryption 111 289 ENET ENCAP 77 84 86 ESS 282 Extended Service Set IDentification 93 99 Extended Service Set See ESS 282 F FCC interference statement 309 filters 167 IP MAC 167 structure 167 IP MAC filter configuration 168 MAC address 100 110 URL 167 firewalls 173 actions 180 address types 181 anti probing 175 customized services 181 183 DDoS 174 default action 177 DoS 174 thresholds 175 184 185 ICMP 175 LAND attack 174 AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Index logs 180 P2P 185 packet direction 177 Ping of Death 174 rules 186 security 187 S
109. 78 AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide 9 Table of Contents Tao Tbe Phe AO SOG eset sscraversx prt to tC REP E a ERREUR P E a por Pat o P HERE RE ED FA 179 154 2 LUBIOmMIZOH DOBIEBS cudgtesdduestenDotinm ima eE CEPR US eerie Du uaa RR dE En VR EE dn 181 154 3 Customized Serice Add Edil aueiucsacnsipisei tiere ia aa EE c dera npe orco puras 182 D NHg 48 Ru RD D gaa ee A a eave ay Gene toe ds eee 184 15 5 1 The DoS Advanced are Sh Susseridasxitucdsat tene tesa du e rate cte i dicat ba pi tea ab 184 15 32 C onigurinmg Firewall Threshold inei une pcc nep pe n aar E EA 185 196 Firewall Technical Referente osiinsa aa EAR ko odd kc mes cdd ar Eis ca aes nad LUE Kd 186 15 5 1 Firewall Rules Cue VigW 3 2 edv edloe n tied etit rade ont in di gerse tied a Ud E 186 15 6 2 Guidelines For Enhancing Security With Your Firewall seeeeeseeee 187 15 5 3 Secwity Considerations se cd ir erii peak Rua rds nd ausu idR RE Fera ad Sr VA dE SER Fend ud 188 15 5 4 Mangle FOULS ce cuiis cote er boten Ex x pco aepo U e ase tenu E ead Come babes P ATA E E FEE ede UR Pn weseunlaatiadunens 188 Chapter 16 Parama GOMO Beet ere tee 191 pW TII RETO RET RR HERREN 191 16 2 The Farsntal Conirol SOLI actum ite in epo tutd Ui tea itc ta tario tet te etum ta pM EE Ser dee ts 191 18 2 1 Add Edit Parental Gontrol Pile 1 mea o otra Dat da a d Rt E X RE RR d 192 Chapter 17 ei ipp r feme e C
110. AMG1302 TSeries Wireless N ADSL2 4 port Gateway AMG1202 TSeries Wireless N lite ADSL2 4 port Gateway Version 2 00 AAJC 0 Edition 2 5 2013 Default Login Details LAN IP Address http 192 168 1 1 User Name admin Passwor d 1234 Copyright 2013 ZyXEL Communications Corporation IMPORTANT READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USE KEEP THIS GUIDE FOR FUTURE REFERENCE Note This guide is a reference for a series of products Therefore some features or options in this guide may not be available in your product Graphics in this book may differ slightly from the product due to differences in operating systems operating system versions or if you installed updated firmware software for your device Every effort has been made to ensure that the information in this manual is accurate Related Documentation e Quick Start Guide The Quick Start Guide shows how to connect the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries and access the Web Configurator It contains information on setting up your wireless network AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Contents Overview Contents Overview Usora GUNO RETO UD DIDIT LII I IU S a 13 Insee em c T E aes 15 T troducing he Web DODQUEIEDI sisirain d cla va ERR aba dau E reer ren rire Pad tre t OR d 21 internet Wireless Setup Wiz ari cunauiusccuu Deeds ust aa t dude rd RE Rae dE Es 29 Esp e 37 luu n YX
111. All Programs gt Dibbler DHCPv6 gt Client Install as service 3 Select Start Control Panel Administrative Tools Services 4 Double click Dibbler a DHCPv6 client i Services File Action View Help E B Om gt Sy Services Local amp Services Local Dibbler a DHCPv6 client Name Description Status Startup Type Log On As Sy DCOM Server Process Launcher Provides la Started Automatic Local System CI d Dn Start the service bler a DHCPv6 client Ss Distributed Transaction Coordinator Coordinate Network S i ient esolves a arte utomatic etwork 5 Description DNS Client Resol Started al i Network 5 F rror Reporting Service lows erro Starte utomatic ocal System Dibbler a portable DHCPv6 E Ri ting Servi All Started Automati Local Syst This is DHCPv6 ci w Sy Event Log Enables ev Started Automatic Local System Isi cient version Sis Extensible Authentication Protocol Provides wi Manual Local System 0 7 2 SioFast User Switching Compatibility Provides m Manual Local System Sis FLEXnet Licensing Service This servic Manual Local System ES k I A E Extended 5 Click Start and then OK Dibbler a DHCP v6 client Properties Local Computer _ General Log On Recovery Dependencies Service name DHCPv6Client Display name Dibbler a DHCPv6 client Description Dibbler a portable DHCP v6 This is DHCP v6 client version 0 7 2 Path to executable C P
112. All WPS certified APs can be a registrar and so can some WPS enabled wireless clients By default a WPS devices is unconfigured This means that it is not part of an existing network and can act as either enrollee or registrar if it supports both functions If the registrar is unconfigured the security settings it transmits to the enrollee are randomly generated Once a WPS enabled device has connected to another device using WPS it becomes configured A configured wireless client can still act as enrollee or registrar in subsequent WPS connections but a configured access point can no longer act as enrollee It will be the registrar in all subsequent WPS connections in which it is involved If you want a configured AP to act as an enrollee you must reset it to its factory defaults 7 10 8 4 Example WPS Network Setup This section shows how security settings are distributed in an example WPS setup The following figure shows an example network In step 1 both AP1 and Client 1 are unconfigured When WPS is activated on both they perform the handshake In this example AP1 is the registrar and Client 1 is the enrollee The registrar randomly generates the security information to set up the network since it is unconfigured and has no existing information AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Figure 44 WPS Example Network Step 1 ENROLLEE REGISTRAR SECURITY INFO CLIENT 1 AP1 In step 2 you add an
113. Apply Cancel Advanced The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 66 Security Firewall Dos LABEL DESCRIPTION Denial of Services Enable this to protect against DoS attacks The AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries will drop sessions that surpass maximum thresholds Apply Click this to save your changes Cancel Click this to restore your previously saved settings Advanced Click this to go to a screen to specify maximum thresholds at which the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries will start dropping sessions 15 5 1 The DoS Advanced Screen For DoS attacks the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries uses thresholds to determine when to start dropping sessions that do not become fully established half open sessions These thresholds apply globally to all sessions For TCP half open means that the session has not reached the established state the TCP three way handshake has not yet been completed Under normal circumstances the application that initiates a session sends a SYN synchronize packet to the receiving server The receiver sends back an ACK acknowledgment packet and its own SYN and then the initiator responds with an ACK acknowledgment After this handshake a connection is established Figure 88 Three Way Handshake Client Server SYN ACK For UDP half open means that the firewall has detected no return traffic An unusually high number or arrival rate of half open sessions could indicate a DOS a
114. Apply to save your changes back to the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 25 Remote Management 25 6 The DNS Screen Use DNS Domain Name System to map a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa Use this screen to set from which IP address the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries will accept DNS queries and on which interface it can send them your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries s DNS settings This feature is not available when the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries is set to bridge mode Click Maintenance gt RemoteMGMT gt DNS to change your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries s DNS settings Figure 122 Maintenance RemoteMGMT DNS Server Port Server Access LAN Y Secured Client IP Address AI From To Range From To From To B Note 1 The Range IP could be IPv4 or IPv6 apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 89 Maintenance gt RemoteMGMT gt DNS LABEL DESCRIPTION Server Port This displays the service port number for accessing the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries If the number is grayed out it is not editable Access Status Select the interface s through which a computer may send DNS queries to the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries Secured Client IP A secured client is a trusted computer that is allowed to send DNS queries to Address the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries
115. BS define the burst levels SCR defines the minimum level An example of an VBR nRT connection would be non time sensitive data file transfers Unspecified Bit Rate UBR The Unspecified Bit Rate UBR ATM traffic class is for bursty data transfers However UBR doesn t guarantee any bandwidth and only delivers traffic when the network has spare bandwidth An example application is background file transfer AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide 7 Wireless LAN 7 1 Overview This chapter describes how to perform tasks related to setting up and optimizing your wireless network including the following e Turning the wireless connection on or off e Configuring a name wireless channel and security for the network e Using WiFi Protected Setup WPS to configure your wireless network e Setting up multiple wireless networks e Using a MAC Media Access Control address filter to restrict access to the wireless network e Performing other performance related wireless tasks 7 1 1 What You Can Do in the Wireless LAN Screens This section describes the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries s Network Setting Wireless screens Use these screens to set up your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries s wireless connection e Use the General screen to enable the Wireless LAN enter the SSID and select the wireless security mode Section 7 2 on page 92 e Use the More AP screen see Section 7 3 on page 98 to set up multiple wireless networks on your AMG1302
116. C Uncharted 2 Among Thieves PS3 C Red Dead Redemption PS3 C Valve Steam Session PC AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 10 Quality of Service QoS The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 45 Network Setting gt QoS gt Game List LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable Game List Select this to have QoS give the highest priority to traffic for the games you specify This priority is higher than the other QoS queues Select the games below Apply Click this to save your changes Cancel Click this to restore previously saved settings 10 6 QoS Technical Reference This section provides some technical background information about the topics covered in this chapter 10 6 1 IEEE 802 1p IEEE 802 1p specifies the user priority field and defines up to eight separate traffic types The following table describes the traffic types defined in the IEEE 802 1d standard which incorporates the 802 1p Table 46 IEEE 802 1p Priority Level and Traffic Type PRIORITY LEVEL TRAFFIC TYPE Level 7 Typically used for network control traffic such as router configuration messages Level 6 Typically used for voice traffic that is especially sensitive to jitter jitter is the variations in delay Level 5 Level 4 Typically used for video that consumes high bandwidth and is sensitive to jitter Typically used for controlled load la
117. CTS defines the biggest size data frame you can send before an RTS Request To Send CTS Clear to Send handshake is invoked When a data frame exceeds the RTS CTS value you set between 0 to 2432 bytes the station that wants to transmit this frame must first send an RTS Request To Send message to the AP for permission to send it The AP then responds with a CTS Clear to Send message to all other stations within its range to notify them to defer their transmission It also reserves and confirms with the requesting station the time frame for the requested transmission Stations can send frames smaller than the specified RTS CTS directly to the AP without the RTS Request To Send CTS Clear to Send handshake You should only configure RTS CTS if the possibility of hidden nodes exists on your network and the cost of resending large frames is more than the extra network overhead involved in the RTS Request To Send CTS Clear to Send handshake If the RTS CTS value is greater than the Fragmentation Threshold value see next then the RTS Request To Send CTS Clear to Send handshake will never occur as data frames will be fragmented before they reach RTS CTS size Note Enabling the RTS Threshold causes redundant network overhead that could negatively affect the throughput performance instead of providing a remedy Fragmentation Threshold A Fragmentation Threshold is the maximum data fragment size between 256 and 2432 bytes
118. Click the Edit Customized Services button while editing a firewall rule to configure a custom service port This displays the following screen AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 15 Firewall Figure 85 Security gt Firewall gt Rules Edit Edit Customized Services Customized Services Name Protocol PortType StartPort EndPort The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 64 Security gt Firewall gt Rules Edit Edit Customized Services LABEL DESCRIPTION This is the number of your customized port Name This is the name of your customized service Protocol This shows the IP protocol TCP or UDP that defines your customized service Port Type This is the port number or range that defines your customized service Start Port This is a single port number or the starting port number of a range that defines your customized service End Port This is a single port number or the ending port number of a range that defines your customized service Modify Click this to edit a customized service Add Click this to configure a customized service Back Click this to return to the Firewall Edit Rule screen 15 4 3 Customized Service Add Edit Use this screen to add a customized rule or edit an existing rule Click Add or the Edit icon next to a rule number in the Firewall Customized Services screen to display the following screen Figure 86 Security
119. DNS Information refresh time DNS Query Mode LAN IPv6 Address Setting Delegate prefix from WAN LAN IPv6 Address Assign Setup 9 Manual EUI64 fe80 1 amp R Enabled Disabled Manual EUI64 0 0 0 1 Auto Generate Manual PVCO Stateless and Stateful v Stateless and Stateful v Disable 9 Enable 9 Proxy O Relay Manual 14400 IPv4 DNS Server First v Apply Cancel Advanced Setup The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 35 Network Setting gt Home Networking gt IPv6 LAN Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION IPv6 LAN Setup Link Local Address Type Select Manual to manually enter a link local address Select EUI64 to use the EUI 64 format to generate a link local address from the Ethernet MAC address IPv6 Address If you selected Manual in the Link Local Address Type field enter the LAN IPv6 address you want to assign to your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries in hexadecimal notation for example fe80 1 factory default Prefix Enter the address prefix to specify how many most significant bits in an IPv6 address compose the network address MLD Snooping Multicast Listener Discovery MLD allows an IPv6 switch or router to discover the presence of MLD hosts who wish to receive multicast packets and the IP addresses of multicast groups the hosts want to join on its network Select Enabled to activate MLD Snooping o
120. E TEM 207 20 2 The User Seon SOC Le riiicone dtque ridi a sr E rds MMRUrES 207 Chapter 21 ji 1e m 209 GCE oe ca NE TIT TIO imeem Ty meee erry tenet Cee Meg Meroe Ty 209 Bile The TROGO Clem OOGO T 209 Chapter 22 Dystam STEN E issaraen anaE ETENEE AaS Aaa EEA ATANN AONANE AKARE Taie 213 ENNO a DI tating enna iorna ganas 213 22 1 1 What You Can Do in the System Settings Screens cccccceeeceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeseaeeeennees 213 eee The S S E o Eaa E R D 213 oe D MN E e Dr t cT 213 Chapter 23 Firmware Upgrade 9 217 PIWMESU IU S Me EA E E 217 za Dg AC o END E E I N T E N N E I E N OEA el Cms Sp n f Pla KE 217 Chapter 24 o 9 U O 219 COMER I UE 219 242 The Backup restore SEEEN Lua sian apro P efie nna ee ES PE ep da daas RF E a vida 219 24 4 The PGE Ce BNI dere n EE EP uel E bee quedo REFIERE QUE E EE d bt eE qu tbe equat m be du pepe quib i pbNqqddthie 221 Chapter 25 Remote Manageme A AO oOo 223 UNES C Arr 223 25 1 1 What You Can Do in the Remote Management Screens ssssssssseeee 223 25 1 2 What You Need to Know About Remote Management eese 224 Eme Le OM SOSPEIE ssi eee
121. EHI TS NENNT T TNR 37 Ae Setting Up Your DSL ein iE R N E A 37 AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide 5 Table of Contents 2 50 Pw Address Gong arasin Uber DUSa SEP aka boc ra Penta a cic creda A a nant ee 39 4 4 Setting Up a Secure Wireless MOIWORK Louise kene ciini tma tdi ber ta ma odor ka nce Ed e Dau Rr uas 40 4 4 1 Configuring the Wireless Network Settings ccssceseccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeseeeeeeceaaeseeaaeeseeaeeneeaeeeseas 40 LEAN c c p T gree ere tyre Tere ree nT Te Neer T Ry err errnrer cre a etree errr err 41 4 4 3 Connecting Wirelessly to your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries ssssssssesese 45 4 5 Configuring the MAC Address Filter for Restricting Wireless Internet Access sssssess 47 4 6 Setting Up NAT Forwarding for a Game Semel issues usua dec idet er tna satt ba sun dca tn edad d ea 48 45 1 PIE FOSSE 2sssesgddndeedicqqe t a 49 4 7 Configuring Firewall Rules to Allow a Specified Service sssssssssseeeeee 50 4 8 Configuring Static Route for Routing to Another Network sse 53 AS Port Binding OMMQUPA OY eme reas 55 4 9 1 Configuring ATM QoS for Multiple WAN Connections ssseeneeenne 55 222 Gonigunng FO Bnd sass esc osegceiscecedegegeeiadeciadasuicabceanduacaseeeeuleiacbes widen Reda dibc cu nidi o eM Ond DETN 58 Z2 T0 Comite Cos To PHONES TERTIO uie epe EEG AE o Mae aetna 59 4 11 Access the AMG1302 AM
122. EN 0 0 0 0 0 Drop 0 0 0 0 0 Data 0 0 0 41220 64888 Como fone 0 0 0 0 0 Drop 0 0 0 0 0 The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 77 System Monitor gt Traffic Status gt LAN LABEL DESCRIPTION Refresh Select how often you want the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries to update this screen Interval s from the drop down list box Set Interval Click this button to apply the new poll interval you entered in the Refresh Interval field Stop Click Stop to stop refreshing statistics Interface This shows the LAN or WLAN interface Bytes Sent This indicates the number of bytes transmitted on this interface Bytes Received This indicates the number of bytes received on this interface Interface This shows the LAN or WLAN interface Sent Packet AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 19 Traffic Status Table 77 System Monitor gt Traffic Status gt LAN continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Data This indicates the number of transmitted packets on this interface Error This indicates the number of frames with errors transmitted on this interface Drop This indicates the number of outgoing packets dropped on this interface Received Packet Data This indicates the number of received packets on this interface Error This indicates the number of frames with errors received on this interface Drop This indicates the number of received packets dropped
123. F os AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN 7 10 3 4 Encryption Wireless networks can use encryption to protect the information that is sent in the wireless network Encryption is like a secret code If you do not know the secret code you cannot understand the message The types of encryption you can choose depend on the type of authentication See Section 7 10 3 3 on page 110 for information about this Table 29 Types of Encryption for Each Type of Authentication NO AUTHENTICATION RADIUS SERVER Weakest No Security WPA Static WEP t WPA PSK Strongest WPA2 PSK WPA2 For example if the wireless network has a RADIUS server you can choose WPA or WPA2 If users do not log in to the wireless network you can choose no encryption Static WEP WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK Usually you should set up the strongest encryption that every device in the wireless network supports For example suppose you have a wireless network with the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries and you do not have a RADIUS server Therefore there is no authentication Suppose the wireless network has two devices Device A only supports WEP and device B supports WEP and WPA PSK Therefore you should set up Static WEP in the wireless network Note It is recommended that wireless networks use WPA PSK WPA or stronger encryption The other types of encryption are better than none at all but it is still possible for unauthorized w
124. F04 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FF05 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FF06 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FF07 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Appendix E IPv6 Table 111 Reserved Multicast Address continued MULTICAST ADDRESS FF08 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FF09 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FF0A 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FF0B 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FF0C 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FF0D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FF0E 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FFOF 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Subnet Masking Interface EUI 64 Both an IPv6 address and IPv6 subnet mask compose of 128 bit binary digits which are divided into eight 16 bit blocks and written in hexadecimal notation Hexadecimal uses four bits for each character 1 10 A F Each block s 16 bits are then represented by four hexadecimal characters For example FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FC00 0000 0000 0000 ID In IPv6 an interface ID is a 64 bit identifier It identifies a physical interface for example an Ethernet port or a virtual interface for example the management IP address for a VLAN One interface should have a unique interface ID The EUI 64 Extended Unique Identifier defined by the IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers is an interface ID format designed to adapt with IPv6 It is derived from the 48 bit 6 byte Ethernet MAC address as shown next EUI 64 inserts the hex digits fffe between the third and fourth bytes of the MAC address and complements the seventh bit of the first byte of the MAC address See the following example
125. Figure 29 Wireless gt General More Secure WPA 2 PSK More Secure Recommended GEEEER amp Ehi pE amp EE t lt lt lt lt lt i lt i RS v v v Security Mode WPA2 PSK Enter 8 63 characters or 64 hexadecimal digits a f A F and 0 9 Pre Shared Key AAKA WUSEHER3E hide more WPA PSK Compatible 9 Enable Disable Group Key Update Timer 1800 10 9999 Sec Encryption TKIPAES MIX The following table describes the wireless LAN security labels in this screen Table 18 Wireless gt General More Secure WPA 2 PSK LABEL DESCRIPTION Security Level Select More Secure to enable WPA 2 PSK data encryption Security Mode Select WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK from the drop down list box Pre Shared Key The encryption mechanisms used for WPA 2 and WPA 2 PSK are the same The only difference between the two is that WPA 2 PSK uses a simple common password instead of user specific credentials Type a pre shared key from 8 to 63 case sensitive keyboard characters more hide more Click more to show more fields in this section Click hide more to hide them WPA PSK Compatible This field appears when you choose WPA PSK2 as the Security Mode Select Enable to allow wireless devices using WPA PSK security mode to connect to your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries The AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries supports WPA PSK and WPA2 PSK simultaneously Otherwise select Disable
126. G1202 TSeries from the Internet Using DDNS ssssss 62 4 11 1 Registering a DDNS Account on www dyndns Org esssssseseeeeeeennen ennt 62 4 11 2 Configuring DDNS on Your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries sese 63 11 3 IBsmg the DONG SOLDE cosgia a aix iaa dtu cud a aE pf d sna aD a 63 Part Il Technical HefereriGB u usas cusexua ta bras b6na ah b aiU EE REM KE ERU DID OU EE RR Rada iHa 65 Chapter 5 Connection Status and System Info Screens eese esee nannaa 67 NEU UC ee TET 67 S2 Ihe Conneccion SIUS OESBIT Gd e poca Sra tO packed aa aga et ba Ran E ES nane 67 TESA I E cre rare i NER E m uU T 68 Chapter 6 jn 73 BW CI e 73 cL What You can Do inthe WAN SOENS osuin a dee ttr ka dass seta aa da nean fa 6 1 2 What rou Need to Know About WAN ai sccascste rae diacuaacedoacandsnidalsdasmubanigaancnndiduadsmmoiassubecymeagineias 73 CARE DRIED DR E PIN EO i PE 1L 1L 1 LED E 74 5 9 The mernet Sonne chon GIOI ces cise espe recti ocio etd aaa Eo as URE D cuc Eau CERE Feo d pd dag a Fara 74 AT Tp reci E 79 B3 The More D onmes ds SORT srra tinara EAE cad bcd ent GR RR c d eS nanc RR e 81 Ba T re connechons EU oed ob dde rbee uiis ctu b bre iesu bete iu ded cada A elect dm breed dedo M Y MUR PRU 82 8 3 2 Configuring More Connections Advanced Setup ei cesses ei
127. Guide Chapter 11 Network Address Translation NAT 11 4 The DMZ Screen If you need to allow packets from a specific WAN connection to your local network NAT supports a default server IP address A default server receives packets from the specified WAN connection and the ports that are not specified in the NAT Port Forwarding Setup screen Figure 70 Network Setting gt NAT gt DMZ WAN Interface PVCO v Default Server Address 0 0 0 0 B Note Enter IP address and click Apply to activate the DMZ host Input 0 0 0 0 in IP address field and click Apply to deactivate the DMZ host The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 51 Network Setting gt NAT gt DMZ LABEL DESCRIPTION WAN Interface Select a WAN PVC connection PVCO PVC7 from which you want to forward the traffic to the specified default server Default Server Enter the IP address of the default server which receives packets from ports that are not Address specified in the NAT gt Port Forwarding screen Note If you do not assign a Default Server Address the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries discards all packets received for ports that are not specified in the NAT Port Forwarding screen Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings 11 5 NAT Technical Reference This chapter contains more information regarding NAT 11 5 1 NAT Definitions
128. I M M 1M Client for Microsoft Networks B Network Monitor3 Driver Brie File and Printer aneng for MGE Networks Laye Mapper 1 0 Driver Link Layer Topology Discovery Responder Install Description Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol The default wide area network protocol that provides communication across diverse interconnected networks Uninstall Properties OK Cancel 7 The Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 Properties window opens the General tab e If you have a dynamic IP address click Obtain an IP address automatically AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Appendix A Setting up Your Computer s IP Address e If you have a static IP address click Use the following I P address and fill in the IP address Subnet mask and Default gateway fields e Click Advanced Figure 143 Windows Vista Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 Properties Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 Properties EAKA General Alternate Configuration You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Use the Following IP address Obtain DNS server address automatically Use the following DNS server addresses Advanced ET 8 Ifyou do not know your gateway s IP address remove any previously installed gateway
129. I CR 195 prube vc o e Tee 195 Theli What You Can Doin tie Chaplet cacsircacs sete ceanpecic cntitdasseantenesaccensedecnatanieansensndleessdanemepucecenteds 195 Tea Nat e NESO IO T IO arini aE OAE TT 195 To GOCA be peru 8 ES EEUU 195 12 4 The Teed CA SOIT a arses a cases pe en etn Rio IE REM DER EHE tava 197 1325 TESTIGO CADO enucsnuctssextuRn erect Perec Rant t Edu caue uf i Marre S Gu SR LR d a ER uo 197 T O Ven Conine a E mp 198 Chapter 18 LOGS Ree A A E E E E A T 201 NEM T CI ERN TETTE 201 18 1 1 Whai You Gan Be CIBUS Chapter usciueeeriigt beri pg E POM ERE UE Fat b bru DERE E PR BEER PET AG uU E EPOD RU EE 201 183 2 Nat Xen ert To KNOW uussiepece oan epp a epa D poa CER ERERPDOUDI E CU iar RI Rep de 201 ja ea cess xr TRE OO EST 202 Chapter 19 TaN DIESEL oin p peri ete io ire bem ore ce rU RI E x eM p IM LM MEME M eee MEI 203 powES II mem prr DC TIERRA 203 19 1 1 hai Tor iam Doin Id S CODE ocina acd salad dr nue nda n psag ad Qui dd 203 19 2 The WAN Sias SOIT dia dioe ote MM I dea dated ocu diu base tad e b pid MI dads Uri dives ddduE 203 Tuo The LAN SUSIUS SOCEM idis tein Yen OR E D V p E eee DRE t ir Eu a ERR 204 T9 The NAT eA oacerctuies udis xo caste ices ops iod D vet BE ESO SU Eu LER AR OCHBU REO d Fu E Sp d dd UE d 205 AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Table of Contents Chapter 20 Usor c n 207 PNE ET ICT NY C TT T E T TEE one ict reer ENSUIT
130. K AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 4 Tutorials 5 The firewall rule you configured appears in the table The AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries allows traffic from the WAN to LAN if it matches port 123 Rules Firewall Rules Storage Space in Use 296 Packet Direction WAN to LAN vl Create a new rule after rule number ow r Destination IP x 3 Source X Destinatio Active Source IP Address Addi Service Action mee mer Modify Orde 1 Yes Any Any My Ser Permit NA oN 4 8 Configuring Static Route for Routing to Another Network In order to extend your Intranet and control traffic flowing directions you may connect a router to the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries s LAN The router may be used to separate two department networks This tutorial shows how to configure a static routing rule for two network routings In the following figure router R is connected to the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries s LAN R connects to two networks N1 192 168 1 x 24 and N2 192 168 10 x 24 If you want to send traffic from computer A in N1 network to computer B in N2 network the traffic is sent to the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries s WAN default gateway by default In this case B will never receive the traffic You need to specify a static routing rule on the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries to specify R as the router in charge of forwarding traffic to N2 In this case the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries routes traffic from A to R and then R ro
131. K Authentication Security Parameters Summary Refer to this table to see what other security parameters you should configure for each authentication method or key management protocol type MAC address filters are not dependent on how you configure these security features Table 108 Wireless Security Relational Matrix METHOD KEY Soa EE IEEE 802 1X N METHOD MANUAL KEY d MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL Open None No Disable Enable without Dynamic WEP Key Open WEP No Enable with Dynamic WEP Key Yes Enable without Dynamic WEP Key Yes Disable Shared WEP No Enable with Dynamic WEP Key Yes Enable without Dynamic WEP Key Ys Diabe WPA TKIP AES No Enable WPA PSK TKIP AES Yes Disable WPA2 TKIP AES No Enable WPA2 PSK TKIP AES Yes Disable Antenna Overview An antenna couples RF signals onto air A transmitter within a wireless device sends an RF signal to the antenna which propagates the signal through the air The antenna also operates in reverse by capturing RF signals from the air Positioning the antennas properly increases the range and coverage area of a wireless LAN AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs Antenna Characteristics Frequency An antenna in the frequency of 2 4GHz IEEE 802 11b and IEEE 802 11g or 5GHz IEEE 802 11a is needed to communicate efficiently in a wireless LAN Radiation Pattern A radiation pattern is a diagram that a
132. MG1302 AMG1202 TSeries uses to determine when to start dropping sessions that do not become fully established half open sessions AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide 173 Chapter 15 Firewall 15 1 2 What You Need to Know About Firewall 174 SYN Attack A SYN attack floods a targeted system with a series of SYN packets Each packet causes the targeted system to issue a SYN ACK response While the targeted system waits for the ACK that follows the SYN ACK it queues up all outstanding SYN ACK responses on a backlog queue SYN ACKs are moved off the queue only when an ACK comes back or when an internal timer terminates the three way handshake Once the queue is full the system will ignore all incoming SYN requests making the system unavailable for legitimate users DoS Denials of Service DoS attacks are aimed at devices and networks with a connection to the Internet Their goal is not to steal information but to disable a device or network so users no longer have access to network resources The AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries is pre configured to automatically detect and thwart all known DoS attacks DDoS A Distributed DoS DDoS attack is one in which multiple compromised systems attack a single target thereby causing denial of service for users of the targeted system LAND Attack In a Local Area Network Denial LAND attack hackers flood SYN packets into the network with a spoofed source IP address of the target system Th
133. N wireless clients Green Blinking The AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries is setting up a WPS connection off The wireless network is not activated Wy Green On The DSL line is up Blinking The AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries is initializing the DSL line DSL off The DSL line is down Green On The AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries has an IP connection but no traffic INTERNET Your device has a WAN IP address either static or assigned by a DHCP server PPP negotiation was successfully completed if used and the DSL connection is up Blinking The AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries is sending or receiving IP traffic Red On The AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries attempted to make an IP connection but failed Possible causes are no response from a DHCP server no PPPoE response PPPoE authentication failed Off The AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries does not have an IP connection 1 6 Using the WPS Button You can also use the WPS button to quickly set up a secure wireless connection between the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries and a WPS compatible client by adding one device at a time To activate WPS 1 Make sure the POWER LED is on and not blinking 2 Press the WPS button for 1 5 seconds and release it See below for WPS button location wreg op POWER L ETHERNET WLAN WPS DSL INTERNET 3 Press the WPS button on another WPS enabled device within range of the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries The WPS LED should flash while the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries sets up a WPS connection with th
134. NMPv1 and version two SNMPv2c The next figure illustrates an SNMP management operation AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide 227 Chapter 25 Remote Management Figure 120 SNMP Management Model MANAGER AGENT Managed Device Managed Device Managed Device An SNMP managed network consists of two main types of component agents and a manager An agent is a management software module that resides in a managed device the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries An agent translates the local management information from the managed device into a form compatible with SNMP The manager is the console through which network administrators perform network management functions It executes applications that control and monitor managed devices The managed devices contain object variables managed objects that define each piece of information to be collected about a device Examples of variables include such as number of packets received node port status etc A Management Information Base MIB is a collection of managed objects SNMP allows a manager and agents to communicate for the purpose of accessing these objects 25 5 1 Configuring SNMP To change your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries s SNMP settings click Maintenance RemoteMGMT SNMP tab The screen appears as shown AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 25 Remote Management Figure 121 Maintenance RemoteMGMT SNMP Server Port Server Access SNMPv3
135. Obtain an IP Address Automatically O Static IP Address IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address Primary DNS Secondary DNS NAT None SUA Only Advanced Setup RIP amp Multicast Setup RIP Direction RIP Version Multicast ATM Qos ATM QoS Type Peak Cell Rate Sustain Cell Rate Maximum Burst Size MTU MTU Router v ENET ENCAP w VC Mux IPv4 v Range 0 255 Range 32 65535 Both v RIP1 v None v UBR With PCR v 0 cell sec 0 cell sec 0 cell 1500 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 14 Network Setting gt Broadband gt More Connections Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION General Active Select the check box to activate or clear the check box to deactivate this connection AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 6 Broadband Table 14 Network Setting gt Broadband gt More Connections Edit continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Node Name Enter a unique descriptive name of up to 13 ASCII characters for this connection Mode Select Router from the drop down list box if your ISP allows multiple computers to share an Internet account If you select Bridge the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries will forward any packet that it does not route to this remote node otherwise the packets are discarded Encapsulation Select the method of encapsulation used by your ISP from the drop down list box Choices vary depending on
136. P CHAP MS CHAP and MS CHAP v2 PEAP Protected EAP LEAP Like EAP TTLS server side certificate authentication is used to establish a secure connection then use simple username and password methods through the secured connection to authenticate the clients thus hiding client identity However PEAP only supports EAP methods such as EAP MD5 EAP MSCHAPv2 and EAP GTC EAP Generic Token Card for client authentication EAP GTC is implemented only by Cisco LEAP Lightweight Extensible Authentication Protocol is a Cisco implementation of IEEE 802 1x Dynamic WEP Key Exchange 288 The AP maps a unique key that is generated with the RADIUS server This key expires when the wireless connection times out disconnects or reauthentication times out A new WEP key is generated each time reauthentication is performed AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs If this feature is enabled it is not necessary to configure a default encryption key in the wireless security configuration screen You may still configure and store keys but they will not be used while dynamic WEP is enabled Note EAP MD5 cannot be used with Dynamic WEP Key Exchange For added security certificate based authentications EAP TLS EAP TTLS and PEAP use dynamic keys for data encryption They are often deployed in corporate environments but for public deployment a simple user name and password pair is more practical The following ta
137. P 111 WEP Encryption 95 96 WEP encryption 94 WEP key 94 Wide Area Network see WAN WiFi Protected Access 289 WiFi Protected Setup see WPS wireless client configuration 45 wireless client WPA supplicants 290 Wireless Distribution System see WDS wireless LAN 91 107 authentication 109 110 BSS 112 example 112 channel 108 encryption 111 example 108 fragmentation threshold 106 109 limitations 111 MAC address filter 100 110 MBSSID 112 preamble 106 109 RADIUS server 110 scheduling 105 security 109 SSID 110 activation 98 WDS 103 113 compatibility 104 example 113 WEP 111 wizard 35 WPA 111 WPA PSK 111 WPS 101 113 115 activation 102 example 116 limitations 118 PIN 114 push button 18 113 status 103 wireless security 285 Wireless tutorial 41 wizard 29 configuration 30 wireless LAN 35 WLAN interference 283 security parameters 292 WPA 111 289 key caching 290 pre authentication 290 user authentication 290 vs WPA PSK 290 wireless client supplicant 290 with RADIUS application example 291 WPA2 289 user authentication 290 vs WPA2 PSK 290 wireless client supplicant 290 with RADIUS application example 291 WPA2 Pre Shared Key 289 WPA2 PSK 289 290 application example 291 WPA PSK 111 289 290 application example 291 WPS 101 113 115 activation 102 example 116 limitations 118 PIN 114 example 115 push button 18 113 status 103 AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Index AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries
138. P address for the AMG1302 AMG1202 Server TSeries Secondary Enter the secondary DNS server IP address for the AMG1302 AMG1202 DNS Server TSeries Back Click this to return to the previous screen without saving Apply Click this to save your changes Exit Click this to close the wizard screen without saving AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 3 Internet Wireless Setup Wizard Figure 11 Quick Start Encapsulation User Name Password Multiplex VPI VCI IP Address Internet Configuration STEP 1 The current connection type is setto PPPoA and needs a user name and password to get online Primary DNS Server Secondary DNS Server Internet Connection with PPPoA Xx PPPoA z admin uc e 33 Range 32 65535 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Back Next Close The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 5 LABEL Encapsulation Internet Connection with PPPoA DESCRIPTION Select the encapsulation type your ISP uses from the Encapsulation drop down list box IPoA ENET ENCAP PPPOA or PPPOE User Name Enter the login name that your ISP gives you Password Enter the password associated with the user name above Multiplex Select the multiplexing method used by your ISP from the Multiplex drop down list box either VC based or LLC based VPI Enter the Virtual Path Identifier VPI assigned to you This field may already be conf
139. Report Multicast listener report 132 Listener Done Multicast listener done 143 Listener Report v2 Multicast listener report v2 133 Router Solicitation 134 Router Advertisement 135 Neighbor Solicitation 136 Neighbor Advertisement 137 Redirect Redirect message Protocol This is the upper layer protocol that defines the service to which this rule applies By default it is ICMPv6 IPv6 MAC Filter Listing IPv6 MAC Filter Rule Index Select the index number of the filter set from the drop down list box This is the index number of the rule in a filter set Active This field shows whether the rule is activated Interface This is the interface that the rule applies to Direction The filter set applies to this traffic direction ICMPv6 Type The ICMPv6 message type to filter Src IP PrefixLength This displays the source IPv6 address and prefix length Dest IP PrefixLength This displays the destination IPv6 address and prefix length Mac Address This is the MAC address of the packets being filtered Protocol This is the upper layer protocol that defines the service to which this rule applies By default it is ICMPv6 Apply Click this to apply your changes Delete Click this to remove the filter rule Cancel Click this to restore your previously saved settings AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide 171 Chapter 14 Filters 172 AMG1302 AMG
140. SCRIPTION Port Binding Active Activate or deactivate port binding for the port binding group Group Index Select the index number for the port binding group When a port is assigned to a port binding group traffic will be forwarded to the other ports in the group but not to ports in other groups If a port is not included in any groups traffic will be forwarded according to the routing table ATM VCs Select the ATM VC PVC to include in the port binding group Each ATM VC can only be bound to one group Ethernet Select the Ethernet Eth ports to include in the port binding group Each Ethernet port can only be bound to one group Wireless LAN Select the WLAN AP connection to include in the port binding group Additional APs can be enabled on the More AP screen Section 7 3 on page 98 Group Summary Port Binding Click this to view a summary of configured port binding groups Summary Apply Add the selected port binding group configuration Delete Delete the selected port binding group configuration Cancel Click this to restore your previously saved settings 12 3 1 Port Binding Summary Screen Use this screen to view configured port binding groups In the Port Binding screen click the Port Binding Summary button in the Group Summary section to display the following screen Group0 Group1 Figure 76 Network Setting gt Port Binding gt Port Binding Summary Group Por
141. SID with Hide SSID Enabled MAC Address Filtering WEP Encryption IEEE802 1x EAP with RADIUS Server Authentication Wi Fi Protected Access WPA WPA2 Most Secure Note You must enable the same wireless security settings on the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries and on all wireless clients that you want to associate with it IEEE 802 1x RADIUS In June 2001 the IEEE 802 1x standard was designed to extend the features of IEEE 802 11 to support extended authentication as well as providing additional accounting and control features It is supported by Windows XP and a number of network devices Some advantages of IEEE 802 1x are e User based identification that allows for roaming e Support for RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RFC 2138 2139 for centralized user profile and accounting management on a network RADIUS server e Support for EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol RFC 2486 that allows additional authentication methods to be deployed with no changes to the access point or the wireless clients RADIUS is based on a client server model that supports authentication authorization and accounting The access point is the client and the server is the RADIUS server The RADIUS server handles the following tasks e Authentication Determines the identity of the users e Authorization Determines the network services available to authenticated users once they are connected to the network
142. Select All to allow any computer to access the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries using this service Choose Range to just allow the computer s with an IP address in the range that you specify to access the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries using this service Apply Click this to save your changes Cancel Click this to restore your previously saved settings AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 25 Remote Management 25 3 The Telnet Screen You can use Telnet to access the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries s command line interface Specify which interfaces allow Telnet access and from which IP address the access can come Click Maintenance gt RemoteMGMT gt Telnet tab to display the screen as shown Figure 118 Maintenance gt RemoteMGMT gt Telnet Server Port 23 Server Access LAN v Secured Client IP Address all From To is From To Range From To B Note 1 The session will be reset after apply 2 The Range IP could be IPv4 or IPv6 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 86 Maintenance gt RemoteMGMT gt Telnet LABEL DESCRIPTION Server Port This displays the service port number for accessing the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries If the number is grayed out it is not editable Server Access Select the interface s through which a computer may access the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries using this service Note It is recommended if you are allowing WAN access even temporarily to ch
143. Static IP Address DHCP IPv6 DHCP PD WAN Identifier Type WAN Identifier Connection Keep Alive Connect on Demand Obtain an IP Address Automatically Router w PPPoE v ChangeMe uc iw IPv4iPve w Auto E 0 Range 0 255 33 Range 32 65535 Obtained From ISP Obtained From ISP v DHCP SLAAC O Auto 9 Enable O Disable Manual EUI64 Max Idle Time Sec To configure bandwidth for the data connection select UBR with PCR in the ATM QoS Type field Click Apply AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 4 Tutorials RIP amp Multicast Setup RIP Direction RIP Version Multicast MLD Proxy ATM QoS ATM QoS Type Peak Cell Rate Sustain Cell Rate Maximum Burst Size PPPoE Passthrough MTU MTU None RIP1 None None v UBR With PCR v 0 0 0 No 1492 cell sec cell sec cell Apply Cancel Advanced Setup To configure dedicated bandwidth of 400 kbps for the VoIP connection select CBR in the ATM QoS Type field and enter the Peak Cell Rate as 943 divide the bandwidth 400000 bps by 424 Click Apply to save the settings RIP amp Multicast Setup RIP Direction RIP Version Multicast MLD Proxy ATM Qos ATM QoS Type Peak Cell Rate Sustain Cell Rate Maximum Burst Size PPPoE Passthrough MTU MTU 1492 cell sec ce
144. TSeries s Web Configurator Table 28 Additional Wireless Terms TERM DESCRIPTION Preamble A preamble affects the timing in your wireless network There are two preamble modes long and short If a device uses a different preamble mode than the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries does it cannot communicate with the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries Authentication The process of verifying whether a wireless device is allowed to use the wireless network Fragmentation A small fragmentation threshold is recommended for busy networks while a larger Threshold threshold provides faster performance if the network is not very busy 7 10 3 Wireless Security Overview By their nature radio communications are simple to intercept For wireless data networks this means that anyone within range of a wireless network without security can not only read the data passing over the airwaves but also join the network Once an unauthorized person has access to the network he or she can steal information or introduce malware malicious software intended to compromise the network For these reasons a variety of security systems have been developed to ensure that only authorized people can use a wireless data network or understand the data carried on it These security standards do two things First they authenticate This means that only people presenting the right credentials often a username and password or a key phrase can access the network Sec
145. User s Guide
146. YN attack 174 three way handshake 184 triangle route 188 solutions 189 firmware 217 forwarding ports 152 153 activation 155 configuration 153 example 153 rules 154 fragmentation threshold 106 109 284 FTP 15 226 G Guide Quick Start 2 H hidden node 283 host 207 host name 69 IANA 272 Internet Assigned Numbers Authority see IANA IBSS 281 ICMP 175 230 IEEE 802 11g 285 IGA 156 IGMP 74 124 133 ILA 156 importing trusted CAs 197 Independent Basic Service Set See IBSS 281 initialization vector IV 290 Inside Global Address see IGA Inside Local Address see ILA Internet Control Message Protocol see ICMP Internet Protocol version 6 see IPv6 IP address 69 73 78 84 87 121 132 default 21 default server 153 ping 235 private 132 IP alias 126 configuration 127 NAT applications 158 IP precedence 147 148 configuration 146 IP MAC filter 167 configuration 168 structure 167 IPv6 295 addressing 295 EUI 64 297 global address 296 interface ID 297 link local address 295 Neighbor Discovery Protocol 295 ping 295 prefix 295 prefix length 295 stateless autoconfiguration 297 unspecified address 296 L LAN 121 client list 125 DHCP 122 124 131 DNS 122 131 IGMP 133 IP address 121 123 132 IP alias 126 configuration 127 MAC address 125 multicast 124 133 RIP 133 AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Index subnet mask 122 132 LAND attack 174 limitation
147. airs of hexadecimal characters for example 00 A0 C5 00 00 02 Use this screen to change your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries s static DHCP settings Click Network Setting Home Networking Static DHCP to open the following screen Figure 48 Network Setting Home Networking Static DHCP Add new static lease Active MAC Address IP Address The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 31 Network Setting gt Home Networking gt Static DHCP LABEL DESCRIPTION Add new static lease Click this to add a new static DHCP entry This is the index number of the entry Active This field displays whether the client is connected to the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries MAC Address The MAC Media Access Control or Ethernet address on a LAN Local Area Network is unique to your computer six pairs of hexadecimal notation A network interface card such as an Ethernet adapter has a hardwired address that is assigned at the factory This address follows an industry standard that ensures no other adapter has a similar address IP Address This field displays the IP address relative to the field listed above Modify Click the Edit icon to have the IP address field editable and change it Click the Delete icon to delete a static DHCP entry A window displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete the selected entry If you click Add new static lease in the Static DHCP screen or the Edit icon next
148. al value and is not associated with a specific entry Time This field displays the time the log was recorded Level This field displays the severity level of the logs that the device is to send to this syslog server Message This field states the reason for the log AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Traffic Status 19 1 Overview Use the Traffic Status screens to look at network traffic status and statistics of the WAN LAN interfaces and NAT 19 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the WAN screen to view the WAN traffic statistics Section 19 2 on page 203 e Use the LAN screen to view the LAN traffic statistics Section 19 3 on page 204 Use the NAT screen to view the NAT status of the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries s client s Section 19 4 on page 205 19 2 The WAN Status Screen Click System Monitor gt Traffic Status to open the WAN screen You can view the WAN traffic statistics in this screen Figure 100 System Monitor gt Traffic Status gt WAN Figures about data that have been sent out to and received from the Internet are displayed in the following table Status Sent Received 8 0 Bytes 2 Bytes Refresh Interval 10 Sec Setinterval Stop Connected Interface E Data Error TX Bytes Data Error RX Bytes The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 76 System Monitor gt Traffic Status gt WAN LABEL DESCRIPTION Status This shows the number of bytes rec
149. ame is used to authenticate the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries when making a connection to the management server This user name on the management server and the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries must be the same Type a user name of up to 255 printable characters found on an English language keyboard Spaces and characters such as amp _ are allowed ACS Password The password is used to authenticate the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries when making a connection to the management server This password on the management server and the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries must be the same Type a password of up to 255 printable characters found on an English language keyboard Connection Type the IP address or domain name of the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries The management Request Path server uses this path to verify the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries Connection The default port for access to the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries from the management server Request Port is port 7547 If you change it make sure it does not conflict with another port on your network and it is recommended to use a port number above 1024 not a commonly used port The management server should use this port to connect to the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries You may need to alter your NAT port forwarding rules if they were already configured Connection The user name is used to authenticate the management server when connecting to the Request AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries Type a user name of up to 255 prin
150. and LEDS sse ort rli eek enr t rd E nr E ER ri 239 27 2 AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries Access and Login essssssssesssee nennen 240 27a mernet ter c 242 Appendix A Setting up Your Computer s IP Address eeseseseeeeemeneennn 245 Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnelling ecuc emere rarement rts nri nice min see nm iR ne 265 Appendix C Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions ssssssseeeess 273 Appendis D Wireless LANS Lie iivibab MR NM AR HU DAR POR pd o LRL eb PRA rau Pu TRO DN OR 281 tss can E TFYS TT 295 Poux ME dE o ERN MM 305 Appendix G Legal AN asus i E D Dein AAT DR RRUKC C CER ERE RA DE HRcObE C R d a PONT KYLE AR DER HEN dE 309 lb e 313 12 AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide PART User s Guide Introduction 1 1 Overview The AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries are ADSL24 routers By integrating DSL and NAT you are provided with ease of installation and high speed shared Internet access The AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries are also a complete security solution with a robust firewall and content filtering Only use firmware for your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries s specific model Refer to the label on the bottom of your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries Note Not all models have all of the features shown in this User s Guide 1 2 Ways to Manage the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries Use a
151. and alerts You may differentiate them by their color in the View Log screen Alerts display in red and logs display in black Syslog Overview The syslog protocol allows devices to send event notification messages across an IP network to syslog servers that collect the event messages A syslog enabled device can generate a syslog message and send it to a syslog server Syslog is defined in RFC 3164 The RFC defines the packet format content and system log related information of syslog messages Each syslog message has a facility and severity level The syslog facility identifies a file in the syslog server Refer to the documentation of your syslog program for details The following table describes the syslog severity levels Table 74 Syslog Severity Levels CODE SEVERITY Emergency The system is unusable Alert Action must be taken immediately Critical The system condition is critical Error There is an error condition on the system Warning There is a warning condition on the system u A wj N ejo Notice There is a normal but significant condition on the system AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 18 Logs Table 74 Syslog Severity Levels CODE SEVERITY 6 Informational The syslog contains an informational message 7 Debug The message is intended for debug level purposes 18 2 The System Log Screen Click System Monitor gt Log to open the S
152. ange the default password in Maintenance gt User Account To allow access from the WAN you will need to configure a WAN to Router firewall rule See Firewall Section on page 173 for information on configuring firewall rules Secured Client IP A secured client is a trusted computer that is allowed to communicate with the Address AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries using this service Select All to allow any computer to access the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries using this service Choose Range to just allow the computer s with an IP address in the range that you specify to access the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries using this service Apply Click this to save your changes Cancel Click this to restore your previously saved settings 25 4 The FTP Screen You can use FTP File Transfer Protocol to upload and download the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries s firmware and configuration files Please see the User s Guide chapter on firmware and configuration file maintenance for details To use this feature your computer must have an FTP client 226 AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 25 Remote Management Use this screen to specify which interfaces allow FTP access and from which IP address the access can come To change your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries s FTP settings click Maintenance RemoteMGMT gt FTP The screen appears as shown Figure 119 Maintenance gt RemoteMGMT gt FTP B Note Server Port 21 Serv
153. art Ethernet Card root localhost init d network restart Shutting down interface eth0 OK Shutting down loopback interface OK Setting network parameters OK Bringing up loopback interface OK Bringing up interface eth0 OK Verifying Settings Enter ifconfig in a terminal screen to check your TCP IP properties AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide 263 Appendix A Setting up Your Computer s IP Address Figure 158 Red Hat 9 0 Checking TCP IP Properties root localhost ifconfig eth0o Link encap Ethernet HWaddr 00 50 BA 72 5B 44 inet addr 172 23 19 129 Bcast 172 23 19 255 Mask 255 255 255 0 UP BROADCAST RUNNING MULTICAST MTU 1500 Metric 1 RX packets 717 errors 0 dropped 0 overruns 0 frame 0 TX packets 13 errors 0 dropped 0 overruns 0 carrier 0 collisions 0 txqueuelen 100 RX bytes 730412 713 2 Kb TX bytes 1570 1 5 Kb Interrupt 10 Base address 0x1000 root localhost AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide IP Addresses and Subnetting This appendix introduces IP addresses and subnet masks IP addresses identify individual devices on a network Every networking device including computers servers routers printers etc needs an IP address to communicate across the network These networking devices are also known as hosts Subnet masks determine the maximum number of possible hosts on a network You can also use subnet masks to divide one network into multiple sub
154. ary aana PPPoE Up Time DNS System Resource Ps Global IP CPU Usage IPv6 Prefix Length Memory Usage IPv6 Gateway DSL Down IPv6 WAN Bandwith Usage DNS1 DSL Up Bandwith IPv6 WAN Usage DNS2 Link Local Address IPv4Pv6 MTU VPINCI LAN Information IP Address IP Subnet Mask DHCP IPv6 Address Link local IPv6 Address IPv6 Prefix Preferred Valid 7200 web a DHCPv6 Radvd State IPv6 LAN DNS1 DSL Version DualStack IPV6 LAN DNS2 WLAN Information Status SSID Channel Security Mode WPS Scheduling WiFi MAC Security Firewall Connection Status AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator As illustrated above the main screen is divided into these parts e A title bar e B main window e C navigation panel 2 2 1 Title Bar The title bar shows the following icon in the upper right corner d Click this icon to log out of the web configurator AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator 2 2 2 Main Window The main window displays information and configuration fields It is discussed in the rest of this document After you click System Info on the Connection Status screen the System Info screen is displayed See Chapter 5 on page 68 for more information about the System Info screen If you click LAN Device on the System I
155. assigned from a private network If you belong to a small organization and your Internet access is through an ISP the ISP can provide you with the Internet addresses for your local networks On the other hand if you are part of a much larger organization you should consult your network administrator for the appropriate IP addresses Regardless of your particular situation do not create an arbitrary IP address always follow the guidelines above For more information on address assignment please refer to RFC 1597 Address Allocation for Private Internets and RFC 1466 Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide C Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions In order to use the web configurator you need to allow e Web browser pop up windows from your device e JavaScripts enabled by default e Java permissions enabled by default Note Internet Explorer 6 screens are used here Screens for other Internet Explorer versions may vary Internet Explorer Pop up Blockers You may have to disable pop up blocking to log into your device Either disable pop up blocking enabled by default in Windows XP SP Service Pack 2 or allow pop up blocking and create an exception for your device s IP address Disable Pop up Blockers 1 In Internet Explorer select Tools Pop up Blocker and then select Turn Off Pop up Blocker Figure 162 Pop up Blocker Tools Mail and News Pop up Blocker
156. ate and fluctuations of data transmission over an ATM network This agreement helps eliminate congestion which is important for transmission of real time data such as audio and video connections Peak Cell Rate PCR is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells This parameter may be lower but not higher than the maximum line speed 1 ATM cell is 53 bytes 424 bits so a maximum speed of 832Kbps gives a maximum PCR of 1962 cells sec This rate is not guaranteed because it is dependent on the line speed AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 6 Broadband Sustained Cell Rate SCR is the mean cell rate of each bursty traffic source It specifies the maximum average rate at which cells can be sent over the virtual connection SCR may not be greater than the PCR Maximum Burst Size MBS is the maximum number of cells that can be sent at the PCR After MBS is reached cell rates fall below SCR until cell rate averages to the SCR again At this time more cells up to the MBS can be sent at the PCR again If the PCR SCR or MBS is set to the default of 0 the system will assign a maximum value that correlates to your upstream line rate The following figure illustrates the relationship between PCR SCR and MBS Figure 25 Example of Traffic Shaping Cell Rate PC 2 H i H H SCR lt gt lt gt Time MBS MBS 6 5 1 ATM Traffic Classes These are the basic ATM traffic classes defined by the ATM F
157. ation WAN IP Address The WAN IP address is an IP address for the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries which makes it accessible from an outside network It is used by the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries to communicate with other AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 6 Broadband devices in other networks It can be static fixed or dynamically assigned by the ISP each time the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries tries to access the Internet If your ISP assigns you a static WAN IP address they should also assign you the subnet mask and DNS server IP address es and a gateway IP address if you use the Ethernet or ENET ENCAP encapsulation method Multicast Traditionally IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways Unicast 1 sender 1 recipient or Broadcast 1 sender everybody on the network Multicast delivers IP packets to a group of hosts on the network not everybody and not just one IGMP IGMP Internet Group Multicast Protocol is a network layer protocol used to establish membership in a Multicast group it is not used to carry user data There are three versions of IGMP IGMP version 2 and 3 are improvements over version 1 but IGMP version 1 is still in wide use IPv6 IPv6 Internet Protocol version 6 is designed to increase IP address space and enhance features The AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries supports IPv4 IPv6 dual stack and can connect to IPv4 and IPv6 networks See Appendix E on page 295 for more information about
158. bit 24 bit and 29 bit subnet masks Table 95 Subnet Masks BINARY 1ST 2ND 3RD yee IDEGIMAE OCTET OCTET OCTET 8 bit mask 11111111 00000000 00000000 00000000 255 0 0 0 16 bit mask 11111111 11111111 00000000 00000000 255 255 0 0 24 bit mask 11111111 11111111 11111111 00000000 255 255 255 0 29 bit mask 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111000 255 255 255 248 Network Size Notation The size of the network number determines the maximum number of possible hosts you can have on your network The larger the number of network number bits the smaller the number of remaining host ID bits An IP address with host IDs of all zeros is the IP address of the network 192 168 1 0 with a 24 bit subnet mask for example An IP address with host IDs of all ones is the broadcast address for that network 192 168 1 255 with a 24 bit subnet mask for example As these two IP addresses cannot be used for individual hosts calculate the maximum number of possible hosts in a network as follows Table 96 Maximum Host Numbers SUBNET MASK HOST ID SIZE MAXIMUM NUMBER OF HOSTS 8 bits 255 0 0 0 24 bits 224 2 16777214 16 bits 255 255 0 0 16 bits 216 2 65534 24 bits 255 255 255 0 8 bits 28 2 254 29 bits 255 255 255 24 3 bits 23 2 6 8 Since the mask is always a continuous number of ones beginning from the left followed by a continuous number of zeros for th
159. ble is a comparison of the features of authentication types Table 107 Comparison of EAP Authentication Types EAP MD5 EAP TLS EAP TTLS PEAP LEAP Mutual Authentication No Yes Yes Yes Yes Certificate Client No Yes Optional Optional No Certificate Server No Yes Yes Yes No Dynamic Key Exchange No Yes Yes Yes Yes Credential Integrity None Strong Strong Strong Moderate Deployment Difficulty Easy Hard Moderate Moderate Moderate Client Identity Protection No No Yes Yes No WPA and WPA2 Wi Fi Protected Access WPA is a subset of the IEEE 802 11i standard WPA2 IEEE 802 11i is a wireless security standard that defines stronger encryption authentication and key management than WPA Key differences between WPA or WPA2 and WEP are improved data encryption and user authentication If both an AP and the wireless clients support WPA2 and you have an external RADIUS server use WPA2 for stronger data encryption If you don t have an external RADIUS server you should use WPA2 PSK WPA2 Pre Shared Key that only requires a single identical password entered into each access point wireless gateway and wireless client As long as the passwords match a wireless client will be granted access to a WLAN If the AP or the wireless clients do not support WPA2 just use WPA or WPA PSK depending on whether you have an external RADIUS server or not Select WEP only when the AP and or wireless clients do no
160. bles from this device before servicing or disassembling Use ONLY an appropriate power adaptor or cord for your device Connect the power adaptor or cord to the right supply voltage for example 110V AC in North America or 230V AC in Europe Do NOT allow anything to rest on the power adaptor or cord and do NOT place the product where anyone can walk on the power adaptor or cord Do NOT use the device if the power adaptor or cord is damaged as it might cause electrocution If the power adaptor or cord is damaged remove it from the device and the power source Do NOT attempt to repair the power adaptor or cord Contact your local vendor to order a new one Do not use the device outside and make sure all the connections are indoors There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning Do NOT obstruct the device ventilation slots as insufficient airflow may harm your device Use only No 26 AWG American Wire Gauge or larger telecommunication line cord Antenna Warning This device meets ETSI and FCC certification requirements when using the included antenna s Only use the included antenna s Your product is marked with this symbol which is known as the WEEE mark WEEE stands for Waste Electronics and Electrical Equipment It means that used electrical and electronic products should not be mixed with general waste Used electrical and electronic equipment should be treated separately AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Index
161. bout DDNS DYNDNS Wildcard Enabling the wildcard feature for your host causes yourhost dyndns org to be aliased to the same IP address as yourhost dyndns org This feature is useful if you want to be able to use for example www yourhost dyndns org and still reach your hostname If you have a private WAN IP address then you cannot use Dynamic DNS 13 2 The Dynamic DNS Screen Use this screen to change your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries s DDNS Click Network Setting gt Dynamic DNS The screen appears as shown AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 13 Dynamic DNS Setup Figure 77 Network Setting gt Dynamic DNS Dynamic DNS Configuration Dynamic DNS O Enable Disable Service Provider www dyndns org ov Host Name Username Password Cancel The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 57 Network Setting gt Dynamic DNS LABEL DESCRIPTION Dynamic DNS Setup Active Dynamic Select this check box to use dynamic DNS DNS Service Provider This is the website of your Dynamic DNS service provider Host Name Type the domain name assigned to your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries by your Dynamic DNS provider You can specify up to two host names in the field separated by a comma Username Type your user name Password Type the password assigned to you Enable Wildcard Select the check box to enable DynDNS Wildcard Option Apply Click this to save y
162. c IPv6 address enter the IPv6 prefix length that the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries uses to generate the LAN IPv6 address An IPv6 prefix length specifies how many most significant bits starting from the left in the address compose the network address This field displays the bit number of the IPv6 subnet mask Preferred Lifetime Enter the preferred lifetime for the prefix Valid Lifetime Enter the valid lifetime for the prefix RADVD Setup Send RA on Select this to have the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries send router advertisement messages to the LAN hosts Router advertisement is a response to a router solicitation or a periodical multicast advertisement from a router to advertise its presence and other parameters such as IPv6 prefix and DNS information Router solicitation is a request from a host to locate a router that can act as the default router and forward packets Note The LAN hosts neither generate global IPv6 addresses nor communicate with other networks if you disable this feature Delegate M O flag from WAN Select this to have the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries obtain the M O Managed Other flag setting from the service provider or uplink router Manual Select this to specify the M O flag setting manually Managed config flag on Select this to have the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries indicate to hosts to obtain network settings such as prefix and DNS settings through DHCPv6 Clear this to have the AMG1302
163. cate with your network If you manually assign IP information instead of using dynamic assignment make sure that your computers have IP addresses that place them in the same subnet as the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries s LAN port Windows 95 98 Me Click Start Settings Control Panel and double click the Network icon to open the Network window Figure 127 WIndows 95 98 Me Network Configuration 2 x 3Com EtherLink 10 100 PCI TX NIC 3C905B TX Dial Up Adapter USB Fast Ethernet Adapter Client for Microsoft Networks AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Appendix A Setting up Your Computer s IP Address Installing Components The Network window Configuration tab displays a list of installed components You need a network adapter the TCP IP protocol and Client for Microsoft Networks If you need the adapter 1 Inthe Network window click Add 2 Select Adapter and then click Add 3 Select the manufacturer and model of your network adapter and then click OK If you need TCP IP 1 Inthe Network window click Add 2 Select Protocol and then click Add 3 Select Microsoft from the list of manufacturers 4 Select TCP IP from the list of network protocols and then click OK If you need Client for Microsoft Networks 1 Click Add 2 Select Client and then click Add 3 Select Microsoft from the list of manufacturers 4 Select Client for Microsoft Networks from the list of network clients and then click OK 5 Res
164. ce and then formatted so that they can be understood in a bridged environment For instance it encapsulates routed Ethernet frames into bridged ATM cells ENET ENCAP requires that you specify a gateway IP address in the Gateway IP Address field in the wizard or WAN screen You can get this information from your ISP 6 4 1 2 PPP over Ethernet The AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries supports PPPoE Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet PPPoE is an IETF Draft standard RFC 2516 specifying how a personal computer PC interacts with a broadband modem DSL cable wireless etc connection The PPPoE option is for a dial up connection using PPPoE For the service provider PPPoE offers an access and authentication method that works with existing access control systems for example RADIUS One of the benefits of PPPoE is the ability to let you access one of multiple network services a function known as dynamic service selection This enables the service provider to easily create and offer new IP services for individuals Operationally PPPoE saves significant effort for both you and the ISP or carrier as it requires no specific configuration of the broadband modem at the customer site By implementing PPPoE directly on the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries rather than individual computers the computers on the LAN do not need PPPoE software installed since the AMG1302 AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 6 Broadband AMG1202 TSeries does
165. ceeeeeeesenes 151 11 12 What You Need To Fungi ABOUNA T 2 iiicui cese sanie e E UE PEE REIR E PR E t Rari Rd ESSE 151 AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Table of Contents t12 Dh NAT erie RGN 31 si taro Fett ibt e ad a E a Ek Pec Ea ar pat oa x ens aot 152 To De Por Eonar EN iaat oaaluh OO OO LT 153 11 3 1 Configuring the Port Forwarding Sareea uice conguet cei semen utes reuse ERR Remev en ped tons eeceaees 153 Tig Porn Forwarding Pule AUOD EN asse pirieideed tub de Rev a EeUUI da eR v E YR EAT ane RS RM 154 TI Thes DV OCRE s cmi os do itt laa te radial tex iato nn as tative testa een ena triv iT teer tede baul ae Urs UEA 156 Tid NAT Technical POLICE Lus canc rictus E obs URS E hake donuts ecu Rat RH uL ed A 156 Em BENE i MNT EIE TES 156 DEC IM NAT DOOS sisinio 157 1p5 AHOY MAT WORS corroe Cd eet ager es pet d Re a v RE TERR AER a d e Qu 157 TIE PUT PCM ciiuszucumsuiac saei d diram epa dais pe RI S 158 1S NAT Mapping Types E 158 Chapter 12 Port BCG X Y A OO 161 NEN CI MET E AT ER NU EAE ET AE ee IT en er RTI 161 121 1 What You Gan Bo in the Pori Binding Sree estote tas toS ed QURE e rYadd eE ree Y tK dna aet n ineE 162 122 Tha Port Binding General SOPEBIT Lossaxanave mad Rd eh paa a edic probed aqu ad NIE 162 128 3 The PORC Binding GOES ahead dca oni ienai elon ensue Fase dor addat be b deed On adr Obi ca dE Pa oup Rd 162 123 1 Port Bind
166. change the default password Enter a new password retype it to confirm and click Apply alternatively click Skip to proceed to the Connection Status screen if you do not want to change the password now Figure 5 Change Password Screen Change Password Itis highly recommended to setup a new password instead of using the default one for security concern New Password od Verify New Password C 6 The Connection Status screen appears Figure 6 Connection Status ZyXE AMG1302 T10B LAN Device 7 Click System Info to display the System Info screen where you can view the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries s interface and system information 22 AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator 2 2 The Web Configurator Layout Click Connection Status System I nfo to show the following screen Figure 7 Web Configurator Layout Screen ZyXEL anei302 T108 m Wizard Refresh Interval None LIMEN Host Name admin AXE Interface Status Rate Model Name 4MG1302 T10B MAC Address ADSL WAN Down N A Firmware Version V20 0 LANT Down N A LAN2 Down N A LAN3 Up 100 Mbps Full Duplex WAN Information LAN4 Down N A DSL Mode NIA WLAN Active 300M Annex Type ANNEX A IPv6 IPv4 Dual Stack IP Address 0 0 0 0 IP SubnetMask N A Default dk DSL Up Time Gateway serja System Up Time 2 days 17 hours 3 minutes Primary DNS Current Date Time Sun Jan 3 17 03 04 UTC 2010 Second
167. ck this button to remove all configured wireless and wireless security settings for WPS connections on the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries 802 11 Mode This field displays the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries s wireless mode that only allows the compliant WLAN devices to associate with it SSID This field displays the SSID the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries is currently using Security This field displays the security mode the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries is currently using Pre Shared Key This field displays the pre shared key the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries uses when the security mode is set to WPA 2 PSK Apply Click this to save your changes Cancel Click this to restore your previously saved settings 7 6 The WDS Screen An AP using the Wireless Distribution System WDS can function as a wireless network bridge allowing you to wirelessly connect wired network segments The WDS screen allows you to configure the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries to connect to other APs wirelessly when WDS is enabled Use this screen to set up your WDS Wireless Distribution System links between the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries and other wireless APs You need to know the MAC address of the peer device Once the security settings of peer sides match one another the connection between devices is made Note WDS security is independent of the security settings between the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries and any wireless clients AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide 103
168. ck this to save your changes Cancel Click this to restore your previously saved settings 15 6 Firewall Technical Reference This section provides some technical background information about the topics covered in this chapter 15 6 1 Firewall Rules Overview Your customized rules take precedence and override the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries s default settings The AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries checks the source IP address destination IP address and IP protocol type of network traffic against the firewall rules in the order you list them When the traffic matches a rule the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries takes the action specified in the rule Firewall rules are grouped based on the direction of travel of packets to which they apply e LAN to Router e WAN to LAN e LAN to WAN e WAN to Router Note The LAN includes both the LAN port and the WLAN By default the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries s stateful packet inspection allows packets traveling in the following directions e LAN to Router These rules specify which computers on the LAN can manage the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries remote management Note You can also configure the remote management settings to allow only a specific computer to manage the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 15 Firewall e LAN to WAN These rules specify which computers on the LAN can access which computers or services on the WAN By default the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries s state
169. cribed in the following table 100 Mbps Full Duplex N A 300M AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 5 Connection Status and System Info Screens Table 10 System Info Screen LABEL DESCRIPTION Refresh Interval Device Information Select how often you want the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries to update this screen from the drop down list box Host Name This field displays the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries system name It is used for identification Model Name This is the model name of your device MAC Address This is the MAC Media Access Control or Ethernet address unique to your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries Firmware This field displays the current version of the firmware inside the device It also shows Version the date the firmware version was created Go to the Maintenance Firmware Upgrade screen to change it DSL Version This is the current version of the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries s DSL modem code WAN Information DSL Mode This is the method of encapsulation used by your ISP Annex Type This is the ADSL Annex Type that your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries is using IP Address This field displays the current IP address of the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries in the WAN IP Subnet Mask This field displays the current subnet mask in the WAN Secondary DNS Default This is the IP address of the default gateway if applicable Gateway Primary This is the primary secondary DNS server
170. curity gt Certificates gt Trusted CA LABEL DESCRIPTION Import Certificate Click this button to open a screen where you can save the certificate of a certification authority that you trust to the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries Name This field displays the name used to identify this certificate Subject This field displays information that identifies the owner of the certificate such as Common Name CN OU Organizational Unit or department Organization O State ST and Country C It is recommended that each certificate have unique subject information Type This field displays general information about the certificate ca means that a Certification Authority signed the certificate Action Click View to open a screen with an in depth list of information about the certificate Click Remove to delete the certificate 17 5 Trusted CA Import Click Import Certificate in the Trusted CA screen to open the Import Certificate screen You can save a trusted certification authority s certificate to the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide 197 Chapter 17 Certificate Note You must remove any spaces from the certificate s filename before you can import the certificate Figure 97 Trusted CA Import The certificate is in one ofthe following formats Binary X 509 PEM Base 64 encoded Binary PKCS 7 PEM Base 64 encoded PKCS 7 Certicate File Path Browse
171. d do not match any of the firewall rules Select Drop to silently discard the packets without sending a TCP reset packet or an ICMP destination unreachable message to the sender Select Reject to deny the packets and send a TCP reset packet for a TCP packet or an ICMP destination unreachable message for a UDP packet to the sender Select Permit to allow the passage of the packets Apply Click this to save your changes Cancel Click this to restore your previously saved settings AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide 177 Chapter 15 Firewall 15 4 The Rules Screen Click Security gt Firewall gt Rules to display the following screen This screen displays a list of the configured firewall rules Note the order in which the rules are listed Note The firewall configuration screen shown in this section is specific to the following devices P The ordering of your rules is very important as rules are applied in turn Figure 83 Security gt Firewall gt Rules Rules o Packet Direction Firewall Rules Storage Space in Use 0 Create a new rule after rule number 100 WANIOLAN v The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 62 Security gt Firewall gt Rules LABEL DESCRIPTION Firewall Rules Storage Space in Use Packet Direction This read only bar shows how much of the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries s memory for recording firewall rules it
172. d to use the wireless network it does not matter if it has the correct information This type of security does not protect the information that is sent in the wireless network Furthermore there are ways for unauthorized wireless devices to get the MAC address of an authorized device Then they can use that MAC address to use the wireless network 7 10 3 3 User Authentication Authentication is the process of verifying whether a wireless device is allowed to use the wireless network You can make every user log in to the wireless network before using it However every device in the wireless network has to support IEEE 802 1x to do this For wireless networks you can store the user names and passwords for each user in a RADIUS server This is a server used in businesses more than in homes If you do not have a RADIUS server you cannot set up user names and passwords for your users Unauthorized wireless devices can still see the information that is sent in the wireless network even if they cannot use the wireless network Furthermore there are ways for unauthorized wireless users to get a valid user name and password Then they can use that user name and password to use the wireless network 1 Some wireless devices such as scanners can detect wireless networks but cannot use wireless networks These kinds of wireless devices might not have MAC addresses 2 Hexadecimal characters are 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A BB C D E and
173. dd Hardware Game Controllers 3 Right click Local Area Connection and then click Properties Figure 132 Windows XP Control Panel Network Connections Properties s Network Connections File Edit View Favorites Tools Advanced Help Q e X Q B Search li Folders E Address Network Connections LAN or High Speed Internet Network Tasks ocal Area Connection Create a new connection Set up a home or small office network amp Disable this network device W Repair this connection imi Rename this connection View status of this connection B Change settings of this connection d PCI Fast Ethernet Adapte Disable Status Repair Bridge Connections Create Shortcut Properties 4 Select Internet Protocol TCP I P under the General tab in Win XP and then click Properties AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Appendix A Setting up Your Computer s IP Address Figure 133 Windows XP Local Area Connection Properties Local Area Connection Properties General Authentication Advanced Connect using Bl Accton EN1207D TX PCI Fast Ethernet Adapter p This connection uses the following items M E Client for Microsoft Networks M Er File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks Internet Protocol TCP IP zi LD Description Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol The default wide area network protocol that
174. de O 802 1P Exclude VLAN ID Value Range 1 4094 Exclude Action Forward to Unchange w IPP DS Field QOiPP TOS DSCP KA AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 10 Quality of Service QoS The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 44 QoS gt Class Setup Add Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Rule Index Select the rule s index number from the drop down list box Class Configuration Active Use this field to enable or disable the QoS class rule Ether Type Select a predefined application to configure a class for the matched traffic If you select I Pv4 or I Pv6 you also need to configure source or destination IP address MAC address DHCP options DSCP value or the protocol type If you select ARP you also need to configure source or destination MAC address If you select 802 1Q you can configure an 802 1p priority level and VLAN ID Interface Select an interface if you want to classify the traffic received by it To Queue Select a queue that applies to this class You should have configured a queue in the Queue Setup screen already Criteria Configuration Basic From If you select From LAN in the Interface field you can select specific interface s from Interface which traffic is received raO ra3 means wireless interfaces WLANO to WLAN3 If you select From WAN in the I nterface field you can select a specific WAN connectio
175. ding Default Server 9 Custom This setting allows the customer to create and edit individual firewall rules O off This setting is not recommended It disables firewall protection for your network and could potentially expose your network to significant security risks This option should only be used for troubleshooting or if you intend using another firewall in conjunction with your ZyXEL router ew AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide 175 Chapter 15 Firewall The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 60 Security gt Firewall gt General LABEL DESCRIPTION High This setting blocks all traffic to and from the Internet Only local network traffic and LAN to WAN service Telnet FTP HTTP HTTPS DNS POP3 SMTP is permitted Medium This is the recommended setting It allows traffic to the Internet but blocks anyone from the Internet from accessing any services on your local network Low This setting allows traffic to the Internet and also allows someone from the Internet to access services on your local network This would be used with Port Forwarding Default Server Custom This setting allows the customer to create and edit individual firewall rules Firewall rules can be created in the Default Action screen Section 15 3 on page 176 and Rules screen Section 15 4 on page 178 Off This setting is not recommended It disables firewall protection for your network
176. ding 300 meters Please check http www bipt be for more details Draadloze verbindingen voor buitengebruik en met een reikwijdte van meer dan 300 meter dienen aangemeld te worden bij het Belgisch Instituut voor postdiensten en telecommunicatie BIPT Zie http www bipt be voor meer gegevens Les liaisons sans fil pour une utilisation en ext rieur d une distance sup rieure 300 m tres doivent tre notifi es l Institut Belge des services Postaux et des T l communications IBPT Visitez http www ibpt be pour de plus amples d tails Denmark In Denmark the band 5150 5350 MHz is also allowed for outdoor usage I Danmark m frekvensb ndet 5150 5350 ogs anvendes udend rs Italy This product meets the National Radio Interface and the requirements specified in the National Frequency Allocation Table for Italy Unless this wireless LAN product is operating within the boundaries of the owner s property its use requires a general authorization Please check http www sviluppoeconomico gov it for more details Questo prodotto conforme alla specifiche di Interfaccia Radio Nazionali e rispetta il Piano Nazionale di ripartizione delle frequenze in Italia Se non viene installato all interno del proprio fondo l utilizzo di prodotti Wireless LAN richiede una Autorizzazione Generale Consultare http www sviluppoeconomico gov it per maggiori dettagli Latvia The outdoor usage of the 2 4 GHz band requires an authorization
177. downloads so that they do not reduce the quality of other applications Click Network Setting gt QoS gt Class Setup to open the screen as shown next Figure 63 Network Setting QoS Class Setup Add new Classifier From AA DSCP Traffic 802 1P4Q To Index Status interface Classification Criteria Class Mark M Queue Modify The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 43 Network Setting gt QoS gt Class Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Add new Classifier Click this to create a new classifier Index This is the index number of the entry Status This field displays whether the classifier is active or not A yellow bulb signifies that this classifier is active A gray bulb signifies that this classifier is not active From Interface This shows the interface from which traffic of this class should come Classification This shows criteria specified in this classifier for example the type and the source MAC Criteria address of traffic that matches this classifier DSCP Mark This is the DSCP number added to traffic of this classifier 802 1P 1Q Mark This is the IEEE 802 1p priority level and 802 1Q VLAN tag assigned to traffic of this classifier To Queue This is the name of the queue in which traffic of this classifier is put Modify Click the Edit icon to edit the classifier Click the Delete icon to delete an existing classifier Note that subsequent rules move up by o
178. dows JavaScripts and Java Permissions 5 Click Close to return to the Privacy screen 6 Click Apply to save this setting JavaScripts 276 If pages of the web configurator do not display properly in Internet Explorer check that JavaScripts are allowed 1 In Internet Explorer click Tools Internet Options and then the Security tab Figure 166 Internet Options Security Select a Web content zone to specify its security settings e oe Internet Local intranet Trusted sites Restricted sites ig This zone contains all Web sites you Gites haven t placed in other zones Internet Options 2 x General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced m Security level for this zone Move the slider to set the security level for this zone Medium Safe browsing and still functional Prompts before downloading potentially unsafe content Unsigned Activex controls will not be downloaded Appropriate for most Internet sites C Custom Level Default Level 3 Scroll down to Scripting 6 Click OK to close the window DK Cancel Apply 2 Click the Custom Level button Under Active scripting make sure that Enable is selected the default Under Scripting of Java applets make sure that Enable is selected the default AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Appendix C Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions Figure 167 Security Se
179. e NAT Traversal UPnP NAT traversal automates the process of allowing an application to operate through NAT UPnP network devices can automatically configure network addressing announce their presence in the network to other UPnP devices and enable exchange of simple product and service descriptions NAT traversal allows the following e Dynamic port mapping e Learning public IP addresses e Assigning lease times to mappings Windows Messenger is an example of an application that supports NAT traversal and UPnP See the Chapter 11 on page 151 for more information on NAT Cautions with UPnP The automated nature of NAT traversal applications in establishing their own services and opening firewall ports may present network security issues Network information and configuration may also be obtained and modified by users in some network environments When a UPnP device joins a network it announces its presence with a multicast message For security reasons the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries allows multicast messages on the LAN only All UPnP enabled devices may communicate freely with each other without additional configuration Disable UPnP if this is not your intention 122 AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 8 Home Networking UPnP and ZyXEL Sexual has achieved UPnP certification from the Universal Plug and Play Forum UPnP Implementers Corp UIC ZyXEL s UPnP implementation supports Internet Gateway Device IGD
180. e 117 Maintenance RemoteMGMT WWW Server Port Server Access B Note UPnP Secured Client IP Address G AI Remote MGMT enables to access this device remotely from a WAN and or LAN connection by HTTPS Server Port 443 Server Access LAN vij Secured Client IP Address G AI From To Oo dd em From To Range From To 1 For UPnP to function normally theHTTP and HTTPS service must be available for LAN computers using 2 The session will be reset after apply 3 The Range IP could be IPv4 or IPv6 80 LAN v From To From To Range From To The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 85 Maintenance RemoteMGMT WWW LABEL Server Port DESCRIPTION This displays the service port number for accessing the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries using HTTP or HTTPS If the number is grayed out it is not editable Server Access Select the interface s through which a computer may access the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries using this service Note It is recommended if you are allowing WAN access even temporarily to change the default password in Maintenance User Account To allow access from the WAN you will need to configure a WAN to Router firewall rule See Section 4 1 on page 37 for information on configuring firewall rules Secured Client IP Address A secured client is a trusted computer that is allowed to communicate with the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries using this service
181. e 221 or turn off the device unplug the power for a few seconds AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide 71 Chapter 5 Connection Status and System Info Screens AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Broadband 6 1 Overview This chapter describes the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries s Broadband screens Use these screens to configure your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries for Internet access A WAN Wide Area Network connection is an outside connection to another network or the Internet It connects your private networks such as a LAN Local Area Network and other networks so that a computer in one location can communicate with computers in other locations Figure 18 LAN and WAN 6 1 1 What You Can Do in the WAN Screens e Use the Internet Connection screen Section 6 2 on page 74 to configure the WAN settings on the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries for Internet access e Use the More Connections screen Section 6 3 on page 81 to set up additional Internet access connections 6 1 2 What You Need to Know About WAN Encapsulation Method Encapsulation is used to include data from an upper layer protocol into a lower layer protocol To set up a WAN connection to the Internet you need to use the same encapsulation method used by your ISP Internet Service Provider If your ISP offers a dial up Internet connection using PPPoE PPP over Ethernet or PPPoA they should also provide a username and password and service name for user authentic
182. e ILA is the destination address on the LAN and the IGA is the destination address on the WAN NAT maps private local IP addresses to globally unique ones required for communication with hosts on other networks It replaces the original IP source address and TCP or UDP source port numbers for Many to One and Many to Many Overload NAT mapping in each packet and then forwards it to the Internet The AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries keeps track of the original addresses and port numbers so incoming reply packets can have their original values restored The following figure illustrates this AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide 157 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation NAT Figure 71 How NAT Works NAT Table LAN Inside Local Inside Global IP Address IP Address WAN 192 168 1 10 IGA 1 192 168 1 13 192 168 1 11 IGA2 192 168 1 12 IGA 3 192 168 1 13 IGA 4 192 168 112 SLT Inside Local Inside Global Address ILA Address IGA 192 168 1 11 155 1681 10 11 5 4 NAT Application The following figure illustrates a possible NAT application where three inside LANs logical LANs using IP alias behind the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries can communicate with three distinct WAN networks Figure 72 NAT Application With IP Alias A LAN1 192 168 1 X B IP 1 IGA 1 192 168 1 1 E IP 3 IGA 3 LAN3 192 168 3 X 4 11 5 5 NAT Mapping Types NAT supports five types of IP port mapping They are AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries
183. e network number and which bits are part of the host ID using a logical AND operation The term subnet is short for sub network A subnet mask has 32 bits If a bit in the subnet mask is a 1 then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the network number If a bit in the subnet mask is 0 then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the host ID The following example shows a subnet mask identifying the network number in bold text and host ID of an IP address 192 168 1 2 in decimal Table 94 Subnet Masks 1ST OCTET 2NO Eq HE 4TH OCTET 192 168 1 2 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 00000010 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 00000000 Network Number 11000000 10101000 00000001 Host ID 00000010 By convention subnet masks always consist of a continuous sequence of ones beginning from the leftmost bit of the mask followed by a continuous sequence of zeros for a total number of 32 bits Subnet masks can be referred to by the size of the network number part the bits with a 1 value For example an 8 bit mask means that the first 8 bits of the mask are ones and the remaining 24 bits are zeroes AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting Subnet masks are expressed in dotted decimal notation just like IP addresses The following examples show the binary and decimal notation for 8 bit 16
184. e other wireless device 4 Once the connection is successfully made the WPS LED shines green EN AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 1 Introduction 1 7 The RESET Button If you forget your password or cannot access the web configurator you will need to use the RESET button at the back of the device to reload the factory default configuration file This means that you will lose all configurations that you had previously and the user name and password will be reset to the default 1 7 1 Using the Reset Button 1 Make sure the POWER LED is on not blinking To set the device back to the factory default settings press the RESET button for ten seconds or until the POWER LED begins to blink and then release it When the POWER LED begins to blink the defaults have been restored and the device restarts 1 8 Ways to Manage the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries Use any of the following methods to manage the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries e Web Configurator This is recommended for everyday management of the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries using a supported web browser e FTP for firmware upgrades and configuration backup restore AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 1 Introduction AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Introducing the Web Configurator 2 1 Overview The web configurator is an HTML based management interface that allows easy device setup and management via Internet browser Use Internet Explo
185. e range of this field is 0 to 65535 This field is ignored if it is O Enter the destination IP address of the packets you wish to filter This field is ignored if it is 0 0 0 0 AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 14 Filters Table 58 Security Filter IP MAC Filter continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Subnet Mask Enter the IP subnet mask for the destination IP address Port Number Enter the destination port of the packets that you wish to filter The range of this field is 0 to 65535 This field is ignored if it is O Protocol Select I CMP TCP or UDP for the upper layer protocol IP MAC Filter Listing IP MAC Filter Rule Index Select the index number of the filter set from the drop down list box This is the index number of the rule in a filter set Active This field shows whether the rule is activated Interface This is the interface that the filter set applies to Direction The filter set applies to this traffic direction Src IP Mask This is the source IP address and subnet mask when you select IP as the rule type Dest IP Mask This is the destination IP address and subnet mask Mac Address This is the MAC address of the packets being filtered Src Port This is the source port number Dest Port This is the destination port number Protocol This is the upper layer protocol Apply Click this to apply your change
186. e remainder of the 32 bit mask you can simply specify the number of ones instead of writing the value of each octet This is usually specified by writing a followed by the number of bits in the mask after the address For example 192 1 1 0 25 is equivalent to saying 192 1 1 0 with subnet mask 255 255 255 128 The following table shows some possible subnet masks using both notations Table 97 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation sumerwesk ASAE SRE MSGR 255 255 255 0 24 0000 0000 0 255 255 255 128 25 1000 0000 128 255 255 255 192 26 1100 0000 192 AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide 267 Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting Table 97 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation continued sape kp penes ree 255 255 255 224 27 1110 0000 224 255 255 255 240 28 1111 0000 240 255 255 255 248 29 1111 1000 248 255 255 255 252 30 1111 1100 252 Subnetting You can use subnetting to divide one network into multiple sub networks In the following example a network administrator creates two sub networks to isolate a group of servers from the rest of the company network for security reasons In this example the company network address is 192 168 1 0 The first three octets of the address 192 168 1 are the network number and the remaining octet is the host ID allowing a maximum of 28 2 or 254 possible hosts The following figure shows the company network before subne
187. eMGMT ICMP LABEL DESCRIPTION Respond to Ping on The AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries will not respond to any incoming Ping requests when Disable is selected Select LAN to reply to incoming LAN Ping requests Select WAN to reply to incoming WAN Ping requests Otherwise select LAN amp WAN to reply to both incoming LAN and WAN Ping requests Secured Client IP A secured client is a trusted computer that is allowed to send Ping requests to the Address AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries Select All to allow any computer to send Ping requests to the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries Choose Range to just allow the computer s with an IP address in the range that you specify to send Ping requests to the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries Apply Click this to save your changes Cancel Click this to restore your previously saved settings 25 8 The SSH Screen You can use Secure SHell SSH to securely access the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries s command line interface Specify which interfaces allow SSH access and from which IP address the access can come SSH is a secure communication protocol that combines authentication and data encryption to provide secure encrypted communication between two hosts over an unsecured network Click Maintenance gt RemoteMGMT gt SSH tab to display the screen as shown AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 25 Remote Management Figure 124 Maintenance gt RemoteMGMT gt SSH Server Port 22 Serv
188. earch p n gt 7 MEME 2 Inthe Control Panel double click Network and Internet Figure 138 Windows Vista Control Panel GOo Control Panel bal neal 2 File Edit View Tools Help Control Panel Home z ea System and Maintenance User Accounts SIELEN Get started with Windows Change account type Back up your computer S i Appearance and ecur E Lie Check PP Ay Personalization e o a program through Windows Shange desktop bntbgroung Firewall Change the color scheme Adjust screen resolution etwork and Internet onnect to the Internet Clock Language and Region View network status and tasks ML Change keyboards or other input methods Set up file sharing Change display language 3 Click Network and Sharing Center Figure 139 Windows Vista Network And Internet QU gt Control Panel p Network and Internet p v 5 Search p File Edit View Tools Help Control Panel Home M Network and Sharing Center System and Maintenance onnect to a network Security View network computers and devices Add a device to the network Set up file sharing Network and Internet Internet Options Connect to theInternet Change yourhomepage Manage browser add ons Programs Delete browsing history and cookies Hardware and Sound 4 Click Manage network connections Figure 140 Windows Vista Network and Sharing Center son OOU SR Network and Int
189. ections Active Node Name VPIVCI Encapsulation Modify 1 Wan_PVCO 0 33 PPPoALLC 2 N A Es 20 3 NIA f 20 4 NIA 5 20 5 NIA 20 6 N A a 4 W 7 NIA age 20 8 NIA af ZW Ethernet Connections Table Active Node Name VID Encapsulation Modify 1 Ethernet WANO PPPoE 2 NIA EE B ZW 3 N A E ZW 4 N A ZW 5 NIA cal 6 NIA a S ZW 7 N A ZW 8 NIA ZW The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 13 Network Setting Broadband More Connections LABEL DESCRIPTION ADSL Connections Table This is an index number indicating the number of the corresponding connection Active This field indicates whether the connection is active or not Clear the check box to disable the connection Select the check box to enable it Node Name This is the name you gave to the Internet connection VPI VCI This field displays the Virtual Path Identifier VPI and Virtual Channel Identifier VCI numbers configured for this WAN connection Encapsulation This field indicates the encapsulation method of the Internet connection Modify The first ISP connection is read only in this screen Use the Broadband Internet Connection screen to edit it Click the Edit icon to edit the Internet connection settings Click this icon on an empty configuration to add a new Internet access setup Click the Remove icon to delete the Internet access setup from your connection list
190. eeps outsiders from discovering your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries when unsupported ports are probed ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP is a message control and error reporting protocol between a host server and a gateway to the Internet ICMP uses Internet Protocol IP datagrams but the messages are processed by the TCP IP software and directly apparent to the application user DoS Thresholds For DoS attacks the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries uses thresholds to determine when to drop sessions that do not become fully established These thresholds apply globally to all sessions You can use the default threshold values or you can change them to values more suitable to your security requirements 15 2 The Firewall General Screen Use this screen to select the firewall protection level on the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries Click Security Firewall General to display the following screen Figure 81 Security Firewall General Firewall O High This setting blocks all traffic to and from the Internet Only local network traffic and LAN to WAN service Telnet FTP HTTP HTTPS DNS POP3 SMTP is permitted Medium This is the recommended setting It allows traffic to the Internet but blocks anyone from the Internet from accessing any services on your local network Low This setting allows traffic to the Internet and also allows someone from the Internet to access services on your local network This would be used with Port Forwar
191. eived and sent through the WAN interface of the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries Refresh Interval Select how often you want the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries to update this screen from the drop down list box Connected This shows the name of the WAN interface that is currently connected Interface AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 19 Traffic Status Table 76 System Monitor gt Traffic Status gt WAN continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Packets Sent Data This indicates the number of transmitted packets on this interface Error This indicates the number of frames with errors transmitted on this interface Drop This indicates the number of outgoing packets dropped on this interface Packets Received Data This indicates the number of received packets on this interface Error This indicates the number of frames with errors received on this interface Drop This indicates the number of received packets dropped on this interface 19 3 The LAN Status Screen Click System Monitor gt Traffic Status gt LAN to open the following screen You can view the LAN traffic statistics in this screen Figure 101 System Monitor gt Traffic Status gt LAN Refresh Interval 10 Sec Interface LAN1 LAN2 LAN3 LANA Wireless Bytes Sent 19285011 19285011 19285011 51083049 0 Bytes Received 0 0 0 5470703 18266090 Interface LAN1 LAN2 LAN3 LAN4 Wireless Data 54633 54633 54633 89768 1686 Pakej F
192. eld is available only when you select TCP in the IP protocol field Packet Length If you select this option the matched TCP packets must contain the ACK Acknowledge flag This field is available only when you select I Pv4 or I Pv6 in the Ether Type field Select this option and enter the minimum and maximum packet length from 46 to 1500 in the fields provided IPP DS Field Select I PP TOS to specify an IP precedence range and type of services Select DSCP to specify a DiffServ Code Point DSCP range IP Precedence Range Enter a range from 0 to 7 for IP precedence 0 is the lowest priority and 7 is the highest Type of Select a type of service from the drop down list box Service Available options are Normal service Minimize delay Maximize throughput Maximize reliability and Minimize monetary cost DSCP Range Select this option and specify a DSCP DiffServ Code Point number between 0 and 63 in the field provided 802 1P Select this option and select a priority level between 0 and 7 from the drop down list box 0 is the lowest priority level and 7 is the highest VLAN ID Select this option and enter the source VLAN ID in this field Exclude Select this option to exclude the packets that match the specified criteria from this classifier Action Forward To Select the interface through which traffic that matches the rule is forwarded out If you select Unchange the AMG1302 AMG
193. enables an IPv6 router to use the IPv6 prefix network address received from the ISP or a connected uplink router for its LAN The AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries uses the received IPv6 prefix for example 2001 db2 48 to generate its LAN IP address Through sending Router Advertisements RAs regularly by multicast the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries passes the IPv6 prefix information to its LAN hosts The hosts then can use the prefix to generate their IPv6 addresses ICMPv6 Internet Control Message Protocol for IPv6 ICMPv6 or ICMP for IPv6 is defined in RFC 4443 ICMPv6 has a preceding Next Header value of 58 which is different from the value used to identify ICMP for IPv4 ICMPv6 is an integral part of IPv6 IPv6 nodes use ICMPv6 to report errors encountered in packet processing and perform other diagnostic functions such as ping Multicast Listener Discovery The Multicast Listener Discovery MLD protocol defined in RFC 2710 is derived from IPv4 s Internet Group Management Protocol version 2 IGMPv2 MLD uses ICMPv6 message types rather than IGMP message types MLDv1 is equivalent to IGMPv2 and MLDv2 is equivalent to IGMPv3 MLD allows an IPv6 switch or router to discover the presence of MLD listeners who wish to receive multicast packets and the IP addresses of multicast groups the hosts want to join on its network MLD snooping and MLD proxy are analogous to IGMP snooping and IGMP proxy in IPv4 MLD filtering controls which multicast gr
194. encekecen nette ed inne rues 85 6 4 WAN Technical Reference Mee eacceeva ode aante unine ian anaE E aaO las daauedonnddeaclenesuseaivends 86 OI ENCOD cus tr T 86 35 2 DUTIES cusassduseezpa advenon aeta Sa Fea dapn Fe pop Maas dh gi Feb a Vaga a a et E ea aaa as 87 6 AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Table of Contents eg VPE VE Lenses ai a Pn qd RE EAA ad cuia Pu Ep apaga Mori ntt B7 Dd IP AddiGss POSIOITIBD A E E cbr udubt em Dodarde dead vases bepianduad sas duane ERN Ra ERREUR RR 87 94 5 Nalled Up Connection PISIS ciere entrent ci er a ep te eor b case vets ets 88 ida NAE Gisuiscbssiinum das umm teda M a Pa n a EMI LM ATE NEAR 88 mo Dec SIE subasaeteromietb cede at borne au Ee eR boo OR ER UR Eno Dos VIR EE eU nin rr EX ee 88 MON ECOSSE Ss RR EE DIR T PR 89 Chapter 7 Pil LAN 91 FARE i 2 PR TIS T erent e et 91 7 1 1 What You Can Do in the Wireless LAN Screens 1iuussessicceeeee tiet reda pe Eee casu ser EP ERE E KREG 91 7 1 2 What You Need to Know About Wireless sesesssssessseseseeeeeneeneneennnnnnnn nnn nnn nnns 92 FECE GU Yon Rr T m mI Um 92 RECANTE E ON occ EC E E E E E OU DUE A E 92 prc ce rM EE T INTTR 94 uas sic NEF EM MIO i Gor taste citm id dace bu catt imdiis tutu di edu etus E bupa duet cu teet DU TE Rus 94 Tea Mare Secure IVP AL PPS iioi coris Sada gar meant aea en Lc a a 95 fond EPAUD URL PINON Leid texsnss N a uekc o ci dads Eo
195. ended destination through the IPv4 network Figure 178 Configured Tunnel Example A mm Sa 1 IPv4 c 2 i i i LI i 1 i i LU 6to4 Tunnel A 6to4 tunnel is an automatic tunnelling mechanism that provides connection between IPv6 networks across an IPv4 network To transmit IPv6 packets over an IPv4 network the IPv6 packets are encapsulated inside IPv4 packets The following figure shows a network example Figure 179 6to4 Relay Router Network Example IPv6 Internet IPv6 i RC e a m mm In a 6to4 tunnel 6to4 routers A and B in the example network forward these packets between IPv6 networks 1 and 2 over the IPv4 Internet A 6to4 relay router C connects to both an IPv6 AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Appendix E IPv6 and IPv4 network A 6to4 relay router is used to forward packets between 6to4 routers in an IPv4 Internet and an IPv6 device Z on the IPv6 Internet To transmit packets a 6to4 address is used with a special IPv6 prefix of 2002 to encode a given IPv4 address A 6to4 address has the following format 2002 IPv4 address subnet ID host ID 64 For example if you have an IPv4 address of 192 168 1 1 first converted to binary notation and then to the colon hexadecimal representation of c0a8 0101 then the 6to4 addresses is 2002 c0a8 0101 1 64 Example Enabling IPv6 on Windows XP 2003 Vista By default Windo
196. equivalent to any Source Interface Destination Interface Specify a source interface to which this firewall rule applies This is the interface through which the traffic entered the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries Please note that a blank source interface is equivalent to any Specify a destination interface to which this firewall rule applies This is the interface through which the traffic is destined to leave the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries Please note that a blank source interface is equivalent to any Services Available Services Please see Appendix F on page 305 for more information on services available Select a service from the Available Services box Edit Customized Service Click the Edit Customized Service button to bring up the screen that you use to configure a new custom service that is not in the predefined list of services TCP Flag Specify any TCP flag bits the firewall rule is to check for Schedule Select the days and time during which to apply the rule Select Everyday and All Day to always apply the rule Apply Click this to save your changes Cancel Click this to restore your previously saved settings 15 4 2 Customized Services Configure customized services and port numbers not predefined by the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries For a comprehensive list of port numbers and services visit the IANA Internet Assigned Number Authority website See Appendix F on page 305 for some examples
197. er 7 Wireless LAN her favorite movie is Vanishing Point which you know was made in 1971 you could use 70dodchal71vanpoi as your security key The following sections introduce different types of wireless security you can set up in the wireless network 7 10 3 1 SSID Normally the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries acts like a beacon and regularly broadcasts the SSID in the area You can hide the SSID instead in which case the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries does not broadcast the SSID In addition you should change the default SSID to something that is difficult to guess This type of security is fairly weak however because there are ways for unauthorized wireless devices to get the SSID In addition unauthorized wireless devices can still see the information that is sent in the wireless network 7 10 3 2 MAC Address Filter Every device that can use a wireless network has a unique identification number called a MAC address A MAC address is usually written using twelve hexadecimal characters for example 00A0C5000002 or 00 A0 C5 00 00 02 To get the MAC address for each device in the wireless network see the device s User s Guide or other documentation You can use the MAC address filter to tell the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries which devices are allowed or not allowed to use the wireless network If a device is allowed to use the wireless network it still has to have the correct information SSID channel and security If a device is not allowe
198. er Access LAN v Secured Client IP Address AI From To Ran From J To From To B Note 1 The Range IP could be IPv4 or IPv6 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 91 Maintenance RemoteMGMT SSH LABEL DESCRIPTION Server Port This displays the service port number for accessing the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries If the number is grayed out it is not editable Server Access Select the interface s through which a computer may access the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries using this service Note It is recommended if you are allowing WAN access even temporarily to change the default password in Maintenance gt User Account To allow access from the WAN you will need to configure a WAN to Router firewall rule See Firewall Section on page 173 for information on configuring firewall rules Secured Client IP A secured client is a trusted computer that is allowed to communicate with the Address AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries using this service Select All to allow any computer to access the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries using this service Choose Range to just allow the computer s with an IP address in the range that you specify to access the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries using this service Apply Click this to save your changes Cancel Click this to restore your previously saved settings 25 8 1 SSH Example This section shows an example using a graphical interface SSH client program to re
199. er Access LAN v Secured Client IP Address G AII Z From To Range From To From To 1 The session will be reset after apply 2 The Range IP could be IPv4 or IPv6 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 87 Maintenance RemoteMGMT FTP LABEL DESCRIPTION Server Port This displays the service port number for accessing the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries If the number is grayed out it is not editable Server Access Secured Client IP Address Select the interface s through which a computer may access the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries using this service A secured client is a trusted computer that is allowed to communicate with the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries using this service Select All to allow any computer to access the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries using this service Choose Range to just allow the computer s with an IP address in the range that you specify to access the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries using this service Apply Click this to save your changes Cancel Click this to restore your previously saved settings 25 5 The SNMP Screen Simple Network Management Protocol is a protocol used for exchanging management information between network devices Your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries supports SNMP agent functionality which allows a manager station to manage and monitor the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries through the network The AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries supports SNMP version one S
200. er can send cells Type the PCR here Sustain Cell The Sustain Cell Rate SCR sets the average cell rate long term that can be transmitted Rate Type the SCR which must be less than the PCR Note that system default is O cells sec Maximum Burst Maximum Burst Size MBS refers to the maximum number of cells that can be sent at the Size peak rate Type the MBS which is less than 65535 MTU AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 6 Broadband Table 15 Network Setting gt Broadband gt More Connections Edit Advanced Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION MTU The Maximum Transmission Unit MTU defines the size of the largest packet allowed on an interface or connection Enter the MTU in this field For ENET ENCAP the MTU value is 1500 For PPPoE the MTU value is 1492 For PPPoA and RFC the MTU is 100 1500 Apply Click this to save your changes Cancel Click this to restore your previously saved settings 6 4 WAN Technical Reference This section provides some technical background information about the topics covered in this chapter 6 4 1 Encapsulation Be sure to use the encapsulation method required by your ISP The AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries supports the following methods 6 4 1 1 ENET ENCAP The MAC Encapsulated Routing Link Protocol ENET ENCAP is only implemented with the IP network protocol IP packets are routed between the Ethernet interface and the WAN interfa
201. er then checks the user s identification against its database and grants or denies network access accordingly 3 A 256 bit Pairwise Master Key PMK is derived from the authentication process by the RADIUS server and the client 4 The RADIUS server distributes the PMK to the AP The AP then sets up a key hierarchy and management system using the PMK to dynamically generate unique data encryption keys The keys are used to encrypt every data packet that is wirelessly communicated between the AP and the wireless clients Figure 176 WPA 2 with RADIUS Application Example INTERNEJ WPA 2 PSK Application Example A WPA 2 PSK application looks as follows 1 First enter identical passwords into the AP and all wireless clients The Pre Shared Key PSK must consist of between 8 and 63 ASCII characters or 64 hexadecimal characters including spaces and symbols 2 The AP checks each wireless client s password and allows it to join the network only if the password matches 3 The AP and wireless clients generate a common PMK Pairwise Master Key The key itself is not sent over the network but is derived from the PSK and the SSID AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs The AP and wireless clients use the TKIP or AES encryption process the PMK and information exchanged in a handshake to create temporal encryption keys They use these keys to encrypt data exchanged between them Figure 177 WPA 2 PS
202. ernet Network and Sharing Center v 9 Search 5 File Edit View Tools Help e My Network and Sharing Center View computers and devices View full map Connect to a network Set up a connection or network A x er Manage network connections E TWPCS9111 Internet Diagnose and repair This computer a Not connected AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Appendix A Setting up Your Computer s IP Address 5 Right click Local Area Connection and then click Properties Note During this procedure click Continue whenever Windows displays a screen saying Figure 141 Name File a Organize v E Views v Disable this network device LAN or High Sesed Internet 11 Local Collapse group Left Arrow A Come X d Ken Expand all groups D Ine Collapse all groups Disable Diagnose that it needs your permission to continue qe Network and Internet p Network Connection Edit View Tools Advanced Help Status Device Name Networ Connectivity Bridge Connections Create Shortcut Delete Rename Windows Vista Network and Sharing Center 6 Select Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP I Pv4 and click Properties Figure 142 Windows Vista Local Area Connection Properties prrcE 4 Local Area Connection Properties Networking king Connect using Lu Intel R PRO 1000 MT Desktop Connection This connection uses the following items KI I SI S
203. erver and the clients Enter the IP address of the actual remote DHCP server in the Remote DHCP Server field in this case When DHCP is used the following items need to be set IP Addressing Values Beginning IP Address This field specifies the first of the contiguous addresses in the IP address pool Pool Size This field specifies the size or count of the IP address pool DHCP Server Lease Time Lease Time This field specifies the lease time in seconds of an IP address assigned by the DHCP server DNS Values DNS Select Dynamic to have the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries pass a DNS Domain Name System server IP address to the DHCP clients Select Static and enter the DNS server IP address es in the fields below if you know the IP address DNS Server 1 2 Enter the IP address of your primary secondary DNS server Apply Click this to save your changes Cancel Click this to restore your previously saved settings Advanced Setup Click this to display the Advanced LAN Setup screen and edit more details of your LAN setup AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 8 Home Networking 8 3 The Static DHCP Screen This table allows you to assign IP addresses on the LAN to specific individual computers based on their MAC Addresses Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC Media Access Control address The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six p
204. ervices button to access the following screen Click Add and configure the following settings In this tutorial a hypothetical port 123 is allowed Click OK Service Name My Service Service Type TCP Port Number 123 AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 4 Tutorials 4 Service Name Service Type Port Configuration ype Single PortRange From 123 To 3 Port Number In the Add New Firewall Rule screen select Active In the Available Services field select the service you configured My Service Click OK Add New Firewall Rule x Edit Rule Action for Matched Packets IP Version Type Permit v IPv4 v Rate Limit packets second x Maximum Burst Number C Log Log Level DEBUG packets Rules Source Address Address Type any Adaress Start IP Address 0 0 0 0 End IP Address Subnet Mask Source Mac Address 00 00 00 00 00 00 Source Interface Destination Address Address Type Any Address v Start IP Address End IP Address Subnet Address Destination Interface Service Available Services Edit Customized Services My Service TCP 123 J TCP Flag KSYN ACK FIN RST URG PSH ALL NONE Schedule Day to Apply L Everyday E Sun E Mon E Tue O wed E Thu O Fri E Sat Time of Day to Apply 24 Hour Format E All Day Start hour hour minute minute End
205. es see Section 4 4 3 on page 45 4 4 2 Using WPS This section shows you how to set up a wireless network using WPS WPS is a way to automatically set up a secure wireless network connection between an AP and a notebook Limitations of using WPS are that is must be done two devices at a time and within two minutes It uses the AMG1302 AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 4 Tutorials AMG1202 TSeries as the AP and ZyXEL NWD210N as the wireless client which connects to the notebook Note The wireless client must be a WPS aware device for example a WPS USB adapter or PCMCIA card There are two WPS methods to set up the wireless client settings e Push Button Configuration PBC simply press a button This is the easier of the two methods e PIN Configuration configure a Personal Identification Number PIN on the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries A wireless client must also use the same PIN in order to download the wireless network settings from the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries Push Button Configuration PBC Make sure that your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries is turned on and your notebook is within the cover range of the wireless signal Make sure that you have installed the wireless client driver and utility in your notebook Make sure wireless LAN is enabled and the wireless security mode is set to WPA PSK2 or No Security in the Network Setting Wireless General screen In the wireless client utility go to the WPS s
206. es very directional to 120 degrees less directional Directional antennas are ideal for hallways and outdoor point to point applications Positioning Antennas In general antennas should be mounted as high as practically possible and free of obstructions In point to point application position both antennas at the same height and in a direct line of sight to each other to attain the best performance For omni directional antennas mounted on a table desk and so on point the antenna up For omni directional antennas mounted on a wall or ceiling point the antenna down For a single AP application place omni directional antennas as close to the center of the coverage area as possible For directional antennas point the antenna in the direction of the desired coverage area AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide IPv6 Overview IPv6 Internet Protocol version 6 is designed to enhance IP address size and features The increase in IPv6 address size to 128 bits from the 32 bit IPv4 address allows up to 3 4 x 1038 IP addresses IPv6 Addressing The 128 bit IPv6 address is written as eight 16 bit hexadecimal blocks separated by colons This is an example IPv6 address 2001 0d58 1a25 0015 0000 0000 1a2 0000 IPv6 addresses can be abbreviated in two ways e Leading zeros in a block can be omitted So 2001 0db8 1a2b 0015 0000 0000 1a2 0000 can be wri
207. es some popular authentication types EAP MD5 EAP TLS EAP TTLS PEAP and LEAP Your wireless LAN device may not support all authentication types EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol is an authentication protocol that runs on top of the IEEE 802 1x transport mechanism in order to support multiple types of user authentication By using EAP to interact with an EAP compatible RADIUS server an access point helps a wireless station and a RADIUS server perform authentication The type of authentication you use depends on the RADIUS server and an intermediary AP s that supports IEEE 802 1x For EAP TLS authentication type you must first have a wired connection to the network and obtain the certificate s from a certificate authority CA A certificate also called digital IDs can be used to authenticate users and a CA issues certificates and guarantees the identity of each certificate owner AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide 287 Appendix D Wireless LANs EAP MD5 Message Digest Algorithm 5 MD5 authentication is the simplest one way authentication method The authentication server sends a challenge to the wireless client The wireless client proves that it knows the password by encrypting the password with the challenge and sends back the information Password is not sent in plain text However MD5 authentication has some weaknesses Since the authentication server needs to get the plaintext passwords the passwords must be s
208. ess enter dhcp in the BoorPROTO field The following figure shows an example 262 AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Appendix A Setting up Your Computer s IP Address Figure 154 Red Hat 9 0 Dynamic IP Address Setting in ifconfig ethO EVICE eth0 BOOT yes OOTPROTO dhcp SERCTL no ERDNS yes YPE Ethernet Po GE O g e If you have a static IP address enter static in the BOOTPROTO field Type IPADDR followed by the IP address in dotted decimal notation and type NETMASK followed by the subnet mask The following example shows an example where the static IP address is 192 168 1 10 and the subnet mask is 255 255 255 0 Figure 155 Red Hat 9 0 Static IP Address Setting in ifconfig ethO DEVICE eth0 ONBOOT yes BOOTPROTO static IPADDR 192 168 1 10 NETMASK 255 255 255 0 USERCTL no PEERDNS yes TYPE Ethernet 2 If you know your DNS server IP address es enter the DNS server information in the resolv conf file in the etc directory The following figure shows an example where two DNS server IP addresses are specified Figure 156 Red Hat 9 0 DNS Settings in resolv conf nameserver 172 23 5 1 nameserver 172 23 5 2 3 After you edit and save the configuration files you must restart the network card Enter network restart in the etc rc d init d directory The following figure shows an example Figure 157 Red Hat 9 0 Rest
209. etting Use this screen to change your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries s time and date Log Setting Log Setting Use this screen to select which logs and or immediate alerts your device is to record You can also set it to e mail the logs to you Firmware Firmware Upgrade Use this screen to upload firmware to your device Upgrade Backup Restore Backup Restore Use this screen to backup and restore your device s configuration settings or reset the factory default settings Reboot Reboot Use this screen to reboot the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries without turning the power off Remote MGMT WWW Telnet FTP SNMP DNS ICMP SSH Use this screen to enable specific traffic directions for specific network service Diagnostic Ping Use this screen to test the connections to other devices DSL Line Use this screen to identify problems with the DSL connection AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide 27 Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Internet Wireless Setup Wizard 3 1 Overview Use the wizard setup screens to configure your system for Internet access with the information given to you by your ISP Note See the advanced menu chapters for background information on these fields 3 2 Internet Wireless Wizard Setup 1 After you enter the password to access the web configurator click the Wizard icon Bl in the top right corner of the web configurat
210. etting page Enable WPS and press the WPS button Start or WPS button Push and hold the WPS button on the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries for 1 2 seconds Alternatively you may log into AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries s web configuration enable WPS and click the WPS button in the Network Setting Wireless WPS screen General WPS 9 Enable Disable settings are invalid when disabled Add a new device with WPS Method Method 1 PBC D Method 2 PIN Step 1 Click WPS butto wes Step 1 Enter the PIN of your new wireless client device and then click Register Step 2 Press the WPS button on your new wireless client devicewithin 120 seconds Step 2 Press the WPS button on your new wireless client device within 120 seconds Note It doesn t matter which button on the client or the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries is pressed first You must press the second button within two minutes of pressing the first one The AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries sends the proper configuration settings to the wireless client This may take up to two minutes The wireless client is then able to communicate with the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries securely AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 4 Tutorials The following figure shows you an example of how to set up a wireless network and its security by pressing a button on both AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries and wireless client Wireless Client The Device WITHIN 2 MINUTES Press and hold for 5 seco
211. etwork client go through one access point AP Intra BSS traffic is traffic between wireless stations in the BSS When Intra BSS traffic blocking is disabled wireless station A and B can access the wired network and communicate with each other When Intra BSS traffic blocking is enabled wireless station A and B can still access the wired network but cannot communicate with each other Figure 40 Basic Service set ae Ne BSS 7 10 6 MBSSID Traditionally you need to use different APs to configure different Basic Service Sets BSSs As well as the cost of buying extra APs there is also the possibility of channel interference The AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries s MBSSID Multiple Basic Service Set IDentifier function allows you to use one access point to provide several BSSs simultaneously You can then assign varying QoS priorities and or security modes to different SSIDs Wireless devices can use different BSSIDs to associate with the same AP 7 10 6 1 Notes on Multiple BSSs e A maximum of eight BSSs are allowed on one AP simultaneously e You must use different keys for different BSSs If two wireless devices have different BSSIDs they are in different BSSs but have the same keys they may hear each other s communications but not communicate with each other n2 AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN e MBSSID should not replace but rather be used in conjunction with 802 1x security 7 10
212. f an outside host 11 5 2 What NAT Does In the simplest form NAT changes the source IP address in a packet received from a subscriber the inside local address to another the inside global address before forwarding the packet to the WAN side When the response comes back NAT translates the destination address the inside global address back to the inside local address before forwarding it to the original inside host Note that the IP address either local or global of an outside host is never changed The global IP addresses for the inside hosts can be either static or dynamically assigned by the ISP In addition you can designate servers for example a web server and a telnet server on your local network and make them accessible to the outside world If you do not define any servers for Many to One and Many to Many Overload mapping see Table 53 on page 159 NAT offers the additional benefit of firewall protection With no servers defined your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries filters out all incoming inquiries thus preventing intruders from probing your network For more information on IP address translation refer to RFC 1631 The IP Network Address Translator NAT 11 5 3 How NAT Works Each packet has two addresses a source address and a destination address For outgoing packets the ILA Inside Local Address is the source address on the LAN and the IGA Inside Global Address is the source address on the WAN For incoming packets th
213. f the rule Home Network User This shows the MAC address of the LAN user s computer to which this rule applies Internet Access This shows the day s and time on which parental control is enabled Schedule Network Service This shows whether the network service is configured If not None will be shown AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide EB Chapter 16 Parental Control Table 68 Security gt Parental Control continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Website Blocked This shows whether the website block is configured If not None will be shown Modify Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the rule Click the Delete icon to delete an existing rule Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings 16 2 1 Add Edit Parental Control Rule Click Add new PCP in the Parental Control screen to add a new rule or click the Edit icon next to an existing rule to edit it Use this screen to configure a restricted access schedule and or URL filtering settings to block the users on your network from accessing certain web sites Figure 94 Add Edit Parental Control Rule General E Active Parental Control Profile Name Home Network User All v Internet Access Schedule Day Everyday Monday Tuesday Friday Saturday _ Sunday Time of Day to Apply 24 Hour Format Start Time h
214. field and VLAN ID of the frames If you select Remove the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries deletes the VLAN ID of the frames before forwarding them out If you select Add the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries treat all matched traffic untagged and add a second priority level and VLAN ID that you specify in the Ethernet Priority and VLAN ID fields If you select Same the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries keep the Ethernet Priority and VLAN ID in the packets To configure the Ethernet Priority you can either select a priority number in the first drop down list box 7 is the highest and 0 is the lowest priority or select an application from the second drop down list box which automatically maps to the corresponding priority number Key Net Traffic 7 Voice 6 Video 5 IGMP 4 Key Data 3 OK Click OK to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving 10 5 The QoS Game List Screen Use this screen to give priority to traffic for specific games Click Network Setting gt QoS gt Game List to open the screen as shown next Figure 65 Network Setting gt QoS gt Game List C Enable Game List O Call of Duty Black Ops PC C Call of Duty Modern Warfare 2 PC C CounterStrike PC Call of Duty Black Ops XBOX360 O Call of Duty World at War PS3 E FIFA 2010 PS3 Call of Duty Black Ops PS3 C Call of Duty Modern Warfare 2 PS3 C DiRT 2 PS3 C FIFA 2011 PS3 O starCraft2 PC C Pro Evolution Soccer 2011 PS3
215. field displays whether the queue is active or not A yellow bulb signifies that this queue is active A gray bulb signifies that this queue is not active Name This shows the descriptive name of this queue queue passes Interface This shows the name of the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries s interface through which traffic in this Priority This shows the priority of this queue Weight This shows the weight of this queue AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 10 Quality of Service QoS Table 41 Network Setting QoS Queue LABEL DESCRIPTION Rate Limit This shows the maximum transmission rate allowed for traffic on this queue Modify Click the Edit icon to edit the queue Click the Delete icon to delete an existing queue Note that subsequent rules move up by one when you take this action 10 3 1 Adding a QoS Queue Click the edit icon in the Queue Setup screen to configure a queue Figure 62 Queue Setup Edit Queue Edit X Active o Name Interface WAN Priority 1 Highest Weight 1 M Rate Limit kbps Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 42 Queue Setup Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select to enable or disable this queue Name Enter the descriptive name of this queue Interface Select the interface to which this queue is applied This field is read only if you are editing the queue
216. from the Electronic Communications Office Please check http www esd lv for more details 2 4 GHz frekven u joslas izmantodanai rpus telp m nepieciedama atiauja no Elektronisko sakaru direkcijas Vairak inform cijas http www esd lv Notes 1 Although Norway Switzerland and Liechtenstein are not EU member states the EU Directive 1999 5 EC has also been implemented in those countries 2 The regulatory limits for maximum output power are specified in EIRP The EIRP level in dBm of a device can be calculated by adding the gain of the antenna used specified in dBi to the output power available at the connector specified in dBm Safety Warnings e Do NOT use this product near water for example in a wet basement or near a swimming pool e Do NOT expose your device to dampness dust or corrosive liquids e Do NOT store things on the device Do NOT install use or service this device during a thunderstorm There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning e Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device e Do NOT open the device or unit Opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks ONLY qualified service personnel should service or disassemble this device Please contact your vendor for further information Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them Always disconnect all ca
217. ften wireless stations have to resend user names and passwords in order to stay connected This field is available only when you select WPA2 as security mode If wireless station authentication is done using a RADIUS server the reauthentication timer on the RADIUS server has priority WPA Compatible This field is only available for WPA2 Select this if you want the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries to support WPA and WPA2 simultaneously AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide 97 Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Table 19 Wireless gt General More Secure WPA 2 continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Group Key Update The Group Key Update Timer is the rate at which the RADIUS server sends a new Timer group key out to all clients Encryption Select the encryption type for data encryption If you choose WPA as the security mode the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries uses TKIP for data encryption If you choose WPA2 as the security mode and enable WPA PSK Compatible the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries uses either TKIP and AES TKI PAES MI X for data encryption If you choose WPA2 as the security mode but disable WPA PSK Compatible the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries uses AES for data encryption 7 3 The More AP Screen This screen allows you to enable and configure multiple Basic Service Sets BSSs on the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries Click Network Setting gt Wireless gt More AP The following screen displays Figure 31 Network Sett
218. ful packet inspection drops packets traveling in the following directions e WAN to LAN These rules specify which computers on the WAN can access which computers or services on the LAN Note You also need to configure NAT port forwarding or full featured NAT address mapping rules to allow computers on the WAN to access devices on the LAN e WAN to Router By default the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries stops computers on the WAN from managing the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries You could configure one of these rules to allow a WAN computer to manage the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries Note You also need to configure the remote management settings to allow a WAN computer to manage the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries You may define additional rules and sets or modify existing ones but please exercise extreme caution in doing so For example you may create rules to e Block certain types of traffic such as IRC Internet Relay Chat from the LAN to the Internet e Allow certain types of traffic such as Lotus Notes database synchronization from specific hosts on the Internet to specific hosts on the LAN e Allow everyone except your competitors to access a web server e Restrict use of certain protocols such as Telnet to authorized users on the LAN These custom rules work by comparing the source IP address destination IP address and IP protocol type of network traffic to rules set by the administrator Your customized rules take precedence and override
219. g Message Message from web page an 7 Are you sure you want to restore Factory default settings OK Cancel Wait until the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries s login screen appears You can also press the RESET button on the rear panel to reset the factory defaults of your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries Refer to Section 1 7 on page 19 for more information on the RESET button AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 24 Backup Restore 24 3 The Reboot Screen System restart allows you to reboot the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries remotely without turning the power off You may need to do this if the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries hangs for example Click Maintenance Reboot Click the Reboot button to have the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries reboot This does not affect the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries s configuration Figure 115 Maintenance gt Reboot System Reboot Reboot AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide 221 Chapter 24 Backup Restore 222 AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Remote Management 25 1 Overview Remote management allows you to determine which services protocols can access which AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries interface if any from which computers The following figure shows remote management of the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries coming in from the WAN Figure 1168 Remote Management From the WAN LAN WAN INTERNEJ Telnet Note When you configure remote management to allow management f
220. g Up NAT Forwarding for a Game Server see page 48 Setting Up NAT Forwarding for a Game Server see page 48 e Configuring Firewall Rules to Allow a Specified Service see page 50 e Configuring Static Route for Routing to Another Network see page 53 Port Binding Configuration see page 55 Configuring QoS to Prioritize Traffic see page 59 e Access the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries from the Internet Using DDNS see page 62 4 2 Setting Up Your DSL Connection This tutorial shows you how to set up your Internet connection using the web configurator If you connect to the Internet through a DSL connection use the information from your Internet Service Provider ISP to configure the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries Do the following steps Connect the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries properly Refer to the Quick Start Guide for details on the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries s hardware connection Connect one end of a DSL cable to the DSL port of your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries The other end should be connected to the DSL port in your house or a DSL router modem provided by your ISP Connect one end of Ethernet cable to an Ethernet port on the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries and the other end to a computer that you will use to access the web configuration Connect the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries to a power source turn it on and wait for the POWER LED to become a steady green AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 4 Tutorials Account Configuration For this example
221. g method of the RIP packets that the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries sends it recognizes both formats when receiving RIP 1 is universally supported but RIP 2 carries more information RIP 1 is probably adequate for most networks unless you have an unusual network topology Both RIP 2B and RIP 2M sends the routing data in RIP 2 format the difference being that RIP 2B uses subnet broadcasting while RIP 2M uses multicasting Multicasting can reduce the load on non router machines since they generally do not listen to the RIP multicast address and so will not receive the RIP packets However if one router uses multicasting then all routers on your network must use multicasting also 8 7 6 Multicast Traditionally IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways Unicast 1 sender 1 recipient or Broadcast 1 sender everybody on the network Multicast delivers IP packets to a group of hosts on the network not everybody and not just 1 IGMP Internet Group Multicast Protocol is a network layer protocol used to establish membership in a Multicast group it is not used to carry user data IGMP version 2 RFC 2236 is an improvement over version 1 RFC 1112 but IGMP version 1 is still in wide use IGMP version 3 supports source filtering reporting or ignoring traffic from specific source address to a particular host on the network If you would like to read more detailed information about interoperability between IGMP version 2 and version 1
222. gnment must be static IP Assignment with ENET ENCAP Encapsulation In this case you can have either a static or dynamic IP For a static IP you must fill in all the IP Address and Gateway IP Address fields as supplied by your ISP However for a dynamic IP the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries acts as a DHCP client on the WAN port and so the IP Address and Gateway IP Address fields are not applicable N A as the DHCP server assigns them to the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries 6 4 5 Nailed Up Connection PPP A nailed up connection is a dial up line where the connection is always up regardless of traffic demand The AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries does two things when you specify a nailed up connection The first is that idle timeout is disabled The second is that the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries will try to bring up the connection when turned on and whenever the connection is down A nailed up connection can be very expensive for obvious reasons Do not specify a nailed up connection unless your telephone company offers flat rate service or you need a constant connection and the cost is of no concern 6 4 6 NAT NAT Network Address Translation NAT RFC 1631 is the translation of the IP address of a host in a packet for example the source address of an outgoing packet used within one network to a different IP address known within another network 6 5 Traffic Shaping Traffic Shaping is an agreement between the carrier and the subscriber to regulate the average r
223. h mm End Time hh mm Network Service Network Service Setting Add new service Active Block selected service s Service Name Blocked Site URL Site URL Site URL Site URL Site URL Site URL Wednesday Thursday The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 69 Parental Control Add Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION General Active Select the checkbox to activate this parental control rule AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 16 Parental Control Table 69 Parental Control Add Edit continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Parental Control Profile Name Enter a descriptive name for the rule Home Network User Select the LAN user that you want to apply this rule to from the drop down list box If you select Custom enter the LAN user s MAC address If you select All the rule applies to all LAN users Internet Access Sched ule Day Select check boxes for the days that you want the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries to perform parental control Time of Day to Apply Enter the starting and ending time that the LAN user is allowed access Network Service Network Service Setting If you select Block the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries prohibits the users from viewing the Web sites with the URLs listed below If you select Access the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries blocks access to all URLs except ones listed below
224. he IPv6 prefix information to its LAN hosts The hosts can then use the prefix to generate their IPv6 addresses 78 AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 6 Broadband Table 11 Network Setting Broadband Internet Connection continued LABEL DESCRIPTION WAN Identifier Type Select Manual to manually enter a WAN Identifier as the interface ID to identify the WAN interface The WAN Identifier is appended to the IPv6 address prefix to create the routable global IPv6 address Select EUI 64 to use the EUI 64 format to generate an interface ID from the MAC address of the WAN interface WAN Identifier If you selected Manual enter the WAN Identifier in this field The WAN identifier should be unique and 64 bits in hexadecimal form Every 16 bit block should be separated by a colon as in XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX where X is a hexadecimal character Blocks of zeros can be represented with double colons as in XXXX XXXX XXXX Connection PPPoA and PPPoE encapsulation only Advanced Setup Keep Alive Select Keep Alive when you want your connection up all the time The AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries will try to bring up the connection automatically if it is disconnected Apply Click this to save your changes Cancel Click this to restore your previously saved settings Click this to display the Advanced WAN Setup screen and edit more details of your WAN setup Click this button again to d
225. icast packets packets sent to one computer and broadcast packets packets sent to every computer Internet Group Multicast Protocol IGMP is a network layer protocol used to establish membership in a multicast group The AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries supports I GMP v1 IGMP v2 and I GMP v3 Select None to disable it MLD Proxy Select the version of MLD proxy v1 or v2 to have the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries act as for this connection This allows the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries to get subscription information and maintain a joined member list for each multicast group It can reduce multicast traffic significantly Select None to turn off MLD proxy ATM QoS ATM QoS Type Select CBR Continuous Bit Rate to specify fixed always on bandwidth for voice or data traffic Select UBR With PCR Unspecified Bit Rate for applications that are non time sensitive such as e mail Select Realtime VBR real time Variable Bit Rate type for applications with bursty connections that require closely controlled delay and delay variation Select Non Realtime VBR non real time Variable Bit Rate type for connections that do not require closely controlled delay and delay variation Peak Cell Rate Divide the DSL line rate bps by 424 the size of an ATM cell to find the Peak Cell Rate PCR This is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells Type the PCR here Sustain Cell Rate The Sustain Cell Rate SCR sets the average cell rate
226. ifies the IP network address of the final destination Routing is always based on network number Prefix Length An IPv6 prefix length specifies how many most significant bits starting from the left in the address compose the network address This field displays the bit number of the IPv6 subnet mask Device This specifies the LAN or WAN PVC Modify Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can set up a static route on the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries Click the Remove icon to remove a static route from the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries A window displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete the route 9 3 1 IPv6 Static Route Edit Use this screen to configure the required information for an IPv6 static route Click Add new static route or select an IPv6 static route index number and click Edit The screen shown next appears Figure 58 Network Setting Static Route IPv6 Static Route Add Edit Add New IPv6 Static Route X IPv6 Prefix Length PVC IPv6 Address Destination IPv6 Address Gateway IPv6 Address LAN Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 39 Network Setting gt Static Route gt IPv6 Static Route Add Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Destination IPv6 Address This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination Routing is always based on network number If you need to specify a route to a single ho
227. igured VCI Enter the Virtual Channel Identifier VCI assigned to you This field may already be configured IP Address Enter the IP address of the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries Primary DNS Enter the primary DNS server IP address for the AMG1302 AMG1202 Server TSeries Secondary Enter the secondary DNS server IP address for the AMG1302 AMG1202 DNS Server TSeries Back Click this to return to the previous screen without saving Apply Click this to save your changes Exit Click this to close the wizard screen without saving AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 3 Internet Wireless Setup Wizard Figure 12 Internet Connection with PPPoE Quick Start E Encapsulation User Name Password Multiplex VPI VCI 9 Yes No IP Address Internet Configuration STEP 1 The current connection type is setto PPPoE and needs a user name and password to get online Is there specific IP address information from your Internet Service Provider ISP Primary DNS Server Secondary DNS Server PPPoE x admin uc e 0 Range 0 255 33 Range 32 65535 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Back Next Close The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 6 Internet Connection with PPPoE LABEL DESCRIPTION User Name Enter the user name exactly as your ISP assigned If assigned a name in the form user domain where domain identifies a service name then enter both c
228. ind message to any available server S2 For an IA TA the client may send a Renew or Rebind message at the client s discretion T2 Tl OF l I Re Ren Re I Rood P d Loud pod i eee o S2 ew Renew bec Peking ee oed to S l toS DHCP Relay Agent A DHCP relay agent is on the same network as the DHCP clients and helps forward messages between the DHCP server and clients When a client cannot use its link local address and a well known multicast address to locate a DHCP server on its network it then needs a DHCP relay agent to send a message to a DHCP server that is not attached to the same network The DHCP relay agent can add the remote identification remote ID option and the interface ID option to the Relay Forward DHCPv6 messages The remote ID option carries a user defined string 3 n IPv6 all network interfaces can be associated with several addresses AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Appendix E IPv6 such as the system name The interface ID option provides slot number port information and the VLAN ID to the DHCPv6 server The remote ID option if any is stripped from the Relay Reply messages before the relay agent sends the packets to the clients The DHCP server copies the interface ID option from the Relay Forward message into the Relay Reply message and sends it to the relay agent The interface ID should not change even after the relay agent restarts Prefix Delegation Prefix delegation
229. inentes de la directive 1999 5 EC Italian Con la presente ZyXEL dichiara che questo attrezzatura conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999 5 CE Latvian Ar So ZyXEL deklare ka iekartas atbilst Direktivas 1999 5 EK b tiskajam prasibam un citiem ar to saistitajiem noteikumiem Lithuanian Siuo ZyXEL deklaruoja kad Sis jranga atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999 5 EB Direktyvos nuostatas Dutch Hierbij verklaart ZyXEL dat het toestel uitrusting in overeenstemming is met de essenti le eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999 5 EC Maltese Hawnhekk ZyXEL jiddikjara li dan taghmir jikkonforma mal htigijiet essenzjali u ma provvedimenti ohrajn relevanti li hemm fid Dirrettiva 1999 5 EC Hungarian Alul rott ZyXEL nyilatkozom hogy a berendez s megfelel a vonatkoz alapvet k vetelm nyeknek s az 1999 5 EK ir nyelv egy b el r sainak Polish Niniejszym ZyXEL o wiadcza ze sprz t jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozosta ymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999 5 EC Portuguese ZyXEL declara que este equipamento est conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposi es da Directiva 1999 5 EC Slovenian ZyXEL izjavlja da je ta oprema v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi dolo ili direktive 1999 5 EC Slovak ZyXEL t mto vyhlasuje e zariadenia sp a z kladn po iadavky a v etky pr
230. information to help you identify problems with the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries 26 1 1 What You Can Do in the Diagnostic Screens e Use the Ping screen Section 26 2 on page 235 to ping an IP address e Use the DSL Line screen Section 26 3 on page 236 to view the DSL line statistics and reset the ADSL line 26 2 The General Screen Use this screen to ping an IP address Click Maintenance Diagnostic Ping to open the screen shown next Figure 125 Maintenance gt Diagnostic gt Ping This area is read only Ping PingV6 Tracerouteve Traceroutev4 The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 92 Maintenance gt Diagnostic gt Ping LABEL DESCRIPTION Type the IP address of a computer that you want to ping in order to test a connection Ping Click this to ping the IP address that you entered PingV6 Click this to ping the IPv6 address that you entered TracerouteV6 Click this to display the route path and transmission delays between the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries to the IPv6 address that you entered AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide 235 Chapter 26 Diagnostic 26 3 The DSL Line Screen Use this screen to view the DSL line statistics and reset the ADSL line Click Maintenance Diagnostic DSL Line to open the screen shown next Figure 126 Maintenance gt Diagnostic gt DSL Line This area is read only arm Status
231. information with one another A wireless networking device is just like a radio that lets your computer exchange information with radios attached to other computers Like walkie talkies most wireless networking devices operate at radio frequency bands that are open to the public and do not require a license to use However wireless networking is different from that of most traditional radio communications in that there a number of wireless networking standards available with different methods of data encryption Finding Out More See Section 7 10 on page 107 for advanced technical information on wireless networks 7 1 3 Before You Start Before you start using these screens ask yourself the following questions See Section 7 1 2 on page 92 if some of the terms used here are not familiar to you e What wireless standards do the other wireless devices in your network support IEEE 802 11g for example What is the most appropriate standard to use e What security options do the other wireless devices in your network support WPA PSK for example What is the strongest security option supported by all the devices in your network e Do the other wireless devices in your network support WPS Wi Fi Protected Setup If so you can set up a well secured network very easily Even if some of your devices support WPS and some do not you can use WPS to set up your network and then add the non WPS devices manually although this is somewhat more co
232. ing Wireless More AP SSID Security Modify NIA NIA Gg NIA NIA g N A N A g The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 20 Network Setting gt Wireless gt More AP LABEL DESCRIPTION This is the index number of each SSID profile Active This field indicates whether this SSID is active A yellow bulb signifies that this SSID is active A gray bulb signifies that this SSID is not active SSID An SSID profile is the set of parameters relating to one of the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries s BSSs The SSID Service Set IDentifier identifies the Service Set with which a wireless device is associated This field displays the name of the wireless profile on the network When a wireless client scans for an AP to associate with this is the name that is broadcast and seen in the wireless client utility Security This field indicates the security mode of the SSID profile Modify Click the Edit icon to configure the SSID profile 7 3 1 More AP Edit Use this screen to edit an SSID profile Click the Edit icon next to an SSID in the More AP screen The following screen displays AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Figure 32 More AP Edit Wireless Network Setup Wireless Wireless Network Setting Security Level Wireless Network Name SSID Enable Wireless LAN s C Hide SSID Client Isolation
233. ing gt NAT gt General screen For other WAN connections PVC1 PVC7 activate NAT for an individual WAN connection in the Broadband gt More Connections gt Edit screen Figure 68 Network Setting gt NAT gt Port Forwarding WAN Interface PVCO iv Active Service External External Interna IntermalEnd Server IP a Name Start Port End Port Start Port Port Address 1 User Define 656 566 666 666 192 168 1 34 NW B Note The TCP port 7547 is reserved for TRO69 connection request port The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 49 Network Setting gt NAT gt Port Forwarding LABEL DESCRIPTION WAN Interface Select a WAN connection for which you want to configure a port forwarding rule Add new rule Click this button to add a rule to the table below This is the rule index number read only Active Service Name This field indicates whether the rule is active or not Clear the check box to disable the rule Select the check box to enable it This is a service s name External Start Port This is the first port number of a port range that incoming service requests may use to access the service in your local network External End Port Internal Start Port Internal End Port This is the last port number of a port range that incoming service requests may use to access the service in your local network This is the starting port number
234. ing SUMING geris eR 163 Chapter 13 Dynami DNS SR 165 ERE E E E apts TN A Sette ENE E Pr RO Ue enr eas NOR ND dE 165 18 1 1 What You Gan Do in Wie DDNS Street 3 riaesa otio d dese ee tI anre ta Se Iud a OR ERE ERE 165 13 1 2 What You Nged To Know About DDNS isi bx PEDES ESPERE P Dn lee cile enge a 165 Taa The Dinamie E Eme toc NT IM 165 Chapter 14 ltir fW T 167 pDESU VS IM E IE 167 14 1 1 What You Can Do in the Filter Screens sesenta 167 14 1 2 What You Need to Know About FIRering auccsssviast erasicistkceeva ae aE ERU Yoda RE Hp A Yo QREC va Ata E EVO Rad ERES 167 T4 The IPSE ANE SSSI s sco e DES ODER ER PUE Y Ext adt a e ir o rb EE PE Ud RR RA 167 13 3 IPOEIEDSC DIEI Loisirs Ernest bias acia d Goku ertt daas ski kim aal urat A TA eiat i 170 Chapter 15 d 1 ec 173 DMO eR PHP CR ERE 173 15 1 1 What You Can Do in the Firewall Screens esses esee eene nnne 173 15 1 2 What You Need to Know About Firewall 2 riter rra ain rn rn dir Rene np annee add de nE 174 15 2 The Firewall Gens SOIBel 1 ec cat e E i peti e tose tended arrestee 175 15 3 The Default Action Seredi iia sioe nsink e coe un Exk no senses n ten RR haaa Na ER aun qu ep Ra ER Rae a uA UR jn 176 Wo The Puls GEI ouest i etos iUdri E NM taU oases ad uM e DS ped echan tp RE 1
235. ing is activated WiFi MAC This is the MAC Media Access Control of the WiFi interface Security Firewall This displays whether or not the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries s firewall is activated Click this to go to the screen where you can change it Interface Status Interface This column displays each interface the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries has Status This field indicates whether or not the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries is using the interface For the DSL interface this field displays Down line is down Up line is up or connected I nitializing line is initializing Establishing Link line is establishing a link if you re using Ethernet encapsulation and Down line is down Up line is up or connected Idle line ppp idle Dial starting to trigger a call and Drop dropping a call if you re using PPPoE encapsulation For the LAN interface this field displays Up when the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries is connected through an Ethernet cable to a computer or a HUB It displays Down when the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries s Ethernet port is disconnected For the WLAN interface it displays Active when WLAN is enabled or InActive when WLAN is disabled Rate For the LAN interface this displays the port speed For the WAN interface this displays the DSL link rate downstream and upstream For the DSL interface it displays the downstream and upstream transmission rate For the WLAN interface it displays the maximum transmissio
236. ings are invalid when disabled IP Address IP Subnet Mask The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 34 Network Setting gt Home Networking gt IP Alias LABEL DESCRIPTION IP Alias Select Enable to configure a LAN network for the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries IP Address Enter the IP address of your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries in dotted decimal notation IP Subnet Mask Your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries will automatically calculate the subnet mask based on the IP address that you assign Unless you are implementing subnetting use the subnet mask computed by the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries Apply Click this to save your changes Cancel Click this to restore your previously saved settings 8 6 The IPv6 LAN Setup Screen Use this screen to configure the IPv6 settings for your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries s LAN interface See Appendix E on page 295 for background information about IPv6 AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide 127 Chapter 8 Home Networking Figure 52 Network Setting gt Home Networking gt IPv6 LAN Setup IPv6 LAN Setup Link Local Address Type IPv6 Address Prefix MLD Snooping Lan Global Identifier Type Lan Identifier IPv6 ULA Address Type IPv6 ULA Address O Static Static IPv6 Address Prefix Prefix length Preferred Lifetime Valid Lifetime LAN IPv6 DNS Assign Setup DHCPv6 DHCPv6 Server DNSv6 Mode Primary DNS Secondary
237. ion of the AP s configuration interface See the device s User s Guide for how to do this Look for the client s WPS PIN it will be displayed either on the device or in the WPS section of the client s configuration interface see the device s User s Guide for how to find the WPS PIN for the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries see Section 7 5 on page 101 Enter the client s PIN in the AP s configuration interface If the client device s configuration interface has an area for entering another device s PIN you can either enter the client s PIN in the AP or enter the AP s PIN in the client it does not matter which Start WPS on both devices within two minutes Use the configuration utility to activate WPS not the push button on the device itself On a computer connected to the wireless client try to connect to the Internet If you can connect WPS was successful If you cannot connect check the list of associated wireless clients in the AP s configuration utility If you see the wireless client in the list WPS was successful AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN The following figure shows a WPS enabled wireless client installed in a notebook computer connecting to the WPS enabled AP via the PIN method Figure 42 Example WPS Process PIN Method ENROLLEE REGISTRAR WITHIN 2 MINUTES SECURE EAP TUNNEL B auup 5 SSID WPA 2 PSK 7 COMMUNICATION NN j Se G 3 pst 7 10 8 3 How
238. irection Rule Type Source IP Address Subnet Mask Port Number Destination IP Address Subnet Mask Port Number Protocol IP MAC Filter Listing IP MAC Filter Rule Index No PVCO Incoming White List v oe epar 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 v O Yes 9 No PVCO v Incoming 0 0 0 0 means Dont care 0 0 means Dont care 0 0 0 0 means Dont care 0 0 0 0 0000 N A The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 58 Security gt Filter gt IP MAC Filter LABEL DESCRIPTION Rule Type Rule Type selection Select White List to specify traffic to allow and Black List to specify traffic to disallow IP MAC Filter Rule Editing IP MAC Filter Rule Index Select the index number of the filter rule Active Use this field to enable or disable the filter rule Interface Select the PVC to which to apply the filter Direction Apply the filter to Incoming or Outgoing traffic direction Rule Type Select IP or MAC type to configure the rule Use the IP Filter to block or allow traffic by IP addresses Use the MAC Filter to block or allow traffic by MAC address Source IP Address Enter the source IP address of the packets you wish to filter This field is ignored if it is 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask Port Number Destination IP Address Enter the IP subnet mask for the source IP address Enter the source port of the packets that you wish to filter Th
239. ireless devices to figure out the original information pretty quickly When you select WPA2 or WPA2 PSK in your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries you can also select an option WPA compatible to support WPA as well In this case if some of the devices support WPA and some support WPA2 you should set up WPA2 PSK or WPA2 depending on the type of wireless network login and select the WPA compatible option in the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries Many types of encryption use a key to protect the information in the wireless network The longer the key the stronger the encryption Every device in the wireless network must have the same key 7 10 4 Signal Problems Because wireless networks are radio networks their signals are subject to limitations of distance interference and absorption Problems with distance occur when the two radios are too far apart Problems with interference occur when other radio waves interrupt the data signal Interference may come from other radio transmissions such as military or air traffic control communications or from machines that are coincidental emitters such as electric motors or microwaves Problems with absorption occur when physical objects such as thick walls are between the two radios muffling the signal AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide EN Chapter 7 Wireless LAN 7 10 5 BSS A Basic Service Set BSS exists when all communications between wireless stations or between a wireless station and a wired n
240. is currently using When you are using 80 or less of the storage space the bar is green When the amount of space used is over 80 the bar is red Use the drop down list box to select a direction of travel of packets for which you want to configure firewall rules Create a new rule after rule number Select an index number and click Add to add a new firewall rule after the selected index number For example if you select 6 your new rule becomes number 7 and the previous rule 7 if there is one becomes rule 8 The following read only fields summarize the rules you have created that apply to traffic traveling in the selected packet direction The firewall rules that you configure summarized below take priority over the general firewall action settings in the General screen This is your firewall rule number The ordering of your rules is important as rules are applied in turn Active This field displays whether a firewall is turned on or not Select the check box to enable the rule Clear the check box to disable the rule Source IP Address This column displays the source addresses or ranges of addresses to which this firewall rule applies Please note that a blank source or destination address is equivalent to Any Destination IP Address This column displays the destination addresses or ranges of addresses to which this firewall rule applies Please note that a blank source or destination address is equ
241. is makes it appear as if the host computer sent the packets to itself making the system unavailable while the target system tries to respond to itself Ping of Death Ping of Death uses a ping utility to create and send an IP packet that exceeds the maximum 65 536 bytes of data allowed by the IP specification This may cause systems to crash hang or reboot SPI Stateful Packet Inspection SPI tracks each connection crossing the firewall and makes sure it is valid Filtering decisions are based not only on rules but also context For example traffic from the WAN may only be allowed to cross the firewall in response to a request from the LAN RFC 4890 SPEC Traffic RFC 4890 specifies the filtering policies for ICMPv6 messages This is important for protecting against security threats including DoS probing redirection attacks and renumbering attacks that can be carried out through ICMPv6 Since ICMPv6 error messages are critical for establishing and maintaining communications filtering policy focuses on ICMPv6 informational messages AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 15 Firewall Anti Probing If an outside user attempts to probe an unsupported port on your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries an ICMP response packet is automatically returned This allows the outside user to know the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries exists The AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries supports anti probing which prevents the ICMP response packet from being sent This k
242. is often used for diagnostic purposes ICQ UDP 4000 This is a popular Internet chat program IGMP MULTICAST User Defined 2 Internet Group Multicast Protocol is used when sending packets to a specific group of hosts IKE UDP 500 The Internet Key Exchange algorithm is used for key distribution and management IMAP4 TCP 143 The Internet Message Access Protocol is used for e mail IMAP4S TCP 993 This is a more secure version of IMAP4 that runs over SSL IRC TCP UDP 6667 This is another popular Internet chat program MSN Messenger TCP 1863 Microsoft Networks messenger service uses this protocol NetBIOS TCP UDP 137 The Network Basic Input Output System is used for communication between TCP UDP 138 computers in a LAN TCP UDP 139 TCP UDP 445 AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Appendix F Services Table 112 Examples of Services continued NAME PROTOCOL PORT S DESCRIPTION NEW ICQ TCP 5190 An Internet chat program NEWS TCP 144 A protocol for news groups NFS UDP 2049 Network File System NFS is a client server distributed file service that provides transparent file sharing for network environments NNTP TCP 119 Network News Transport Protocol is the delivery mechanism for the USENET newsgroup service PING User Defined 1 Packet INternet Groper is a protocol that sends out ICMP echo requests to test whether or not a remote ho
243. isplay less fields in this screen 6 2 1 Advanced Setup Use this screen to edit your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries s advanced WAN settings Click the Advanced Setup button in the Internet Connection screen The screen appears as shown Figure 21 Network Setting Broadband Internet Connection Advanced Setup RIP Direction RIP Version Multicast MLD Proxy ATM QoS ATM QoS Type Peak Cell Rate Sustain Cell Rate Maximum Burst Size PPPoE Passthrough MTU MTU RIP amp Multicast Setup None v RIP1 v None v None w UBR With PCR v 0 cell sec 0 cell sec 0 cell No v 1492 Apply Cancel Advanced Setup AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide 79 Chapter 6 Broadband The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 12 Network Setting gt Broadband gt Internet Connection Advanced Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION RIP Direction RIP Routing Information Protocol allows a router to exchange routing information with other routers Use this field to control how much routing information the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries sends and receives on the subnet Select the RIP direction from None Both In Only and Out Only RIP Version This field is not configurable if you select None in the RIP Direction field Select the RIP version from RIP 1 RIP2 B and RIP2 M Multicast Multicast packets are sent to a group of computers on the LAN and are an alternative to un
244. ivalent to Any Service This column displays the services to which this firewall rule applies See Appendix F on page 305 for more information Action This field displays whether the firewall silently discards packets Drop discards packets and sends a TCP reset packet or an ICMP destination unreachable message to the sender Reject or allows the passage of packets Permit Source Interface This column displays the source interface to which this firewall rule applies This is the interface through which the traffic entered the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries Please note that a blank source interface is equivalent to Any AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 15 Firewall Table 62 Security gt Firewall gt Rules LABEL DESCRIPTION Destination Interface This column displays the destination interface to which this firewall rule applies This is the interface through which the traffic is destined to leave the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries Please note that a blank source interface is equivalent to Any Modify Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the rule Click the Remove icon to delete an existing firewall rule A window displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete the firewall rule Note that subsequent firewall rules move up by one when you take this action Apply Click this to save your changes Cancel Click this to restore your previously saved set
245. ket Threshold UDP Packet Count 5000 Isec ICMP Echo Request Threshold ICMP Echo Request Count 5 sec Others ICMP Redirect Enable Disable DoS Log Log Level DEBUG Enable 9 Disable Cancel AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 15 Firewall The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 67 Security Firewall DoS Advanced LABEL DESCRIPTION TCP SYN Request This is the rate of new TCP half open sessions per second that causes the firewall to Count start deleting half open sessions When the rate of new connection attempts rises above this number the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries deletes half open sessions as required to accommodate new connection attempts UDP Packet Count This is the rate of new UDP half open sessions per second that causes the firewall to start deleting half open sessions When the rate of new connection attempts rises above this number the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries deletes half open sessions as required to accommodate new connection attempts ICMP Echo Request This is the rate of new ICMP Echo Request half open sessions per second that causes Count the firewall to start deleting half open sessions When the rate of new connection attempts rises above this number the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries deletes half open sessions as required to accommodate new connection attempts Back Click this button to return to the previous screen Apply Cli
246. l or otherwise without the prior written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation Published by ZyXEL Communications Corporation All rights reserved Disclaimer ZyXEL does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products or software described herein Neither does it convey any license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others ZyXEL further reserves the right to make changes in any products described herein without notice This publication is subject to change without notice Trademarks ZyNOS ZyXEL Network Operating System is a registered trademark of ZyXEL Communications Inc Other trademarks mentioned in this publication are used for identification purposes only and may be properties of their respective owners Certifications A amp ovN Federal Communications Commission FCC Interference Statement The device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions This device may not cause harmful interference This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operations This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This device generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not
247. lable only when WPA2 PSK WPA PSKWPA2 PSK or No Security mode is configured 9 Enable Disable settings are invalid when disabled 1 PBC li Method 2 PIN button WPS Step 1 Enter the PIN of your new wireless client device and then click Register Step 2 Press the WPS button on your new wireless client device within 120 seconds 08186324 Generate New PIN Unconfigured Unlocked 802 11b g n ZyXEL_7DC8 WPA PSKWPA2 PSK 4Wx4WUSEHER3E it will turned on UPnP service automatically The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 23 Network Setting Wireless WPS LABEL DESCRIPTION General WPS Select Enable to activate WPS on the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries Otherwise select Disable to deactivate WPS Add a new device w ith WPS Method Method 1 PBC Use this section to set up a WPS wireless network using Push Button Configuration PBC WPS Click this button to add another WPS enabled wireless device within wireless range of the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries to your wireless network This button may either be a physical button on the outside of device or a menu button similar to the WPS button on this screen Note You must press the other wireless device s WPS button within two minutes of pressing this button Method 2 PIN Use this section to set up a WPS wireless network by entering the PIN of the client into the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries AMG1302 AMG1
248. led wireless client A and B can access the wired network and communicate with each other When Intra BSS is disabled wireless client A and B can still access the wired network but cannot communicate with each other AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs ESS Figure 173 Basic Service Set BSS TT B uuuuuuo An Extended Service Set ESS consists of a series of overlapping BSSs each containing an access point with each access point connected together by a wired network This wired connection between APs is called a Distribution System DS This type of wireless LAN topology is called an Infrastructure WLAN The Access Points not only provide communication with the wired network but also mediate wireless network traffic in the immediate neighborhood An ESSID ESS IDentification uniquely identifies each ESS All access points and their associated wireless clients within the same ESS must have the same ESSID in order to communicate AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs Figure 174 Infrastructure WLAN Ethernet Channel A channel is the radio frequency ies used by wireless devices to transmit and receive data Channels available depend on your geographical area You may have a choice of channels for your region so you should use a channel different from an adjacent AP access point to reduce interference Interference
249. lients exchange DHCP messages using UDP Each DHCP client and server has a unique DHCP Unique IDentifier DUID which is used for identification when they are exchanging DHCPv6 messages The DUID is generated from the MAC address time vendor assigned ID and or the vendor s private enterprise number registered with the IANA It should not change over time even after you reboot the device Identity Association An Identity Association IA is a collection of addresses assigned to a DHCP client through which the server and client can manage a set of related IP addresses Each IA must be associated with exactly one interface The DHCP client uses the IA assigned to an interface to obtain configuration from a DHCP server for that interface Each IA consists of a unique IAID and associated IP information The IA type is the type of address in the IA Each IA holds one type of address IA NA means an identity association for non temporary addresses and IA TA is an identity association for temporary addresses An IA NA option contains the T1 and T2 fields but an IA TA option does not The DHCPv6 server uses T1 and T2 to control the time at which the client contacts with the server to extend the lifetimes on any addresses in the IA NA before the lifetimes expire After T1 the client sends the server S1 from which the addresses in the IA NA were obtained a Renew message If the time T2 is reached and the server does not respond the client sends a Reb
250. ll To configure variable bandwidth of 2 Mbps for MOD data connection select Realtime VBR in the ATM QoS Type field Set the Peak Cell Rate as 4717 divide the bandwidth 2mbps by 424 and set both the Sustain Cell Rate and Maximum Burst Size as 4716 which is less than the peak cell rate Click Apply to save the settings AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 4 Tutorials RIP amp Multicast Setup RIP Direction None bal RIP Version RIP1 v Multicast None v MLD Proxy None v ATM QoS ATM QoS Type Realtime VBR Peak Cell Rate 4717 cell sec Sustain Cell Rate 4716 cell sec Maximum Burst Size 4716 cell PPPoE Passthrough No v MTU MTU 1492 apply Cancel Advanced setup Configured WAN connections can be viewed by clicking the More Connections tab under Network Setting Broadband See the WAN Setup chapter Chapter 6 on page 73 for more information on configuring WAN connections and ATM QoS settings 4 9 2 Configuring Port Binding You can then group specific WAN PVCs with LAN ports or WLANs so traffic from these ports is forwarded through specific WAN PVCs In the configuration shown below the WAN connections set up in the previous section are bound as follows Table 9 Port Binding Groups GROUP INDEX WAN CONNECTION LAN PORT 0 PVCO for Data eth1 eth2 APO 1 PVC1 for VoIP eth3 2 PVC2 for MOD eth4 1 Access the port binding screen by
251. llows you to visualize the shape of the antenna s coverage area Antenna Gain Antenna gain measured in dB decibel is the increase in coverage within the RF beam width Higher antenna gain improves the range of the signal for better communications For an indoor site each 1 dB increase in antenna gain results in a range increase of approximately 2 5 For an unobstructed outdoor site each 1dB increase in gain results in a range increase of approximately 5 Actual results may vary depending on the network environment Antenna gain is sometimes specified in dBi which is how much the antenna increases the signal power compared to using an isotropic antenna An isotropic antenna is a theoretical perfect antenna that sends out radio signals equally well in all directions dBi represents the true gain that the antenna provides Types of Antennas for WLAN There are two types of antennas used for wireless LAN applications e Omni directional antennas send the RF signal out in all directions on a horizontal plane The coverage area is torus shaped like a donut which makes these antennas ideal for a room environment With a wide coverage area it is possible to make circular overlapping coverage areas with multiple access points e Directional antennas concentrate the RF signal in a beam like a flashlight does with the light from its bulb The angle of the beam determines the width of the coverage pattern Angles typically range from 20 degre
252. long term that can be transmitted Type the SCR which must be less than the PCR Note that system default is O cells sec Maximum Burst Size Maximum Burst Size MBS refers to the maximum number of cells that can be sent at the peak rate Type the MBS which is less than 65535 PPPoE Passthrough If encapsulation type is PPPoE select this to enable PPPoE Passthrough In addition to the Device s built in PPPoE client you can select this to allow hosts on the LAN to use PPPoE client software on their computers to connect to the ISP via the device Each host can have a separate account and a public WAN IP address MTU MTU The Maximum Transmission Unit MTU defines the size of the largest packet allowed on an interface or connection Enter the MTU in this field For ENET ENCAP the MTU value is 1500 For PPPoE the MTU value is 1492 For PPPoA and RFC 1483 the MTU is 65535 AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 6 Broadband 6 3 The More Connections Screen The AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries allows you to configure more than one Internet access connection To configure additional Internet access connections click Network Setting Broadband More Connections The screen differs by the encapsulation you select When you use the Broadband Internet Connection screen to set up Internet access you are configuring the first WAN connection Figure 22 Network Setting Broadband More Conn
253. ltering them and resending them The MIC provides a strong mathematical function in which the receiver and the transmitter each compute and then compare the MIC If they do not match it is assumed that the data has been tampered with and the packet is dropped By generating unique data encryption keys for every data packet and by creating an integrity checking mechanism MIC with TKIP and AES it is more difficult to decrypt data on a Wi Fi network than WEP and difficult for an intruder to break into the network The encryption mechanisms used for WPA 2 and WPA 2 PSK are the same The only difference between the two is that WPA 2 PSK uses a simple common password instead of user specific credentials The common password approach makes WPA 2 PSK susceptible to brute force password guessing attacks but it s still an improvement over WEP as it employs a consistent single alphanumeric password to derive a PMK which is used to generate unique temporal encryption keys This prevent all wireless devices sharing the same encryption keys a weakness of WEP User Authentication WPA and WPA2 apply IEEE 802 1x and Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP to authenticate wireless clients using an external RADIUS database WPA2 reduces the number of key exchange messages from six to four CCMP 4 way handshake and shortens the time required to connect to a network Other WPA2 authentication features that are different from WPA include key caching and pre
254. lustrated using a 25 bit subnet mask to divide a 24 bit address into two subnets Similarly to divide a 24 bit address into four subnets you need to borrow two host ID bits to give four possible combinations 00 01 10 and 11 The subnet mask is 26 bits 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 or 255 255 255 192 Each subnet contains 6 host ID bits giving 29 2 or 62 hosts for each subnet a host ID of all zeroes is the subnet itself all ones is the subnet s broadcast address Table 98 Subnet 1 IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER LAST OCTET BIT VALUE IP Address Decimal 192 168 1 0 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 00000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 1 192 168 1 0 Broadcast Address Highest Host ID 192 168 1 62 192 168 1 63 AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting Example Table 99 Subnet 2 IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER LAST OCTET BIT VALUE IP Address 192 168 1 64 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 01000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 65 192 168 1 64 Broadcast Address Highest Host ID 192 168 1 126 192 168 1 127 Table 100 Subnet 3 IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER LAST OCTET BIT VALUE IP Address 192 168 1 128 IP Address Binary 1
255. ly when you set the 802 11 Mode to 802 11n or 802 11b g n in the Advanced Setup screen Apply Click this to save your changes Cancel Click this to restore your previously saved settings 7 10 Wireless LAN Technical Reference This section discusses wireless LANs in depth For more information see the appendix 7 10 1 Wireless Network Overview Wireless networks consist of wireless clients access points and bridges e A wireless client is a radio connected to a user s computer e An access point is a radio with a wired connection to a network which can connect with numerous wireless clients and let them access the network e A bridge is a radio that relays communications between access points and wireless clients extending a network s range Traditionally a wireless network operates in one of two ways AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide 107 Chapter 7 Wireless LAN e An infrastructure type of network has one or more access points and one or more wireless clients The wireless clients connect to the access points e An ad hoc type of network is one in which there is no access point Wireless clients connect to one another in order to exchange information The following figure provides an example of a wireless network Figure 39 Example of a Wireless Network The wireless network is the part in the blue circle In this wireless network devices A and B use the access point AP
256. mine whether particular specific types of interference or line attenuation exist Refer to the ITU T G 992 1 recommendation for more information on DMT The better or shorter the line the higher the number of bits transmitted for a DMT tone The maximum number of bits that can be transmitted per DMT tone is 15 There will be some tones without any bits as there has to be space between the upstream and downstream channels Reset ADSL Line Click this to reinitialize the ADSL line The large text box above then displays the progress and results of this operation for example Start to reset ADSL Loading ADSL modem F W Reset ADSL Line Successfully AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide 237 Chapter 26 Diagnostic AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide 27 Troubleshooting This chapter offers some suggestions to solve problems you might encounter The potential problems are divided into the following categories e Power Hardware Connections and LEDs e AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries Access and Login e Internet Access 27 1 Power Hardware Connections and LEDs The AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries does not turn on None of the LEDs turn on 1 Make sure the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries is turned on 2 Make sure you are using the power adaptor or cord included with the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries 3 Make sure the power adaptor or cord is connected to the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries and plugged in to an appropriate powe
257. motely access the ZyXEL Device The configuration and connection steps are similar for most SSH client programs Refer to your SSH client program user s guide 1 Enter the IP address and port number Select SSH AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 25 Remote Management x E f Host fat L1 Service C Telnet TCP port amp 22 SSH C Other r C Serial s Cale RN 2 A window displays prompting you to store the host key in your computer Click Yes to continue TeraTerm Security Alert E The server s host key is not cached in the registry You have no guarantee that the server is the computer you think it is The server s key fingerprint is ssh rsa 2048 28 99 c2 92 08 fb 5e de 4b 96 14 de 6 1 df ad 6d If you trust this host hit Yes to add the key to TeraTerm s cache and carry on connecting If you want to carry on connecting just once without adding the key to the cache hit No If you do not trust this host hit Cancel to abandon the connection No Cancel 3 Enter your user name and password SSH2 Authentication Challenge login as admin 1 1 1 1 s password 4 The command line interface displays Ii Tera Term Web 3 1 1 1 1 1 VT E Fie Edit Setup Web Control Window Help u AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 25 Remote Management AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Diagnostic 26 1 Overview These read only screens display
258. mplicated to do e What advanced options do you want to configure if any If you want to configure advanced options such as Quality of Service ensure that you know precisely what you want to do If you do not want to configure advanced options leave them as they are 7 2 The General Screen Use this screen to enable the Wireless LAN enter the SSID and select the wireless security mode Note If you are configuring the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries from a computer connected to the wireless LAN and you change the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries s SSID channel or security settings you will lose your wireless connection when you press Apply to confirm You must then change the wireless settings of your computer to match the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries s new settings Click Network Setting Wireless to open the General screen AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Figure 26 Network Setting gt Wireless gt General Wireless Network Setup Wireless Enable Wireless LAN Wireless Network Settings Wireless Network Name SSID ZyXEL 7DC8 O Hide SSID O Client Isolation C MBSSIDILAN Isolation Channel Selection Channel amp v Operating Channel 6 Security Level More Secure Recommended ll r Security Mode WPA2 PSK Enter 8 63 characters or 64 hexadecimal digits a f A F and 0 9 Pre Shared Key AWXAWUSEHER3E more The following table describes the labels in this sc
259. n PVCO PVC2 from which traffic is received Source IP Address Select the check box and enter the source IP address in dotted decimal notation A blank IP address means any source IP address Subnet Enter the source subnet mask if you select I Pv4 as the Ether Type Netmask uds Prefix Enter the source prefix length if you select I Pv6 as the Ether Type eng Port Range If you select TCP UDP TCP or UDP in the IP protocol field select the check box and enter the port number s of the source MAC Address Select the check box and enter the source MAC address of the packet Mac Netmask Type the mask for the specified MAC address to determine which bits a packet s MAC address should match Enter f for each bit of the specified source MAC address that the traffic s MAC address should match Enter 0 for the bit s of the matched traffic s MAC address which can be of any hexadecimal character s For example if you set the MAC address to 00 13 49 00 00 00 and the mask to ff ff ff 00 00 00 a packet with a MAC address of 00 13 49 12 34 56 matches this criteria Exclude Select this option to exclude the packets that match the specified criteria from this classifier Destination IP Address Select the check box and enter the source IP address in dotted decimal notation A blank IP address means any destination IP address Subnet Enter the destination subnet mask if you select I Pv4 as the Ether Type Netmask De
260. n S eaa raa EE inda E aai ca iae x Na aa dad do 96 PO MONOCAP OE M T T LE 98 251 MOIS dll 3 uu e psec P vun eB pe salads M Op M ak 98 ZA The MAC A lhentication SONO ut otet ie Spicil apt ase Ci ts tpe dU abet todaete ir iat ont La ter t tepit letus es 100 FE Vie aE IN TIE ODE EUER 101 Fa MI I Ric nel c RIT TEST S me 103 War hh NMM SOSON eee terete utente rud avid oa rere e peii up ded edi tied adn M MEME M tre ye 104 n8 heces SOIBIT ocio Deb prede R Me ap Vt A a ies andi RI MRNA 105 1 9 The Advanced MEINT SO SUUS 106 7 10 Wireless LAN Technical HelelOnOB 1uioetonsiciecasscsiecnc s enne imis ebat rece cmd DUE iia E eu aa E 107 710 1 Wireless Network OVEEVIBM iuis cease re ep hse a a PE S ER ER kon XXE D LEX BRE REX ERAS D 107 7 10 2 Addilonal Wireless Terme icuudsieereise wanna Tie EEE ddl pe Dn s PR Uii EAN 109 TAOS Wireless SU OS ac sce Dem 109 FEN Tells MRNA D D 111 VN eB ce RN UU NL EE 112 VEN dU roc p TN aa iA er ROPA 112 710 7 Wireless Distibution System WDS iisuuauceedeiberknabxxs det ne dndaa gi dtd aate dai das a Ded dendi 113 7 08 WiFi PRAISE Ric em 113 Chapter 8 Hom NebWorkiMNg soisissa aaa aE EE aAA 121 AEE US NIE EAEE NA AA E CAE ET T A TEE E 121 8 11 What You Can Do in the LAN SGOIGBITe cciccccccsccsccagccecessccseccsaasssansaasaadateecsiadesentecunagsedncdicacoeets 121 8 L2 What Tou Need TO KNOW ieri uel a e LAM AE ERAT A e e BR RR ad cad 121 8 1 2 BESIOIOG EOD ISO accosdtuszu isse pp eer cer ere tM E n c
261. n rate when WLAN is enabled or N A when WLAN is disabled System Status DSL Up Time This field displays how long the DSL connection has been active AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 5 Connection Status and System Info Screens LABEL DESCRIPTION System Up Time Current Date Time This field displays how long the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries has been running since it last started up The AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries starts up when you plug it in when you restart it Maintenance Reboot or when you reset it see Chapter 1 on page 19 This field displays the current date and time in the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries You can change this in Maintenance Time Setting System Resource CPU Usage This field displays what percentage of the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries s processing ability is currently used When this percentage is close to 10096 the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries is running at full load and the throughput is not going to improve anymore If you want some applications to have more throughput you should turn off other applications Memory Usage This field displays what percentage of the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries s memory is currently used Usually this percentage should not increase much If memory usage does get close to 10096 and remains like that for a high period of time the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries may become unstable and you should restart it See Chapter 24 on pag
262. n the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries This allows the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries to check MLD packets passing through it and learn the multicast group membership It helps reduce multicast traffic AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 8 Home Networking LABEL DESCRIPTION Lan Global Identifier Type Lan Identifier Select Manual to manually enter a LAN Identifier as the interface ID to identify the LAN interface The LAN Identifier is appended to the IPv6 address prefix to create the routable global IPv6 address Select EUI 64 to use the EUI 64 format to generate an interface ID from the Ethernet MAC address If you selected Manual enter the LAN Identifier in this field The LAN identifier should be unique and 64 bits in hexadecimal form Every 16 bit block should be separated by a colon as in XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX where X is a hexadecimal character Blocks of zeros can be represented with double colons as in XXXX XXXX XXXX LAN IPv6 Address Setting Delegate prefix from WAN Select this option to automatically obtain an IPv6 network prefix from the service provider or an uplink router Static Select this option to configure a fixed IPv6 address for the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries s LAN IPv6 address Static IPv6 Address Prefix If you select static IPv6 address enter the IPv6 address prefix that the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries uses for the LAN IPv6 address Prefix length If you select stati
263. nd DNS server address assigned by the ISP Server IPv6 Address Obtain an IP Address Select this option if you want to have the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries use the IPv6 Automatically prefix from the connected router s Router Advertisement RA to generate an IPv6 address DHCP IPv6 Select DHCP if you want to obtain an IPv6 address from a DHCPv6 server The IP address assigned by a DHCPv6 server has priority over the IP address automatically generated by the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries using the IPv6 prefix from an RA Select SLAAC Stateless address autoconfiguration to have the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries use the prefix to automatically generate a unique IP address that does not need to be maintained by a DHCP server Select Auto to have the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries indicate to hosts for IPv6 address generation depending on the M O Managed Other flag values in the router advertisements sending to hosts e If M flag is 1 the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries will indicate to hosts to obtain network settings such as WAN IP LAN prefix and DNS settings through DHCPv6 e If M flag is 0 the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries will check O flag e fO flag is 1 the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries will indicate to hosts to obtain DNS information and LAN prefix through DHCPv6 e If O flag is 0 the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries will not get information through DHCPv6 DHCP PD Select Enable to use DHCP PD Prefix Delegation to allow the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries to pass t
264. nd Port Start Port Server IP Internal End Port Address B note The TCP port 7547 is reserved for TRO69 connection request port 3 Configure the screen with the following values AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 4 Tutorials Service Name Select User Define Start End Ports Enter 666 as the Start and End port Server IP Address Enter the IP address of the Doom server 192 168 1 34 for this example The screen should look as follows Click Apply Add new rule C Active Service Name User Define x External Start Port External End Port Server IP Address Protocol AL w Open Start Port Open End Port 4 The port forwarding settings you configured appear in the table The AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries forwards port 666 traffic to the computer with IP address 192 168 1 34 PVCO v WAN Interface User Define 666 666 666 192 168 134 LJA B note The TCP port 7547 is reserved for TRO69 connection request port Players on the Internet then can have access to Thomas Doom server 4 7 Configuring Firewall Rules to Allow a Specified Service By default the firewall will block traffic originating from the WAN 1 However if you are running a server or other service you may need to allow access from the WAN 2 The following tutorial will show how to allow traffic from WAN to LAN if it matches a specified port number
265. ndix A Setting up Your Computer s IP Address e From the Configure box select Manually Type your IP address in the IP Address box e Type your subnet mask in the Subnet mask box e Type the IP address of your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries in the Router address box 5 Close the TCP IP Control Panel 6 Click Save if prompted to save changes to your configuration 7 Turn on your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries and restart your computer if prompted Verifying Settings Check your TCP IP properties in the TCP IP Control Panel window Macintosh OS X 1 Click the Apple menu and click System Preferences to open the System Preferences window Figure 148 Macintosh OS X Apple Menu E Grab File Edit Capt About This Mac Get Mac OS X Software System Preferences dock e Location 2 Click Network in the icon bar e Select Automatic from the Location list e Select Built in Ethernet from the Show list e Click the TCP IP tab 3 For dynamically assigned settings select Using DHCP from the Configure list AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Appendix A Setting up Your Computer s IP Address Figure 149 Macintosh OS X Network eo Network 4 mo g Show All Displays Network Startup Disk Location Automatic Show Built in Ethernet m AppleTalk Proxies Configure Using DHCP A Domain Name Servers Optional IP Address 192 168 11 12 168 95 1 1 Provided by DHCP Server Sub
266. nds SECURITY INFO nunmmmmmmmmmmmmmu COMMUNICATION E i4 PIN Configuration When you use the PIN configuration method you need to use both the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries s web config ur at or and the wireless client s utility 1 Launch your wireless client s configuration utility Go to the WPS settings and select the PIN method to get a PIN number 2 Enter the PIN number in the PIN section in the Network Setting gt Wireless gt WPS screen on the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 4 Tutorials General WPS Enable Disable settings are invalid when disabled Add a new device with WPS Method Method 1 PBC e Method 2 PIN Step 1 Click WPS button WPS Step 1 Enter the PIN TTTTTIETTWITNess client device and then click Register Step 2 Press the WPS button on your new wireless client devicewithin 120 seconds Step 2 Press the WPS button on your new wireless client device within 120 seconds 3 Click the Start and Register buttons or the button next to the PIN field on both the wireless client utility screen and the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries s WPS screen within two minutes The AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries authenticates the wireless client and sends the proper configuration settings to the wireless client This may take up to two minutes The wireless client is then able to communicate with the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries securel
267. ne when you take this action 10 4 1 Class Setup Add Edit Click Add new Classifier in the Network Setting gt QoS gt Class Setup screen or click the Edit icon next to a class the screen appears as shown next AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide LE Chapter 10 Quality of Service QoS Figure 64 QoS gt Class Setup Add Edit Add new Classifier x Rule Index Class Configuration Criteria Configuration Basic From Interface IP Precedence Mark C Active Ether Type IPv4 x0800 v Interface FromLAN To Queue g Use the configurations below to specify the characteristics of a data flow need to be managed by this QoS rule Orani Oane Oana Oars Orao Orai Oraz ra3 Type Of Service Mark hange DSCP Mark 0 63 Unchange v 802 10 Tag Same v Ethernet Priority VLAN ID _ tvalue Range 1 4094 Source C IP Address j IP Subnet Mask Exclude Port Range Exclude C MAC Address MAC Mask Exclude Destination C IP Address EE IP Subnet Mask Exclude Port Range Exclude L1 MAC Address MAC Mask Exclude Others O Senice v C IP Protocol Exclude TCP ACK Exclude C DHCP E Exclude C Packet Length L Exclude C IPP DS Field IPP TOS DSCP IP Precedence Range Exclude Type of Service Exclude DSCP Range 0 63 Exclu
268. net mask of 255 255 255 255 in the subnet mask field to force the network number to be identical to the host ID IP Subnet Mask Enter the IP subnet mask here Gateway IP Enter the IP address of the gateway The gateway is a router or switch on the same Address network segment as the device s LAN or WAN port The gateway helps forward packets to their destinations Metric Enter the number of transmission hops routers that need to cross from the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries to the destination OK Click this to save your changes Cancel Click this to restore your previously saved settings 9 3 IPv6 Static Route Use this screen to view the IPv6 static route rules Click Network Setting gt Static Route gt I Pv6 Static Route to open the I Pv6 Static Route screen Figure 57 Network Setting gt Static Route gt IPv6 Static Route Add New Static Route 3 Destination IP Prefix length Gateway Device od The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 38 Network Setting gt Static Route gt IPv6 Static Route LABEL DESCRIPTION Add new static route Click this to configure a new IPv6 static route This is the number of an individual static route AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide 137 Chapter 9 Static Route Table 38 Network Setting Static Route IPv6 Static Route LABEL DESCRIPTION Destination This parameter spec
269. net Mask 255 255 254 0 Router 192 168 10 11 Search Domains Optional DHCP Client ID Optional Example apple com earthlink net Ethernet Address 00 05 02 43 93 ff Click the lock to prevent further changes 4 For statically assigned settings do the following e From the Configure box select Manually e Type your IP address in the IP Address box e Type your subnet mask in the Subnet mask box e Type the IP address of your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries in the Router address box 5 Click Apply Now and close the window 6 Turn on your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries and restart your computer if prompted Verifying Settings Check your TCP IP properties in the Network window Linux This section shows you how to configure your computer s TCP IP settings in Red Hat Linux 9 0 Procedure screens and file location may vary depending on your Linux distribution and release version Note Make sure you are logged in as the root administrator AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Appendix A Setting up Your Computer s IP Address Using the K Desktop Environment KDE Follow the steps below to configure your computer IP address using the KDE 1 Click the Red Hat button located on the bottom left corner select System Setting and click Network Figure 150 Red Hat 9 0 KDE Network Configuration Devices Network Configuration File Profile Help f 5g x New Edit Copy Delete Activate Deactivate
270. networks Introduction to IP Addresses One part of the IP address is the network number and the other part is the host ID In the same way that houses on a street share a common street name the hosts on a network share a common network number Similarly as each house has its own house number each host on the network has its own unique identifying number the host ID Routers use the network number to send packets to the correct network while the host ID determines to which host on the network the packets are delivered Structure An IP address is made up of four parts written in dotted decimal notation for example 192 168 1 1 Each of these four parts is known as an octet An octet is an eight digit binary number for example 11000000 which is 192 in decimal notation Therefore each octet has a possible range of 00000000 to 11111111 in binary or O to 255 in decimal The following figure shows an example IP address in which the first three octets 192 168 1 are the network number and the fourth octet 16 is the host ID AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting Figure 159 Network Number and Host ID 192 168 1 16 4 e um um SSS eT TT o m m m m m m m m uu UO How much of the IP address is the network number and how much is the host ID varies according to the subnet mask Subnet Masks A subnet mask is used to determine which bits are part of th
271. ng 4 3 IPv6 Address Configuration If the ISP s network supports IPv6 the ISP may assign an IPv6 address to the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries automatically AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 4 Tutorials In the Network Setting gt Broadband screen s IPv6 Address configuration section select Obtain an IP Address Automatically In the DHCP IPv6 field select DHCP to obtain an IPv6 address from a DHCPv6 server In the DHCP PD field select Enable to have the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries pass the WAN prefix to LAN hosts The LAN hosts can then use the prefix to generate their IPv6 addresses IPv6 Address Obtain an IP Address Automatically Static IP Address DHCP IPv6 DHCP O SLAAC O Auto WAN Identifier Type Manual EUI64 WAN Identifier 4 4 Setting Up a Secure Wireless Network Thomas wants to set up a wireless network so that he can use his notebook to access the Internet In this wireless network the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries serves as an access point AP and the notebook is the wireless client The wireless client can access the Internet through the AP Thomas has to configure the wireless network settings on the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries Then he can set up a wireless network using WPS Section 4 4 2 on page 41 or manual configuration Section 4 4 3 on page 45 4 4 1 Configuring the Wireless Network Settings This example uses the following parameters to set up a wireless network In
272. nt Date Time Current Time Manual Current Date Time Current Time Time Zone Setup Time Zone Cl Daylight Savings Start Date End Date Time and Date Setup Get from Time Server Time Server Address 1 Time Server Address 2 01 Jan 2010 22 25 38 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 GMT 02 00 Athens Helsinki Istanbul Cairo Eastern Europe Israel v of at o clock of at o clock The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 82 Maintenance gt System gt Time LABEL DESCRIPTION Current Date Time Current Time Time and Date Setup This field displays the time and date of your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries Each time you reload this page the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries synchronizes the time and date with the time server Manual Current Date Time Select this radio button to enter the time and date manually If you configure a new time and date Time Zone and Daylight Saving at the same time the new time and date you entered has priority and the Time Zone and Daylight Saving settings do not affect it This field displays the last updated time in hh mm ss format from the time server or the last time configured manually When you set Time and Date Setup to Manual enter the new time in this field and then click Apply Current Time This field displays the last updated date in yyyy mm dd format from the time server or the last date configured manually When you set Time and
273. nt types of traffic The port binding feature is used to group each WAN connection with specific LAN ports and WLANs In this example ATM QoS settings are configured for a WAN PVC for time sensitive Media On Demand MOD traffic ATM QoS settings are also configured for another WAN PVC for non time sensitive data traffic 4 9 1 Configuring ATM QoS for Multiple WAN Connections This example shows an application for multiple WAN connections with different ATM QoS Settings More than one WAN connection on the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries may be configured to record traffic statistics or calculate service charges Three WAN connections are configured over the ADSL line e The connection with VPI VCI 0 33 is dedicated for general data transmission e The connection with VPI VCI 0 34 is dedicated for VoIP service e The connection with VPI VCI 0 35 is dedicated for Media On Demand MOD service To configure bandwidth for the WAN connections access the WAN configuration Advanced Setup screen by clicking Network Setting Broadband Click Advanced Setup AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide 55 Chapter 4 Tutorials Line ADSL Mode General Mode Encapsulation User Name Password Service Name Multiplex IPv6 IPv4 Dual Stack PPP Authentication Virtual Circuit ID VPI VCI IP Address Obtain an IP Address Automatically O Static IP Address IP Address DNS Server Primary DNS Secondary DNS IPv6 Address O
274. ny of the following methods to manage the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries Web Configurator This is recommended for everyday management of the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries using a supported web browser Command Line Interface Line commands are mostly used for troubleshooting by service engineers FTP for firmware upgrades and configuration backup restore TR 069 This is an auto configuration server used to remotely configure your device 1 3 Good Habits for Managing the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries Do the following things regularly to make the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries more secure and to manage the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries more effectively Change the password Use a password that s not easy to guess and that consists of different types of characters such as numbers and letters Write down the password and put it in a safe place Back up the configuration and make sure you know how to restore it Restoring an earlier working configuration may be useful if the device becomes unstable or even crashes If you forget your password you will have to reset the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries to its factory default settings If you backed up an earlier configuration file you would not have to totally re configure the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries You could simply restore your last configuration AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide 15 Chapter 1 Introduction 1 4 Applications for the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries Here are some example uses for which the AMG
275. o utilizzabile in tutte i paesi EU ed in tutti gli altri paesi che seguono le direttive EU 1999 5 EC senza nessuna limitazione eccetto per i paesii menzionati di seguito Das Produkt kann in allen EU Staaten ohne Einschr nkungen eingesetzt werden sowie in anderen Staaten die der EU Direktive 1995 5 CE folgen mit AuBnahme der folgenden aufgef hrten Staaten In the majority of the EU and other European countries the 2 4 and 5 GHz bands have been made available for the use of wireless local area networks LANs Later in this document you will find an overview of countries inwhich additional restrictions or requirements or both are applicable The requirements for any country may evolve ZyXEL recommends that you check with the local authorities for the latest status of their national regulations for both the 2 4 and 5 GHz wireless LANs AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Appendix G Legal Information The following countries have restrictions and or requirements in addition to those given in the table labeled Overview of Regulatory Requirements for Wireless LANs Overview of Regulatory Requirements for Wireless LANs Frequency Band MHz Max Power Level Indoor ONLY Indoor and Outdoor EIRP 2 mW 2400 2483 5 100 V 5150 5350 200 V 5470 5725 1000 V Belgium The Belgian Institute for Postal Services and Telecommunications BIPT must be notified of any outdoor wireless link having a range excee
276. o iae d a ad Mer mae Dee eM STE Peu ER ESSA 137 HT NPWS Stans Heute fe cnstesxidoe nested tQ iid en EE HO ERR tes pP M DI eee aes 138 Chapter 10 RT VE Ec ed editrice D n 139 RS LU CN TR E UR dened otal 139 10 1 1 What You Can Do in the QoS Screens ssssssssssssssessesee eene ne nennt n rnnr nissan 139 10 12 What vou Mesed do Know ADOULOQOS cisci ipee ecc tpi eae pp aA a EEE 140 16 2 The Quality of Service General SOCIGBIT iiu sett mtn na t Rn e nd e ERR E xS Ras 140 10 9 The Guolo aces DET T t o 0S OU DUET 141 10 3 Adding a QOS CHOUB uisi cst aces docto dte vetet inu oboe tec im ics cb tee tae Perse batis dedu 142 10 4 The Class SELLE SOREN orrira ieoa D acti d Ead x eee aD Uk E RO esf ED a d RS 143 i wERL OR n A00 EOI pet eT 143 TOS Tho QoS Game Lit SO aes oss eaten oed ER aon Un ERE VU EDN 147 TOG Oe Technical RECE 222ssusaxtocisk eit nisu race ee Dc eai e aco nd dU Edu Dess na dap d ken cw anus 148 TESTE E DOR fs aces a nier aces ey repr a dieta da torte ape e ous ene eo e ta EE 148 10 52 IP PEBBEUISUDB cuis etii eer ip prr RMEE xtA A A 148 10 6 3 Automate Priority Queue AssIORITIBHE eese onis porat Bet utu a doEE sedi epe Eee pex SBEE E Pe vedabin ut I MES 149 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation NAT neret teaser ri rbu cran ykp ue n rS a ex R I vadisi 151 puse uo s ee a T T D TT 151 11 1 1 What You Can Do in the NAT Screens cccccccccccccccecescsesseeaeceeececeeecesesesseessseaae
277. o the Internet If you use the encapsulation type except RFC 1483 select Obtain an IP Address Automatically when you have a dynamic IP address otherwise select Static IP Address and type your ISP assigned IP address in the IP Address field below If you use RFC 1483 enter the IP address given by your ISP in the IP Address field Subnet Mask Enter a subnet mask in dotted decimal notation Gateway IP Specify a gateway IP address supplied by your ISP Address Primary DNS Enter the primary DNS server s address for the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries PREORMALY Enter the secondary DNS server s address for the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries NAT SUA Only is available only when you select Router in the Mode field Select SUA Only if you have one public IP address and want to use NAT Otherwise select None to disable NAT Apply Click this to save your changes Cancel Click this to return to the previous screen without saving Advanced Setup Click this to display more fields in this screen to configure more details of your WAN settings AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 6 Broadband 6 3 2 Configuring More Connections Advanced Setup Use this screen to edit your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries s advanced WAN settings Click the Advanced Setup arrow icon in the More Connections Edit screen The screen appears as shown Figure 24 Network Setting gt Broadband gt More Connections Edit Advanced Setup
278. ob ern eter ert rerrtrrn E En RU E rece ser EDEN dS 123 8 2 MELAN SEU SCION serinin eeann bt se vum lcs eu iR e cte inte dac stance AEEA 123 AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Table of Contents 83 Ihesus DUE IHSBE a ipi Y prt ii ptc EIS OY oa Eb o PO point oa CE RP E a US E E 125 go TEMPE CUBE e tc det otto dian Sasha AEE D ddan h Sadan E Euer ttu bau Exuasp LR A DOR ES 126 so Ties TP ARS DOGEN eee desires ects cate uiee nade e ani cuss tes adeh Sardanadebbbauuntertcarceneets 126 8 5 1 Configuring the LAN IP Alias Screen i2 ide a tbv xen S bt d eda ibd e ansaid 127 EB Tie IP LAM SER SOOT 2acuetenuiduti vehi methesed NENTE 127 9 7 Home Networking Technical PIaIOCgliga usscccote esc kve tasse pe ten asana Eel s M pHE p DO PUR FRA UDIN MR E eU M AME ECAA 131 8 7 1 LANs WANs and the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries c cccceeeseeeeeseeeeceeeceeceeeeeeseusaeaeaeaeaes 131 Bue DHCP SEP anii E NN 131 g7 S DNS Serial Adresten a ON 131 SLA LS TO SPEM Serena Ro depictis N EE OE E E Ti 132 BTT RIP wii airida E E O EO EE Ea 133 oE ANEN TITE e eor EE E dca etes Dat da cR Pc O Lap lE E E E e ab areas 133 Chapter 9 c eppedlieiprceee m en E 135 NERO LIO AM Utm 135 9 1 1 What You Can Do in the Static Route Screens ssssssessesssseeneneee nennen 136 9 2 The Static Route DP serans dccrrn si ceamlinndaeeadananinssaacndnendkwsinnaus ea KG Kr ATIE KAEA ASNE ER ELO UNE C UM UK RS 136 CEA Ecc RC A EON Me EL E 136 B IPs Se PONI oae n E
279. occurs when radio signals from different access points overlap causing interference and degrading performance Adjacent channels partially overlap however To avoid interference due to overlap your AP should be on a channel at least five channels away from a channel that an adjacent AP is using For example if your region has 11 channels and an adjacent AP is using channel 1 then you need to select a channel between 6 or 11 RTS CTS A hidden node occurs when two stations are within range of the same access point but are not within range of each other The following figure illustrates a hidden node Both stations STA are within range of the access point AP or wireless gateway but out of range of each other so they cannot hear each other that is they do not know if the channel is currently being used Therefore they are considered hidden from each other AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs Figure 175 RTS CTS RTS Range Wireless AP See eee AP S i gt Stations cannot 2m ACK Pot sic A __ hear each other When station A sends data to the AP it might not know that the station B is already using the channel If these two stations send data at the same time collisions may occur when both sets of data arrive at the AP at the same time resulting in a loss of messages for both stations RTS CTS is designed to prevent collisions due to hidden nodes An RTS
280. omponents exactly as given Password Enter the password associated with the user name above Multiplex Select the multiplexing method used by your ISP from the Multiplex drop down list box either VC based or LLC based VPI Enter the Virtual Path Identifier VPI assigned to you This field may already be configured VCI Enter the Virtual Channel Identifier VCI assigned to you This field may already be configured Select Yes to enter specific IP information from your Internet service provider Enter your Internet access information exactly as your service provider gave it to you IP Address Enter the IP address of the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries Primary DNS Enter the primary DNS server IP address for the AMG1302 AMG1202 Server TSeries Secondary Enter the secondary DNS server IP address for the AMG1302 AMG1202 DNS Server TSeries Back Click this to return to the previous screen without saving Apply Click this to save your changes Exit Click this to close the wizard screen without saving e If the user name and or password you entered for PPPoE or PPPoA connection are not correct you are prompted to enter the correct information AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 3 Internet Wireless Setup Wizard e If the Internet connection fails check to see if your account is activated After you configure the Internet access information use the following screen to set up your wirele
281. ond they encrypt This means that the information sent over the air is encoded Only people with the code key can understand the information and only people who have been authenticated are given the code key These security standards vary in effectiveness Some can be broken such as the old Wired Equivalent Protocol WEP Using WEP is better than using no security at all but it will not keep a determined attacker out Other security standards are secure in themselves but can be broken if a user does not use them properly For example the WPA PSK security standard is very secure if you use a long key which is difficult for an attacker s software to guess for example a twenty letter long string of apparently random numbers and letters but it is not very secure if you use a short key which is very easy to guess for example a three letter word from the dictionary Because of the damage that can be done by a malicious attacker it s not just people who have sensitive information on their network who should use security Everybody who uses any wireless network should ensure that effective security is in place A good way to come up with effective security keys passwords and so on is to use obscure information that you personally will easily remember and to enter it in a way that appears random and does not include real words For example if your mother owns a 1970 Dodge Challenger and AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide 109 Chapt
282. or to go to the Wizard 2 Click INTERNET WI RELESS SETUP to configure the system for Internet access and wireless connection AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 3 Internet Wireless Setup Wizard 3 Select your Time Zone from the drop down menu and click Next Figure 8 Wizard Welcome Welcome to Quick Start wizard The wizard will guide you through the basic settings of this device This will take about few minutes to complete Click Next to begin Time Zone Enter your Internet access information in the wizard screen exactly as your service provider gave it to you Leave the defaults in any fields for which you were not given information 4 Configure the field and click Next to continue See Section 3 2 on page 29 for wireless connection wizard setup Figure 9 Internet Access Wizard Setup IPoA Configuration Quick Start Internet Configuration STEP 1 Encapsulation IPoA Multiplex uce s VPI 0 Range 0 255 VCI 33 Range 32 65535 The current connection type is setto IPoA IP Address 0 0 0 0 Default Gateway 0000 Primary DNS Server 0 0 0 0 Secondary DNS Server 0 0 0 0 30 AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 3 Internet Wireless Setup Wizard The following table describes the fields in this screen Table3 Internet Access Wizard Setup IPoA Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Encapsulation Select the encapsulation type your ISP uses from the
283. ore you begin this test The AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries sends an OAM F5 packet to the DSLAM ATM switch and then returns it loops it back to the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries The ATM loopback test is useful for troubleshooting problems with the DSLAM and ATM network AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 26 Diagnostic Table 93 Maintenance Diagnostic DSL Line continued LABEL DESCRIPTION DSL Line Status Click this to view statistics about the DSL connections noise margin downstream is the signal to noise ratio for the downstream part of the connection coming into the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries from the ISP It is measured in decibels The higher the number the more signal and less noise there is output power upstream is the amount of power in decibels that the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries is using to transmit to the ISP attenuation downstream is the reduction in amplitude in decibels of the DSL signal coming into the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries from the ISP Discrete Multi Tone DMT modulation divides up a line s bandwidth into sub carriers sub channels of 4 3125 KHz each called tones The rest of the display is the line s bit allocation This is displayed as the number in hexadecimal format of bits transmitted for each tone This can be used to determine the quality of the connection whether a given sub carrier loop has sufficient margins to support certain ADSL transmission rates and possibly to deter
284. orrect security key If that does not work ensure your wireless network adapter is enabled by clicking on the wireless adapter icon and clicking Enable 4 5 Configuring the MAC Address Filter for Restricting Wireless Internet Access Thomas noticed that his daughter Josephine spends too much time surfing the web and downloading media files He decided to prevent Josephine from accessing the Internet so that she can concentrate on preparing for her final exams Josephine s computer connects wirelessly to the Internet through the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries Thomas can deny access to the wireless network using the MAC address of Josephine s computer Thomas INTERNE 1 Check the MAC address physical address of the wireless card on Josephine s computer using the ipconfig all command in a Command Prompt AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 4 Tutorials C gt ipconfig all Ethernet adapter Wireless Network Connection Media State Media connected Description Wireless USB Adapter Physical Address 00 1E 52 C3 5C 1B Tee SNAP 2 Click Network Setting gt Wireless gt MAC Authentication Select the wireless network in the SSID field and then Deny in the MAC Restrict Mode field General SSID ZyXEL 7DC8 v MAC Restrict Mode Disable O NO O Deny Add new MAC address 3 Enter the MAC address that y
285. orum Traffic Management 4 0 Specification Constant Bit Rate CBR Constant Bit Rate CBR provides fixed bandwidth that is always available even if no data is being sent CBR traffic is generally time sensitive doesn t tolerate delay CBR is used for connections that continuously require a specific amount of bandwidth A PCR is specified and if traffic exceeds this rate cells may be dropped Examples of connections that need CBR would be high resolution video and voice Variable Bit Rate VBR The Variable Bit Rate VBR ATM traffic class is used with bursty connections Connections that use the Variable Bit Rate VBR traffic class can be grouped into real time VBR RT or non real time VBR nRT connections The VBR RT real time Variable Bit Rate type is used with bursty connections that require closely controlled delay and delay variation It also provides a fixed amount of bandwidth a PCR is specified but is only available when data is being sent An example of an VBR RT connection would be video conferencing Video conferencing requires real time data transfers and the bandwidth requirement varies in proportion to the video image s changing dynamics AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 6 Broadband The VBR nRT non real time Variable Bit Rate type is used with bursty connections that do not require closely controlled delay and delay variation It is commonly used for bursty traffic typical on LANs PCR and M
286. other wireless client to the network You know that Client 1 supports registrar mode but it is better to use AP1 for the WPS handshake with the new client since you must connect to the access point anyway in order to use the network In this case AP1 must be the registrar since it is configured it already has security information for the network AP1 supplies the existing security information to Client 2 Figure 45 WPS Example Network Step 2 Ag EXISTING CONNECTION CLIENT 1 REGISTRAR ENROLLEE CLIENT 2 In step 3 you add another access point AP2 to your network AP2 is out of range of AP1 so you cannot use AP1 for the WPS handshake with the new access point However you know that Client 2 supports the registrar function so you use it to perform the WPS handshake instead AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide 117 Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Figure 46 WPS Example Network Step 3 EXISTING CONNECTION CLIENT 1 REGISTRAR CLIENT 2 ENROLLEE 7 10 8 5 Limitations of WPS WPS has some limitations of which you should be aware e WPS works in Infrastructure networks only where an AP and a wireless client communicate It does not work in Ad Hoc networks where there is no AP When you use WPS it works between two devices only You cannot enroll multiple devices simultaneously you must enroll one after the other For instance if you have two enrollees and one registrar you must set up the first
287. ou want to deny Click OK MAC Filter Configuration Mac Address Cancel Josephine will no longer be able to access the Internet wirelessly through the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries 4 6 Setting Up NAT Forwarding for a Game Server Thomas manages a Doom server on a computer behind the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries In order for players on the Internet like A in the figure below coming through the default WAN connection PVCO to communicate with the Doom server Thomas can use port forwarding AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 4 Tutorials D 192 168 1 34 LAN WAN eres 2 L11 A 4 6 1 Port Forwarding Thomas needs to configure the port settings and IP address on the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries Traffic should be forwarded to port 666 of the Doom server computer which has an IP address of 192 168 1 34 Thomas may set up the port settings by configuring the port settings for the Doom server computer see Section 11 3 on page 153 for more information 1 Activate NAT in the Network Setting gt NAT gt General screen Click Apply Active Max NAT Firewall Session Per User 3072 B Note Maximum number of NAT firewall sessions for the router is 8192 To remove the per user limit setto 8192 2 Click Network Setting gt NAT gt Port Forwarding Select PVCO as the WAN interface and click Add new rule WAN Interface PVCO v External Start Port External internal E
288. oups a port can join MLD Messages A multicast router or switch periodically sends general queries to MLD hosts to update the multicast forwarding table When an MLD host wants to join a multicast group it sends an MLD Report message for that address An MLD Done message is equivalent to an IGMP Leave message When an MLD host wants to leave a multicast group it can send a Done message to the router or switch The router or switch then sends a group specific query to the port on which the Done message is received to determine if other devices connected to this port should remain in the group AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Appendix E IPv6 Transition Techniques IPv6 Over IPv4 Tunnelling To route traffic between two IPv6 networks over an IPv4 network an IPv6 over IPv4 tunnel has to be used On the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries you can either set up a configured tunnel or an automatic 6to4 tunnel The following describes each method Configured Tunnel A configured tunnel is a point to point tunnelling mechanism that encapsulates an IPv6 address with an IPv4 address Routers A and B on both IPv6 networks 1 and 2 each must have an interface that connects to the IPv4 network with an IPv4 address This allows the router to send and receive IPv6 data over the IPv4 network In this case you must specify B s public IPv4 address on A similarly specify A s public IPv4 address on B in order for packets to arrive at the int
289. our changes Cancel Click this to restore your previously saved settings AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Filters 14 1 Overview This chapter introduces three types of filters supported by the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries You can configure rules to restrict traffic by IP addresses MAC addresses IPv6 addresses and or URLs 14 1 1 What You Can Do in the Filter Screens e Use the IP MAC Filter screen Section 14 2 on page 167 to create IP and MAC filter rules e Use the IPv6 MAC Filter screen Section 14 3 on page 170 to create IPv6 and MAC filter rules 14 1 2 What You Need to Know About Filtering URL The URL Uniform Resource Locator identifies and helps locates resources on a network On the Internet the URL is the web address that you type in the address bar of your Internet browser for example http www zyxel com URL and IP Filter Structure The URL IP and IPv6 filters have individual rule indexes The AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries allows you to configure each type of filter with its own respective set of rules 14 2 The IP MAC Filter Screen Use this screen to create and apply IP and MAC filters Click Security gt Filter gt IP MAC Filter The screen appears as shown AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide 167 Chapter 14 Filters Figure 78 Security gt Filter gt IP MAC Filter Rule Type Rule Type selection IP MAC Filter Rule Editing IP MAC Filter Rule Index Active Interface D
290. outer especially when there are multiple IPv6 router in the network Note Make sure the hosts also support router preference to make this function work Reachable Time ms Enter the time in milliseconds that can elapse before a neighbor is detected Possible values for this field are 0 3600000 Retrans Timer ms Enter the time in milliseconds between neighbor solicitation packet retransmissions Possible values for this field are 1000 4294967295 RA Interval Delegate MTU from WAN Enter the time in seconds between router advertisement messages Possible values for this field are 4 1800 Select this to have the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries obtain the MTU setting from the service provider or uplink router Manual Select this to specify the MTU manually MTU The Maximum Transmission Unit Type the maximum size of each IPv6 data packet in bytes that can move through this interface If a larger packet arrives the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries divides it into smaller fragments DAD attempts Specify the number of DAD Duplicate Address Detection attempts before an IPv6 address is assigned to the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries LAN interface Possible values for this field are 1 7 DHCPv6 DHCPv6 Server Use this field to Enable or Disable DHCPv6 server on the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries DNSv6 Mode Select the DNS role Proxy or Relay that you want the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries to act in the IPv6 LAN net
291. ox to select whether to discard Drop deny and send an Packets ICMP destination unreachable message to the sender of Reject or allow the passage of Permit packets that match this rule IP Version Type Select the IP version IP v4 or IPv6 to apply this firewall rule to Rate Limit Set a maximum number of packets per second minute or hour to limit the throughput of traffic that matches this rule Maximum Burst Set the maximum number of packets that can be sent at the peak rate Number Log This field determines if a log for packets that match the rule is created or not Rules Destination Address AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 15 Firewall Table 63 Security Firewall Rules Add LABEL DESCRIPTION Address Type Do you want your rule to apply to packets with a particular single IP a range of IP addresses for instance 192 168 1 10 to 192 169 1 50 a subnet or any IP address Select an option from the drop down list box that includes Single Address Range Address Subnet Address and Any Address Start IP Address Enter the single IP address or the starting IP address in a range here End IP Address Enter the ending IP address in a range here Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask here if applicable Source Mac Address Specify a source MAC address of traffic to which to apply this firewall rule applies Please note that a blank source MAC address is
292. provides communication across diverse interconnected networks C Show icon in notification area when connected 5 The Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties window opens the General tab in Windows XP e If you have a dynamic IP address click Obtain an IP address automatically e If you have a static IP address click Use the following I P Address and fill in the IP address Subnet mask and Default gateway fields Click Advanced Figure 134 Windows XP Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties General Alternate Configuration You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise vou need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Obtain an IP address automatically Use the following IP address Obtain DNS server address automatically Use the following DNS server addresses AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Appendix A Setting up Your Computer s IP Address 6 Ifyou do not know your gateway s IP address remove any previously installed gateways in the IP Settings tab and click OK Do one or more of the following if you want to configure additional IP addresses e In the IP Settings tab in IP addresses click Add e In TCP IP Address type an IP address in IP address and a subnet mask in Subnet mask and then click Add e Repeat the above two steps for each
293. queries to the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries e Use the ICMP screen Section 25 7 on page 230 to set whether or not your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries will respond to pings and probes for services that you have not made available e Use the SSH screen Section 25 8 on page 231 to configure through which interface s and from which IP address es users can use SSH to manage the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries 25 1 2 What You Need to Know About Remote Management Remote Management Limitations Remote management does not work when e You have not enabled that service on the interface in the corresponding remote management screen e You have disabled that service in one of the remote management screens e The IP address in the Secured Client I P Address field does not match the client IP address If it does not match the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries will disconnect the session immediately e There is a firewall rule that blocks it Remote Management and NAT When NAT is enabled e Use the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries s WAN IP address when configuring from the WAN e Use the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries s LAN IP address when configuring from the LAN 25 2 The WWW Screen Use this screen to specify how to connect to the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries from a web browser such as Internet Explorer 25 2 1 Configuring the WWW Screen Click Maintenance RemoteMGMT to display the WWW screen AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 25 Remote Management Figur
294. r 3 Unspecified Address An unspecified address 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 or is used as the source address when a device does not have its own address It is similar to 0 0 0 0 in IPv4 Loopback Address A loopback address 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 or 1 allows a host to send packets to itself It is similar to 127 0 0 1 in IPv4 Multicast Address In IPv6 multicast addresses provide the same functionality as IPv4 broadcast addresses Broadcasting is not supported in IPv6 A multicast address allows a host to send packets to all hosts in a multicast group Multicast scope allows you to determine the size of the multicast group A multicast address has a predefined prefix of ff00 8 The following table describes some of the predefined multicast addresses Table 110 Predefined Multicast Address MULTICAST ADDRESS DESCRIPTION FF01 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 All hosts on a local node FF01 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 All routers on a local node FF02 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 All hosts on a local connected link FF02 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 All routers on a local connected link FF05 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 All routers on a local site FF05 0 0 0 0 0 1 3 All DHCP severs on a local site The following table describes the multicast addresses which are reserved and can not be assigned to a multicast group Table 111 Reserved Multicast Address MULTICAST ADDRESS FF00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FF01 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FF02 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FF03 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 F
295. r Computer s IP Address 2 3 4 Figur e 146 Macintosh OS 8 9 Apple Menu File Edit View Window Special Help About This Computer D Apple System Profiler E catculator gt Chooser Control Panels f Favorites Key Caps Gg Network Browser GA Recent Applications ij Recent Documents cif Remote Access Status Scrapbook P Sherlock 2 jj Speakable Items y Stickies ADSL Control and Status Appearance Apple Menu Options AppleTalk ColorSync Control Strip Date amp Time DialAssist Energy Saver Extensions Manager File Exchange File Sharing General Controls Internet Keyboard Keychain Access Launcher Location Manager Memory Modem Monitors Mouse Multiple Users Numbers QuickTime Settings Remote Access Software Update Sound Speech USB Printer Sharing Select Ethernet built in from the Connect via list Figure 147 Macintosh OS 8 9 TCP IP ome v Setup Configure Using DHCP Server X DHCP Client ID l IP Address s will be supplied by server 7 Suret mask lt will be supplied by server gt Router address lt will be supplied by server gt Search comans Name server addr x will be supplied by server For statically assigned settings do the following For dynamically assigned settings select Using DHCP Server from the Configure list AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Appe
296. r source Make sure the power source is turned on 4 Turn the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries off and on 5 Ifthe problem continues contact the vendor One of the LEDs does not behave as expected 1 Make sure you understand the normal behavior of the LED Section 1 5 on page 17 LABEL DESCRIPTION WPS LED Green successful connection Off connection failure WIFI LED Green WIFI active Off WIFI inactive 2 Check the hardware connections 3 Inspect your cables for damage Contact the vendor to replace any damaged cables AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 27 Troubleshooting 4 Turn the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries off and on 5 If the problem continues contact the vendor 27 2 AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries Access and Login I forgot the IP address for the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries 1 The default IP address is 192 168 1 1 2 If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it you might get the IP address of the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries by looking up the IP address of the default gateway for your computer To do this in most Windows computers click Start Run enter cmd and then enter ipconfig The IP address of the Default Gateway might be the IP address of the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries it depends on the network so enter this IP address in your Internet browser 3 If this does not work you have to reset the device to its factory defaults See Section 1 7 on page 19 I forgot the
297. reen Table 16 Network Setting gt Wireless gt General LABEL DESCRIPTION Wireless Network Setup Wireless Select Enable Wireless LAN to activate wireless LAN Wireless Network Settings Wireless The SSID Service Set IDentity identifies the service set with which a wireless device is Network Name associated Wireless devices associating to the access point AP must have the same SSID SSID Enter a descriptive name up to 32 English keyboard characters for the wireless LAN Hide SSID Select this check box to hide the SSID in the outgoing beacon frame so a station cannot obtain the SSID through scanning using a site survey tool Client Isolation Select this to keep the wireless clients in this SSID from communicating with each other through the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries MBSSID LAN Select this to keep the wireless clients in this SSID from communicating with clients in Isolation other SSIDs or wired LAN devices through the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries Select both Client I solation and MBSSI D LAN Isolation to allow this SSID s wireless clients to only connect to the Internet through the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries Channel Set the operating channel manually by selecting a channel from the Channel Selection Selection list or use Auto to have it automatically determine a channel to use Operating This field displays the channel the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries is currently using Channel Security Level
298. reen to activate NAT for the default WAN connection PVCO Click Network Setting gt NAT to open the following screen Note You must create an IP filter rule in addition to setting up NAT to allow traffic from the WAN to be forwarded through the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries Figure 66 Network Setting NAT General v Active B Note Maximum number of N Max NAT Firewall Session Per User 3072 AT firewall sessions forthe router is 8192 To remove the per user limit setto 8192 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 48 Network Setting NAT General LABEL Active DESCRIPTION Select this check box to enable NAT Max NAT Firewall Session Per User When computers use peer to peer applications such as file sharing applications they need to establish NAT sessions If you do not limit the number of NAT sessions a single client can establish this can result in all of the available NAT sessions being used In this case no additional NAT sessions can be established and users may not be able to access the Internet Each NAT session establishes a corresponding firewall session Use this field to limit the number of NAT Firewall sessions client computers can establish through the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries If your network has a small number of clients using peer to peer applications you can raise this number to ensure that their performance is not degraded by the number of
299. relessNetwork is given here as an example T Connection 2 PETET Choose a wireless network Refresh network list Click an item in the list below to connect to a wireless network in range or to get more information E Set up a wireless network y SecureWirelessNetwork For a home or small office Related Tasks s network Te network ke ou Wa ect to this i Learn about wireless networking fe Change the order of Wireless Ralink preferred networks gt Change advanced Unsecured wireless network settings ZyXEL MIS WPA ff Security enabled wireless network WPA 6812 wpa E Security enabled wireless network WPA SecurityPM The network SecureWirelessNetwork requires a network key also called a WEP key or WPA key A network key helps prevent unknown intruders from connecting to this network Network key evcccccecs Confirm network key eocceccces Nm 4 You may have to wait several minutes while your computer connects to the wireless network 5 You should now be securely connected wirelessly to the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries Connected e utili AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 4 Tutorials Congratulations Your computer is now ready to connect to the Internet wirelessly through your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries Note If you cannot connect wirelessly to the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries check you have selected the correct SSID and entered the c
300. rer 6 0 and later versions Mozilla Firefox 3 and later versions or Safari 2 0 and later versions The recommended screen resolution is 1024 by 768 pixels In order to use the web configurator you need to allow e Web browser pop up windows from your device Web pop up blocking is enabled by default in Windows XP SP Service Pack 2 e JavaScript enabled by default e Java permissions enabled by default See Appendix C on page 273 if you need to make sure these functions are allowed in Internet Explorer 2 1 1 Accessing the Web Configurator 1 Make sure your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries hardware is properly connected refer to the Quick Start Guide 2 Launch your web browser 3 Type 192 168 1 1 as the URL 4 A password screen displays Type admin default as the username and 1234 as the password and click Login If you have changed the password enter your password and click Login Figure 4 Password Screen Welcome Welcome to AMG1302 T10B configuration interface Please enter username and password to login Username pu Password AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide at Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator Note For security reasons the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries automatically logs you out if you do not use the web configurator for five minutes default If this happens log in again 5 The following screen displays if you have not yet changed your password It is strongly recommended you
301. resses and type them in the Preferred DNS server and Alternate DNS server fields If you have previously configured DNS servers click Advanced and then the DNS tab to order them AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Appendix A Setting up Your Computer s IP Address 10 11 12 13 Figure 145 Windows Vista Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 Properties Internet Protocol Version 4 ICP IPv4 Properties You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator For the appropriate IP settings Obtain DNS server address automatically Use the Following DNS server addresses Advanced Click OK to close the Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 Properties window Click Close to close the Local Area Connection Properties window Close the Network Connections window Turn on your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries and restart your computer if prompted Verifying Settings Click Start All Programs Accessories and then Command Prompt In the Command Prompt window type ipconfig and then press ENTER You can also open Network Connections right click a network connection click Status and then click the Support tab Macintosh OS 8 9 1 Click the Apple menu Control Panel and double click TCP IP to open the TCP IP Control Panel AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide 257 Appendix A Setting up You
302. rious incoming and outgoing traffic flows None Disables auto priority mapping and has the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries put packets into the queues according to your classification rules Traffic which does not match any of the classification rules is mapped into the default queue with the lowest priority Ethernet Priority Automatically assign priority based on the IEEE 802 1p priority level IP Precedence Automatically assign priority based on the first three bits of the TOS field in the IP header Packet Length Automatically assign priority based on the packet size Smaller packets get higher priority since control signaling VoIP internet gaming or other real time packets are usually small while larger packets are usually best effort data packets like file transfers Click this to save your changes Cancel Click this to restore your previously saved settings 10 3 The Queue Screen Use this screen to configure QoS queue assignment disciplines and priorities Click Network Setting gt QoS gt Queue to open the screen as shown next Figure 61 Network Setting gt QoS gt Queue Inde Status Name 1 9 Queue1 2 N A 3 N A 4 NIA WAN 1 1 NIA ZW N A NIA NIA N A NIA ZW N A N A NIA N A NIA ZW N A NIA NIA N A NIA ZW The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 41 Network Setting QoS Queue LABEL DESCRIPTION This is the index number of the entry Status This
303. rity Mode list Figure 30 Wireless gt General More Secure WPA 2 Recommended CE 0 v E v Security Mode More Secure Authentication Server IP Address Port Number Shared Secret The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 19 Wireless gt General More Secure WPA 2 LABEL DESCRIPTION Security Level Select More Secure to enable WPA 2 data encryption Security Mode Choose WPA or WPA2 from the drop down list box Authentication Server IP Address Enter the IP address of the external authentication server in dotted decimal notation Port Number Enter the port number of the external authentication server You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so with additional information Shared Secret Enter a password up to 31 alphanumeric characters as the key to be shared between the external authentication server and the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries The key must be the same on the external authentication server and your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries The key is not sent over the network more hide more Click more to show more fields in this section Click hide more to hide them ReAuthentication Timer Enter how often the external authentication server requires a connected wireless client to reauthenticate itself to the server again Network Re auth Interval Specify how o
304. rk name SSID and security key through an secure connection to the enrollee If you need to make sure that WPS worked check the list of associated wireless clients in the AP s configuration utility If you see the wireless client in the list WPS was successful 7 10 8 2 PIN Configuration Each WPS enabled device has its own PIN Personal Identification Number This may either be static it cannot be changed or dynamic in some devices you can generate a new PIN by clicking on a button in the configuration interface Use the PIN method instead of the push button configuration PBC method if you want to ensure that the connection is established between the devices you specify not just the first two devices to activate WPS in range of each other However you need to log into the configuration interfaces of both devices to use the PIN method When you use the PIN method you must enter the PIN from one device usually the wireless client into the second device usually the Access Point or wireless router Then when WPS is activated on the first device it presents its PIN to the second device If the PIN matches one device sends the network and security information to the other allowing it to join the network Take the following steps to set up a WPS connection between an access point or wireless router referred to here as the AP and a client device using the PIN method Ensure WPS is enabled on both devices Access the WPS sect
305. rogram Files DHCPv6Client_dibbler dibbler client exe service d C NPr Startup type Automatic x Service status Stopped sten You can specify the start parameters that apply when you start the service from here Start parameters Dia 6 Now your computer can obtain an IPv6 address from a DHCPv6 server Example Enabling IPv6 on Windows 7 Windows 7 supports IPv6 by default DHCPv6 is also enabled when you enable IPv6 on a Windows 7 computer To enable IPv6 in Windows 7 AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Appendix E IPv6 1 Select Control Panel gt Network and Sharing Center gt Local Area Connection 2 Select the I nternet Protocol Version 6 TCP IPv6 checkbox to enable it 3 Click OK to save the change mem 4 Local Area Connection Properties Ex Networking Connect using mY Broadcom NetXtreme Gigabit Ethemet This connection uses the following items v 9I Client for Microsoft Networks vl jfi acS Packet Scheduler vi File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks Internet Protocol Version 6 TCP IPv6 Intemet Protocol Version 4 TCF v Install Uninsta Properties Description TCP IP version amp The latest version of the intemet protocol that provides communication across diverse interconnected networks Cac es 4 Click Close to exit the Local Area Connection Status screen 5 Select Start All P
306. rograms Accessories Command Prompt 6 Use the ipconfig command to check your dynamic IPv6 address This example shows a global address 2001 b021 2d 1000 obtained from a DHCP server C gt ipconfig Windows IP Configuration Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection Connection specific DNS Suffix IPv6 Address s woe 9c 0e wow we 2001 b021 24d 1000 Link local IPv6 Address fe80 25d8 dcab c80a 5189 11 IPv4 Address w 172 16 100 61 Subnet Mask os e s 4o a a ce f 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway fe80 213 49ff feaa 7125 911 172 16 100 254 AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Appendix E IPv6 AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Services The following table lists some commonly used services and their associated protocols and port numbers e Name This is a short descriptive name for the service You can use this one or create a different one if you like e Protocol This is the type of IP protocol used by the service If this is TCP UDP then the service uses the same port number with TCP and UDP If this is USER DEFI NED the Port s is the IP protocol number not the port number e Port s This value depends on the Protocol e If the Protocol is TCP UDP or TCP UDP this is the IP port number e If the Protocol is USER this is the IP protocol number Description This is a brief explanation of the applications that use this
307. rom the WAN you still need to configure a IP filter rule to allow access You may manage your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries from a remote location via e Internet WAN only e LAN only e LAN and WAN e None Disable To disable remote management of a service select Disable in the corresponding Service Access field 25 1 1 What You Can Do in the Remote Management Screens Use the WWW screen Section 25 2 on page 224 to configure through which interface s and from which IP address es users can use HTTP to manage the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries Use the Telnet screen Section 25 3 on page 226 to configure through which interface s and from which IP address es users can use Telnet to manage the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries e Use the FTP screen Section 25 4 on page 226 to configure through which interface s and from which IP address es users can use FTP to access the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide 223 Chapter 25 Remote Management e Your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries can act as an SNMP agent which allows a manager station to manage and monitor the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries through the network Use the SNMP screen see Section 25 5 on page 227 to configure through which interface s and from which IP address es users can use SNMP to access the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries e Use the DNS screen Section 25 6 on page 230 to configure through which interface s and from which IP address es users can send DNS
308. rt Click this button and then Save in the File Download screen The Save As screen opens browse to the location that you want to use and click Save SSH Type in the location of the SSH certificate file you want to upload in this field or click Browse to find it Current File This field displays the name used to identify this certificate It is recommended that you give each certificate a unique name Key Type This field applies to the SSH certificate This shows the file format of the current certificate Replace Click this to replace the certificate s and save your changes back to the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries Reset Click this to clear your settings AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 17 Certificate 17 4 The Trusted CA Screen Use this screen to view a summary list of certificates of the certification authorities that you have set the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries to accept as trusted The AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries accepts any valid certificate signed by a certification authority on this list as being trustworthy thus you do not need to import any certificate that is signed by one of these certification authorities Click Security gt Certificates gt Trusted CA to open the Trusted CA screen Figure 96 Security Certificates Trusted CA Import Certificate B Note Maximum 4 certificates can be stored The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 71 Se
309. rtificates to open the Local Certificates screen Figure 95 Security gt Certificates gt Local Certificates Reckace Privates Certicate fite in PLM format f v 13600 Bue Replace Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 70 Security gt Certificates gt Local Certificates LABEL DESCRIPTION WebServer Click Browse to find the certificate file you want to upload Current File This field displays the name used to identify this certificate It is recommended that you give each certificate a unique name Subject This field displays identifying information about the certificate s owner such as CN Common Name OU Organizational Unit or department O Organization or company and C Country It is recommended that each certificate have unique subject information Issuer This field displays identifying information about the certificate s issuing certification authority such as a common name organizational unit or department organization or company and country Valid From This field displays the date that the certificate becomes applicable The text displays in red and includes a Not Yet Valid message if the certificate has not yet become applicable Valid To This field displays the date that the certificate expires The text displays in red and includes an Expiring or Expired message if the certificate is about to expire or has already expired Ce
310. rts this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Obtain an IP address automatically Use the following IP address Obtain DNS server address automatically Use the following DNS server addresses 8 Click OK to close the Internet Protocol TCP I P Properties window 9 Click Close OK in Windows 2000 NT to close the Local Area Connection Properties window 10 Close the Network Connections window Network and Dial up Connections in Windows 2000 NT 11 Turn on your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries and restart your computer if prompted Verifying Settings 1 Click Start All Programs Accessories and then Command Prompt 2 Inthe Command Prompt window type ipconfig and then press ENTER You can also open Network Connections right click a network connection click Status and then click the Support tab Windows Vista This section shows screens from Windows Vista Enterprise Version 6 0 1 Click the Start icon Control Panel 252 AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Appendix A Setting up Your Computer s IP Address Figure 137 Windows Vista Start Menu Dr eye 7 0 Professional Connect To eval Media Player Classic Control Panel Default Piom Customize the appearance and functionality of your computer add or remove programs and set up network connections and user accounts gt AllPrograms Help and Supp tart S
311. rts Ethernet ETH1 mode To select this mode connect a modem or router to the WAN port and select Ethernet ETH1 Note The ZyXEL Device reboots when transferring to and from Ethernet ETH1 type General Mode Select Router default from the drop down list box if your ISP gives you one IP address only and you want multiple computers to share an Internet account Select Bridge when your ISP provides you more than one IP address and you want the connected computers to get individual IP address from ISP s DHCP server directly If you select Bridge you cannot use Firewall DHCP server and NAT on the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries Encapsulation Select the method of encapsulation used by your ISP from the drop down list box Choices vary depending on the mode you select in the Mode field If you select Router in the Mode field select PPPoA RFC 1483 ENET ENCAP or PPPoE If you select Bridge in the Mode field method of encapsulation is not available User Name PPPoA and PPPoE encapsulation only Enter the user name exactly as your ISP assigned If assigned a name in the form user domain where domain identifies a service name then enter both components exactly as given Password PPPoA and PPPoE encapsulation only Enter the password associated with the user name above Service Name PPPoE only Type the name of your PPPoE service here Multiplex Select the method of multiplexing used by your ISP from the drop down li
312. s Delete Click this to remove the filter rule Cancel Click this to restore your previously saved settings AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 14 Filters 14 3 IPv6 MAC Filter 170 Use this screen to create and apply IPv6 filters Click Security gt Filter gt I Pv6 MAC Filter The screen appears as shown Figure 79 Security gt Filter gt IPv6 MAC Filter Rule Type Rule Type selection IPv6 MAC Filter Rule Editing IPv6 MAC Filter Rule Index Active Interface Direction Rule Type Source IP Address Source Prefix Length Destination IPv6 Address Destination Prefix Length ICMPv6 Type Protocol IPv6 MAC Filter Listing IPv6 MAC Filter Rule Index No PVCOU Incoming White List v i Be Nam O Yes 9 No PVCO0 w Incoming IP M 1 Destination Unreachable 0 no route to destination v ICMPv6 v N AJ N AJ NIA NIA NIA ICMPv6 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 59 Security gt Filter gt IPv6 MAC Filter LABEL Rule Type DESCRIPTION Rule Type selection Select White List to specify traffic to allow and Black List to specify traffic to block IPv6 MAC Filter Rule Editing IPv6 MAC Filter Rule Index Select the index number of the filter rule Active Use this field to enable or disable the filter rule Interface Select the PVC to which to apply the filter Direction Apply the fil
313. s wireless LAN 111 WPS 118 Local Area Network see LAN login passwords 21 logout 22 automatic 22 logs 201 firewalls 180 MAC 69 MAC address 101 125 filter 100 110 MAC authentication 100 Management Information Base MIB 228 managing the device using FTP See FTP mapping address types 158 Maximum Burst Size see MBS Maximum Transmission Unit see MTU MBS 80 85 89 MBSSID 112 Media Access Control see MAC Address MLD proxy 80 model name 69 MTU 80 86 multicast 74 80 124 133 IGMPInternet Group Multicast Protocol see IGMP Multiple BSS see MBSSID multiplexing 77 84 87 LLC based 87 VC based 87 N nailed up connection 79 88 NAT 84 151 156 157 271 activation 152 address mapping types 158 applications 158 IP alias 158 default server IP address 153 example 158 global 157 IGA 156 ILA 156 inside 157 local 157 outside 157 P2P 152 port forwarding 152 153 activation 155 configuration 153 example 153 rules 154 remote management 224 Network Address Translation see NAT Network Address Translation see NAT network map 25 O other documentation 2 P P2P 152 185 packet direction 177 Pairwise Master Key PMK 290 291 passwords 21 PBC 113 PCR 80 85 88 Peak Cell Rate see PCR PIN WPS 114 example 115 Ping of Death 174 port binding 161 activation 162 AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Index summary screen 163 port forwarding 152 153 acti
314. s a DHCP server or disable it When configured as a server the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries provides the TCP IP configuration for the clients If you turn DHCP service off you must have another DHCP server on your LAN or else the computer must be manually configured IP Pool Setup The AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries is pre configured with a pool of IP addresses for the DHCP clients DHCP Pool Do not assign static IP addresses from the DHCP pool to your LAN computers 8 7 3 DNS Server Addresses DNS Domain Name System maps a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa The DNS server is extremely important because without it you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it The DNS server addresses you enter when you set up DHCP are passed to the client machines along with the assigned IP address and subnet mask There are two ways that an ISP disseminates the DNS server addresses e The ISP tells you the DNS server addresses usually in the form of an information sheet when you sign up If your ISP gives you DNS server addresses enter them in the DNS Server fields in the DHCP Setup screen AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide EN Chapter 8 Home Networking e Some ISPs choose to disseminate the DNS server addresses using the DNS server extensions of IPCP IP Control Protocol after the connection is up If your ISP did not give you explicit DNS servers chances are the DNS servers are conveyed through IPCP
315. s devices MUST use the same preamble mode in order to communicate IEEE 802 11g Wireless LAN IEEE 802 11g is fully compatible with the IEEE 802 11b standard This means an IEEE 802 11b adapter can interface directly with an IEEE 802 11g access point and vice versa at 11 Mbps or lower depending on range IEEE 802 11g has several intermediate rate steps between the maximum and minimum data rates The IEEE 802 11g data rate and modulation are as follows Table 105 IEEE 802 11g DATA RATE MBPS MODULATION 1 DBPSK Differential Binary Phase Shift Keyed 2 DQPSK Differential Quadrature Phase Shift Keying 5 5 11 CCK Complementary Code Keying 6 9 12 18 24 36 48 OFDM Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing 54 Wireless Security Overview Wireless security is vital to your network to protect wireless communication between wireless clients access points and the wired network Wireless security methods available on the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries are data encryption wireless client authentication restricting access by device MAC address and hiding the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries identity AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs The following figure shows the relative effectiveness of these wireless security methods available on your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries Table 106 Wireless Security Levels SECURITY LEVEL SECURITY TYPE Least Unique SSID Default Secure Unique S
316. s es click the DNS tab in the Network Configuration screen Enter the DNS server information in the fields provided Figure 152 Red Hat 9 0 KDE Network Configuration DNS v Network Configuration 8 X File Profile Help B f New Edit Devices Hardware DNS You may configure the system s hostname domain name servers and search domain Name servers are used to look up other hosts on the network Hostname Primary DNS Secondary DNS Tertiary DNS DNS Search Path Active Profile Common modified 5 Click the Devices tab 6 Click the Activate button to apply the changes The following screen displays Click Yes to save the changes in all screens Figure 153 Red Hat 9 0 KDE Network Configuration Activate redhat config network You have made some changes in your configuration To activate the network device ethO the changes have to be saved Do you want to continue 7 After the network card restart process is complete make sure the Status is Active in the Network Configuration screen Using Configuration Files Follow the steps below to edit the network configuration files and set your computer IP address 1 Assuming that you have only one network card on the computer locate the ifconfig eth0o configuration file where etho is the name of the Ethernet card Open the configuration file with any plain text editor e If you have a dynamic IP addr
317. s in the IP Settings tab and click OK Do one or more of the following if you want to configure additional IP addresses e In the IP Settings tab in IP addresses click Add e In TCP IP Address type an IP address in IP address and a subnet mask in Subnet mask and then click Add e Repeat the above two steps for each IP address you want to add e Configure additional default gateways in the IP Settings tab by clicking Add in Default gateways In TCP IP Gateway Address type the IP address of the default gateway in Gateway To manually configure a default metric the number of transmission hops clear the Automatic metric check box and type a metric in Metric e Click Add e Repeat the previous three steps for each default gateway you want to add e Click OK when finished AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide 255 Appendix A Setting up Your Computer s IP Address Figure 144 Windows Vista Advanced TCP IP Properties Advanced TCP IP Settings IP Settings DNS WINS IP addresses IP address DHCP Enabled Default gateways Subnet mask Tam Gateway V Automatic metric Add Metric Edit Remove Cancel In the Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 Properties window the General tab Click Obtain DNS server address automatically if you do not know your DNS server IP address es e If you know your DNS server IP address es click Use the following DNS server add
318. s s IP alias settings e Use the IPv6 LAN Setup screen Section 8 6 on page 127 to configure the IPv6 settings on your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries s LAN interface 8 1 2 What You Need To Know 8 1 2 1 About LAN IP Address IP addresses identify individual devices on a network Every networking device including computers servers routers printers etc needs an IP address to communicate across the network These networking devices are also known as hosts AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide 121 Chapter 8 Home Networking Subnet Mask Subnet masks determine the maximum number of possible hosts on a network You can also use subnet masks to divide one network into multiple sub networks DHCP A DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol server can assign your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries an IP address subnet mask DNS and other routing information when it s turned on DNS DNS Domain Name System is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa The DNS server is extremely important because without it you must know the IP address of a networking device before you can access it 8 1 2 2 About UPnP Identifying UPnP Devices UPnP hardware is identified as an icon in the Network Connections folder Windows XP Each UPnP compatible device installed on your network will appear as a separate icon Selecting the icon of a UPnP device will allow you to access the information and properties of that devic
319. screen as shown next Figure 112 Maintenance Backup Restore Backup Configuration Click Backup to save the current configuration of your system to your computer Restore Configuration To restore a previously saved configuration file to your system browse to the location ofthe configuration file and click Upload FilePath Back to Factory Defaults Click Resetto clear all user entered configuration information and return to factory defaults After resetting the LAN IP address will be 192 168 1 1 DHCP will be resetto server Backup Configuration Backup Configuration allows you to back up save the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries s current configuration to a file on your computer Once your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries is configured and functioning properly it is highly recommended that you back up your configuration file before making configuration changes The backup configuration file will be useful in case you need to return to your previous settings Click Backup to save the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries s current configuration to your computer AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide EJ Chapter 24 Backup Restore Restore Configuration Restore Configuration allows you to upload a new or previously saved configuration file from your computer to your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries Table 84 Restore Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION File Path Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field
320. ser s Guide 307 Appendix F Services Table 112 Examples of Services continued NAME PROTOCOL PORT S DESCRIPTION SQL NET TCP 1521 Structured Query Language is an interface to access data on many different types of database systems including mainframes midrange systems UNIX systems and network servers SSDP UDP 1900 The Simple Service Discovery Protocol supports Universal Plug and Play UPnP SSH TCP UDP 22 Secure Shell Remote Login Program STRM WORKS UDP 1558 Stream Works Protocol SYSLOG UDP 514 Syslog allows you to send system logs to a UNIX server TACACS UDP 49 Login Host Protocol used for Terminal Access Controller Access Control System TELNET TCP 23 Telnet is the login and terminal emulation protocol common on the Internet and in UNIX environments It operates over TCP IP networks Its primary function is to allow users to log into remote host systems VDOLIVE TCP 7000 A videoconferencing solution The UDP port number is specified in the application UDP user defined AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Copyright Legal Information Copyright 2013 by ZyXEL Communications Corporation The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole transcribed stored in a retrieval system translated into any language or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical magnetic optical chemical photocopying manua
321. service or the situations in which this service is used AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Appendix F Services Table 112 Examples of Services NAME PROTOCOL PORT S DESCRIPTION AH IPSEC_TUNNEL User Defined 51 The IPSEC AH Authentication Header tunneling protocol uses this service AIM TCP 5190 AOL s Internet Messenger service AUTH TCP 113 Authentication protocol used by some servers BGP TCP 179 Border Gateway Protocol BOOTP_CLIENT UDP 68 DHCP Client BOOTP_SERVER UDP 67 DHCP Server CU SEEME TCP UDP 7648 A popular videoconferencing solution from White Pines Software TCP UDP 24032 DNS TCP UDP 53 Domain Name Server a service that matches web names for instance www zyxel com to IP numbers ESP User Defined 50 The IPSEC ESP Encapsulation Security IPSEC_TUNNEL Protocol tunneling protocol uses this service FINGER TCP 79 Finger is a UNIX or Internet related command that can be used to find out if a user is logged on FTP TCP 20 File Transfer Protocol a program to enable fast transfer of files including large files TCP 21 that may not be possible by e mail H 323 TCP 1720 NetMeeting uses this protocol HTTP TCP 80 Hyper Text Transfer Protocol a client server protocol for the world wide web HTTPS TCP 443 HTTPS is a secured http session often used in e commerce ICMP User Defined 1 Internet Control Message Protocol
322. ss LAN 5 Check the Wireless Service box to enable wireless connection on the ZyXEL device 6 Configure your wireless settings in this screen Click Next Figure 13 Wireless Setup Wireless Setup STEP 2 The following settings are the current wireless settings which your wireless client devices need in order to get connected to this device Wireless Service v Wireless Network Name SSID ZyXEL 9ABC Channel Selection Channel6 v Security Level WPAPSKWPA2PSK Pre Shared Key G 3Fv 3 lt Enter 8 63 characters or 64 hexadecimal digits a f A F and 0 9 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 7 Wireless Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Wireless Click this to enable or disable wireless service on the ZyXEL device Service Wireless Enter a descriptive name up to 32 printable 7 bit ASCII characters for the Network wireless LAN Name SSID If you change this field on the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries make sure all wireless stations use the same SSID in order to access the network Channel The range of radio frequencies used by IEEE 802 11b g wireless devices is Selection called a channel Select a channel ID that is not already in use by a neighboring device Security Displays the security setting To mofidy see Section 7 2 on page 92 Pre Shared Enter a set of characters 8 to 63 characters or 64 hexadecimal digits a f Key A F and 0 9 for the shared security key
323. st Choices are VC or LLC IPv6 IPv4 Dual Stack If you select Enable the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries can connect to IPv4 and IPv6 networks and choose the protocol for applications according to the address type If you select Disable the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries will operate in IPv4 mode PPP Authentication The AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries supports PAP Password Authentication Protocol and CHAP Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol CHAP is more secure than PAP however PAP is readily available on more platforms Use the drop down list box to select an authentication protocol for outgoing calls Options are AUTO Your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries accepts either CHAP or PAP when requested by this remote node CHAP Your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries accepts CHAP only PAP Your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries accepts PAP only Virtual Circuit ID VPI Virtual Path Identifier and VCI Virtual Channel Identifier define a virtual circuit Refer to the appendix for more information VPI This option is available if you select Router in the Mode field The valid range for the VPI is 0 to 255 Enter the VPI assigned to you AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide 77 Chapter 6 Broadband Table 11 Network Setting Broadband Internet Connection continued LABEL DESCRIPTION VCI This option is available if you select Router in the Mode field The valid range for the VCI is 32 to 65535 0 to 31 is reser
324. st use a prefix length of 128 in the prefix length field to force the network number to be identical to the host ID IPv6 Prefix Length Enter the address prefix to specify how many most significant bits compose the network address PVC IPv6 Address Select the interface through which the traffic is routed OK Click this to save your changes Cancel Click this to restore your previously saved settings AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Quality of Service QoS 10 1 Overview Use the QoS screen to set up your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries to use QoS for traffic management Quality of Service QoS refers to both a network s ability to deliver data with minimum delay and the networking methods used to control bandwidth QoS allows the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries to group and prioritize application traffic and fine tune network performance Without QoS all traffic data are equally likely to be dropped when the network is congested This can cause a reduction in network performance and make the network inadequate for time critical applications such as video on demand The AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries assigns each packet a priority and then queues the packet accordingly Packets assigned with a high priority are processed more quickly than those with low priorities if there is congestion allowing time sensitive applications to flow more smoothly Time sensitive applications include both those that require a
325. st is reachable POP3 TCP 110 Post Office Protocol version 3 lets a client computer get e mail from a POP3 server through a temporary connection TCP IP or other POP3S TCP 995 This is a more secure version of POP3 that runs over SSL PPTP TCP 1723 Point to Point Tunneling Protocol enables secure transfer of data over public networks This is the control channel PPTP TUNNEL GRE User Defined 47 PPTP Point to Point Tunneling Protocol enables secure transfer of data over public networks This is the data channel RCMD TCP 512 Remote Command Service REAL AUDIO TCP 7070 A streaming audio service that enables real time sound over the web REXEC TCP 514 Remote Execution Daemon RLOGIN TCP 513 Remote Login ROADRUNNER TCP UDP 1026 This is an ISP that provides services mainly for cable modems RTELNET TCP 107 Remote Telnet RTSP TCP UDP 554 The Real Time Streaming media control Protocol RTSP is a remote control for multimedia on the Internet SFTP TCP 115 The Simple File Transfer Protocol is an old way of transferring files between computers SMTP TCP 25 Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is the message exchange standard for the Internet SMTP enables you to move messages from one e mail server to another SMTPS TCP 465 This is a more secure version of SMTP that runs over SSL SNMP TCP UDP 161 Simple Network Management Program SNMP TRAPS TCP UDP 162 Traps for use with the SNMP RFC 1215 AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries U
326. stination Enter the destination prefix length if you select I Pv6 as the Ether Type Prefix Length Port Range If you select TCP UDP TCP or UDP in the IP Protocol field select the check box and enter the port number s of the source MAC Address Select the check box and enter the destination MAC address of the packet AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 10 Quality of Service QoS Table 44 QoS gt Class Setup Add Edit continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Mac Netmask Type the mask for the specified MAC address to determine which bits a packet s MAC address should match Enter f for each bit of the specified source MAC address that the traffic s MAC address should match Enter 0 for the bit s of the matched traffic s MAC address which can be of any hexadecimal character s For example if you set the MAC address to 00 13 49 00 00 00 and the mask to ff ff ff 00 00 00 a packet with a MAC address of 00 13 49 12 34 56 matches this criteria Exclude Select this option to exclude the packets that match the specified criteria from this classifier Others IP Protocol This field is available only when you select I Pv4 or I Pv6 in the Ether Type field If you select I Pv4 select this option and select the protocol service type from TCP UDP TCP UDP or I CMP If you select I Pv6 select this option and select the protocol service type from TCP UDP TCP UDP or I CMPve6 TCP ACK This fi
327. sually displayed by MAC address It does not matter if the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN access point is the WPS registrar the enrollee or was not involved in the WPS handshake a rogue device must still associate with the access point to gain access to the network Check the MAC addresses of your wireless clients usually printed on a label on the bottom of the device If there is an unknown MAC address you can remove it or reset the AP AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Home Networking 8 1 Overview A Local Area Network LAN is a shared communication system to which many networking devices are connected It is usually located in one immediate area such as a building or floor of a building Use the LAN screens to help you configure a LAN DHCP server and manage IP addresses 8 1 1 What You Can Do in the LAN Screens Use the LAN Setup screen to set the LAN IP address subnet mask and DHCP settings of your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries Section 8 2 on page 123 Use the Static DHCP screen to assign IP addresses on the LAN to specific individual computers based on their MAC Addresses Section 8 3 on page 125 e Use the UPnP screen to enable UPnP and UPnP NAT traversal on the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries Section 8 4 on page 126 Use the IP Alias screen Section 8 5 on page 126 to change your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSerie
328. t PVC1 eth2 APO PVCO eth1 AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 12 Port Binding The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 56 Network Setting gt Port Binding gt Port Binding Summary LABEL DESCRIPTION Group ID This field displays the group index number Group port This field displays the ports included in the group AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Dynamic DNS Setup 13 1 Overview Dynamic DNS allows you to update your current dynamic IP address with one or many dynamic DNS services so that anyone can contact you in NetMeeting CU SeeMe etc You can also access your FTP server or Web site on your own computer using a domain name for instance myhost dhs org where myhost is a name of your choice that will never change instead of using an IP address that changes each time you reconnect Your friends or relatives will always be able to call you even if they don t know your IP address First of all you need to have registered a dynamic DNS account with www dyndns org This is for people with a dynamic IP from their ISP or DHCP server that would still like to have a domain name The Dynamic DNS service provider will give you a password or key 13 1 1 What You Can Do in the DDNS Screen Use the Dynamic DNS screen Section 13 2 on page 165 to enable DDNS and configure the DDNS settings on the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries 13 1 2 What You Need To Know A
329. t server to remotely set up the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries modify settings perform firmware upgrades as well as monitor and diagnose the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries In order to use CWMP you need to configure the following steps Activate CWMP Specify the URL username and password Activate periodic inform and specify an interval value 21 2 The TR 069 Client Screen Use this screen to configure your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries to be managed by a management server Click Maintenance gt TR 069 Client to display the following screen AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 21 TR 069 Client Figure 105 Maintenance gt TR 069 Client CWMP O Enable 9 Disable ACS URL ACS User Name ACS Password Connection Request Path Connection Request Port Connection Request User Name Connection Request Password Inform Enable Disable Inform Interval Sec The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 80 Maintenance gt TR 069 Client LINK DESCRIPTION CWMP Select Enable to allow the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries to be managed by a management server or select Disable to not allow the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries to be managed by a management server ACS URL Type the IP address or domain name of the management server If the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries is behind a NAT router that assigns it a private IP address you will have to configure a NAT port forwarding rule on the NAT router ACS User Name The user n
330. t support WPA or WPA2 WEP is less secure than WPA or WPA2 Encryption WPA improves data encryption by using Temporal Key Integrity Protocol TKIP Message Integrity Check MIC and IEEE 802 1x WPA2 also uses TKIP when required for compatibility reasons but offers stronger encryption than TKIP with Advanced Encryption Standard AES in the Counter mode with Cipher block chaining Message authentication code Protocol CCMP TKIP uses 128 bit keys that are dynamically generated and distributed by the authentication server AES Advanced Encryption Standard is a block cipher that uses a 256 bit mathematical algorithm AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs called Rijndael They both include a per packet key mixing function a Message Integrity Check MIC named Michael an extended initialization vector IV with sequencing rules and a re keying mechanism WPA and WPA2 regularly change and rotate the encryption keys so that the same encryption key is never used twice The RADIUS server distributes a Pairwise Master Key PMK key to the AP that then sets up a key hierarchy and management system using the PMK to dynamically generate unique data encryption keys to encrypt every data packet that is wirelessly communicated between the AP and the wireless clients This all happens in the background automatically The Message Integrity Check MIC is designed to prevent an attacker from capturing data packets a
331. t through the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries s default gateway R1 You create one static route to connect to services offered by your ISP behind router R2 You create another static route to communicate with a separate network behind a router R3 connected to the LAN Figure 54 Example of Static Routing Topology AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide 135 Chapter 9 Static Route 9 1 1 What You Can Do in the Static Route Screens e Use the Static Route screens Section 9 2 on page 136 to view and configure IP static routes on the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries Use the IPv6 Static Route screens Section 9 3 on page 137 to view and configure IPv6 static routes on the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries 9 2 The Static Route Screen Use this screen to view the static route rules Click Network Setting Static Route to open the Static Route screen Figure 55 Network Setting gt Static Route Add New Static Route L Destination IP Gateway Subnet Mask Metric The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 36 Network Setting gt Static Route LABEL DESCRIPTION Add new static Click this to configure a new static route route This is the number of an individual static route Destination IP This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination Routing is always based on network number Gateway This is the IP address of the gateway The gateway is a router or switch on
332. table characters found on UserName an English language keyboard Spaces and characters such as amp _ are allowed Connection The password is used to authenticate the management server when connecting to the Request AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries Type a password of up to 255 printable characters found on an Password English language keyboard Spaces are not allowed Inform Select Enable to have the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries periodically send information to the management server recommended if CWMP is enabled or select Disable to not have the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries periodically send information to the management server Inform Interval The interval is the duration in seconds for which the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries must attempt to connect with the management server to send information and check for configuration updates Enter a value between 1 and 86400 seconds AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 21 TR 069 Client Table 80 Maintenance gt TR 069 Client continued LINK DESCRIPTION Apply Click this to save your changes Cancel Click this to restore your previously saved settings AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide 2n Chapter 21 TR 069 Client 212 AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide 22 1 Overview System Settings This chapter shows you how to configure system related settings such as system time password name the domain name and the inactivity timeout interval
333. tart your computer so the changes you made take effect Configuring 1 Inthe Network window Configuration tab select your network adapter s TCP IP entry and click Properties 2 Click the IP Address tab e If your IP address is dynamic select Obtain an IP address automatically e If you have a static IP address select Specify an I P address and type your information into the IP Address and Subnet Mask fields AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Appendix A Setting up Your Computer s IP Address Figure 128 Windows 95 98 Me TCP IP Properties IP Address TCP IP Properties J A21 xl 3 Click the DNS Configuration tab e If you do not know your DNS information select Disable DNS e If you know your DNS information select Enable DNS and type the information in the fields below you may not need to fill them all in Figure 129 Windows 95 98 Me TCP IP Properties DNS Configuration TCP IP Properties Host Doma UNS Server search Urder Domain sutiy Search Arder e 4 Click the Gateway tab AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide 247 Appendix A Setting up Your Computer s IP Address e If you do not know your gateway s IP address remove previously installed gateways If you have a gateway IP address type it in the New gateway field and click Add 5 Click OK to save and close the TCP IP Properties window 6 Click OK to close the Network window Insert the Windows CD if prompted 7 Turn on
334. tency sensitive traffic such as SNA Systems Network Architecture transactions Level 3 Typically used for excellent effort or better than best effort and would include important business traffic that can tolerate some delay Level 2 This is for spare bandwidth Level 1 This is typically used for non critical background traffic such as bulk transfers that are allowed but that should not affect other applications and users Level 0 Typically used for best effort traffic 10 6 2 IP Precedence Similar to IEEE 802 1p prioritization at layer 2 you can use IP precedence to prioritize packets in a layer 3 network IP precedence uses three bits of the eight bit ToS Type of Service field in the IP header There are eight classes of services ranging from zero to seven in IP precedence Zero is the lowest priority level and seven is the highest AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 10 Quality of Service QoS 10 6 3 Automatic Priority Queue Assignment If you enable QoS on the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries can automatically base on the IEEE 802 1p priority level IP precedence and or packet length to assign priority to traffic which does not match a class The following table shows you the internal layer 2 and layer 3 QoS mapping on the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries On the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries traffic assigned to higher priority queues gets through faster while
335. ter to Incoming or Outgoing traffic direction Rule Type Select IP or MAC type to configure the rule Use the IP Filter to block or allow traffic by IPv6 addresses Use the MAC Filter to block or allow traffic by MAC address Source IP Address Enter the source IPv6 address of the packets you wish to filter This field is ignored if it is Source Prefix Length Enter the prefix length for the source IPv6 address Destination IPv6 Address Enter the destination IPv6 address of the packets you wish to filter This field is ignored if it is AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 14 Filters Table 59 Security gt Filter gt IPv6 MAC Filter continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Destination Prefix Length Enter the prefix length for the destination IPv6 address ICMPv6 Type Select the ICMPv6 message type to filter The following message types can be selected 1 Destination Unreachable 0 no route to destination 1 communication with destination administratively prohibited 3 address unreachable 4 port unreachable 2 Packet Too Big 3 Time Exceeded 0 hop limit exceeded in transit 1 fragment reassembly time exceeded 4 Parameter Problem 0 erroneous header field encountered 1 unrecognized Next Header type encountered 2 unrecognized IPv6 option encountered 128 Echo Request 129 Echo Response 130 Listener Query Multicast listener query 131 Listener
336. th the wireless stations and the access points must use the same WEP key Note WEP is extremely insecure Its encryption can be broken by an attacker using widely available software It is strongly recommended that you use a more effective security mechanism Use the strongest security mechanism that all the wireless devices in your network support For example use WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK if all your wireless devices support it or use WPA or WPA2 if your wireless devices support it and you have a RADIUS server If your wireless devices support nothing stronger than WEP use the highest encryption level available Your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries allows you to configure one 64 bit or 128 bit WEP key AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN In order to configure and enable WEP encryption click Network Setting Wireless to display the General screen then select Basic as the security level Figure 28 Wireless General Basic WEP Basic v v v Security Mode WEP CI Generate password automatically Enter 5 characters a z A Z and 0 9 Spaces and underscores are not allowed Password WEP Encryption b4Bits v The following table describes the wireless LAN security labels in this screen Table 17 Wireless General Basic WEP LABEL DESCRIPTION Security Level Select Basic to enable WEP data encryption Generate password automatically Select this option to have
337. that part of the task Furthermore with NAT all of the LANs computers will have access 6 4 1 3 PPPoA PPPoA stands for Point to Point Protocol over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 AAL5 A PPPoA connection functions like a dial up Internet connection The AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries encapsulates the PPP session based on RFC1483 and sends it through an ATM PVC Permanent Virtual Circuit to the Internet Service Provider s ISP DSLAM Digital Subscriber Line DSL Access Multiplexer Please refer to RFC 2364 for more information on PPPoA Refer to RFC 1661 for more information on PPP 6 4 1 4 RFC 1483 RFC 1483 describes two methods for Multiprotocol Encapsulation over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 AAL5 The first method allows multiplexing of multiple protocols over a single ATM virtual circuit LLC based multiplexing and the second method assumes that each protocol is carried over a separate ATM virtual circuit VC based multiplexing Please refer to RFC 1483 for more detailed information 6 4 2 Multiplexing There are two conventions to identify what protocols the virtual circuit VC is carrying Be sure to use the multiplexing method required by your ISP VC based Multiplexing In this case by prior mutual agreement each protocol is assigned to a specific virtual circuit for example VC1 carries IP etc VC based multiplexing may be dominant in environments where dynamic creation of large numbers of ATM VCs is fast and economical LLC based M
338. the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries Section 17 4 on page 197 17 2 What You Need to Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter Certification Authority A Certification Authority CA issues certificates and guarantees the identity of each certificate owner There are commercial certification authorities like CyberTrust or VeriSign and government certification authorities The certification authority uses its private key to sign certificates Anyone can then use the certification authority s public key to verify the certificates You can use the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries to generate certification requests that contain identifying information and public keys and then send the certification requests to a certification authority Certificate File Format The certification authority certificate that you want to import has to be in one of these file formats e PEM Base 64 encoded X 509 This Privacy Enhanced Mail format uses 64 ASCII characters to convert a binary X 509 certificate into a printable form 17 3 Local Certificates Use this screen to view the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries s summary list of certificates and certification requests You can import the following certificates to your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 17 Certificate e Web Server This certificate secures HTTP connections e SSH This certificate secures remote connections Click Security gt Ce
339. the client choose the AP with the SSID configured here When prompted for a key use the Pre Shared Key configured here SSID SecureWirelessNetwork Security Mode WPA2 PSK Pre Shared Key DoNotStealMyWirelessNetwork 802 11 Mode 802 11b g n AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 4 Tutorials 1 Click Network Setting Wireless to open the General screen Configure the screen using the provided parameters see page 40 Click Apply Wireless Network Setup Wireless Enable Wireless LAN Wireless Network Name SSID ZyXEL 7DC8 j O Hide SSID O Client Isolation C MBSSID LAN Isolation Channel Selection Channel6 w Operating Channel 6 Security Level More Secure Recommended Security Mode WPA2 PSK Enter 8 63 characters or 64 hexadecimal digits a f A F and 0 9 Pre Shared Key 4WWx4VVUSEHER3E more 2 Click Network Setting gt Wireless gt Advanced and make sure 802 11b g n is selected in the 802 11 Mode field Click Apply Fragmentation Threshold 2346 256 2346 even numbers only Output Power 10096 w Preamble Long 802 11 Mode 802 11b g n v Channel Width Auto _ amp Thomas can now use the WPS feature to establish a wireless connection between his notebook and the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries see Section 4 4 2 on page 41 He can also use the notebook s wireless client to search for the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeri
340. tings 15 4 1 The Rules Add Screen Use this screen to configure firewall rules In the Rules screen select an index number and click Add or click a rule s Edit icon to display this screen and refer to the following table for information on the labels AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide 179 Chapter 15 Firewall Figure 84 Security gt Firewall gt Rules gt Add Edit Rule O Active f Action for Matched Packets Permit v IP Version Type IPv4 v Rate Limit packets second v Maximum Burst Number packets C Loa Log Level DEBUG Rules Source Address Address Type Any Address v Start IP Address End IP Address Subnet Mask Source Mac Address 00 00 00 00 00 00 Source Interface Destination Address Address Type Any Address v Start IP Address End IP Address Subnet Address Destination Interface Service Available Services Any All Mi Edit Customized Services TCP Flag SYN ACK FIN RST URG PSH ALL NONE Schedule Day to Apply Everyday Sun O Mon O Tue O wed O Thu Fri Sat Time of Day to Apply 24 Hour Format E Al Day Start hour minute End hour minute OK Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 63 Security gt Firewall gt Rules gt Add LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this option to enable this firewall rule Action for Matched Use the drop down list b
341. tion If you are unsure refer to your ISP Default Server IP Address In addition to the servers for specified services NAT supports a default server IP address A default server receives packets from ports that are not specified in this screen Note If you do not assign a Default Server IP address the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries discards all packets received for ports that are not specified here or in the remote management setup Configuring Servers Behind Port Forwarding Example Let s say you want to assign ports 21 25 to one FTP Telnet and SMTP server A in the example port 80 to another B in the example and assign a default server IP address of 192 168 1 35 to a third C in the example You assign the LAN IP addresses and the ISP assigns the WAN IP address The NAT network appears as a single host on the Internet Figure 67 Multiple Servers Behind NAT Example A 192 168 1 33 LAN WAN IP Address assigned by ISP C 192 168 1 35 D 1 92 1 68 1 36 11 3 1 Configuring the Port Forwarding Screen Click Network Setting NAT Port Forwarding to open the following screen AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide 153 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation NAT See Appendix F on page 305 for port numbers commonly used for particular services Note Make sure NAT is activated on the WAN connection before you configure a port forwarding rule for it For the default WAN connection PVCO activate NAT in the Network Sett
342. to different flows and assign priority and define actions to be performed for a classified traffic flow Game List Use this screen to give priority to traffic for specific games NAT General Use this screen to activate deactivate NAT Port Forwarding Use this screen to make your local servers visible to the outside world DMZ Use this screen to configure a default server which receives packets from ports that are not specified in the Port Forwarding screen Port Binding General Use this screen to activate deactivate port binding Port Binding Use this screen to configure and view port binding groups Dynamic DNS Dynamic DNS Use this screen to allow a static hostname alias for a dynamic IP address Security Filter IP MAC Filter Use this screen to configure IPv4 MAC filtering rules for incoming or outgoing traffic IPv6 MAC Filter Use this screen to configure IPv6 MAC filtering rules for incoming or outgoing traffic Firewall General Use this screen to activate deactivate the firewall Default Action Use this screen to set the default action that the firewall takes on packets that do not match any of the firewall rules Rules Use this screen to view the configured firewall rules and add edit or remove a firewall rule Dos Use this screen to set the thresholds that the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries uses to determine when to start dropping sessions that are not fully established half open sessions Parental Control
343. to interact with the other devices such as the printer or with the Internet Your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries is the AP Every wireless network must follow these basic guidelines e Every device in the same wireless network must use the same SSID The SSID is the name of the wireless network It stands for Service Set IDentifier e If two wireless networks overlap they should use a different channel Like radio stations or television channels each wireless network uses a specific channel or frequency to send and receive information e Every device in the same wireless network must use security compatible with the AP Security stops unauthorized devices from using the wireless network It can also protect the information that is sent in the wireless network Radio Channels In the radio spectrum there are certain frequency bands allocated for unlicensed civilian use For the purposes of wireless networking these bands are divided into numerous channels This allows a AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN variety of networks to exist in the same place without interfering with one another When you create a network you must select a channel to use Since the available unlicensed spectrum varies from one country to another the number of available channels also varies 7 10 2 Additional Wireless Terms The following table describes some wireless network terms and acronyms used in the AMG1302 AMG1202
344. tored Thus someone other than the authentication server may access the password file In addition it is possible to impersonate an authentication server as MD5 authentication method does not perform mutual authentication Finally MD5 authentication method does not support data encryption with dynamic session key You must configure WEP encryption keys for data encryption EAP TLS Transport Layer Security With EAP TLS digital certifications are needed by both the server and the wireless clients for mutual authentication The server presents a certificate to the client After validating the identity of the server the client sends a different certificate to the server The exchange of certificates is done in the open before a secured tunnel is created This makes user identity vulnerable to passive attacks A digital certificate is an electronic ID card that authenticates the sender s identity However to implement EAP TLS you need a Certificate Authority CA to handle certificates which imposes a management overhead EAP TTLS Tunneled Transport Layer Service EAP TTLS is an extension of the EAP TLS authentication that uses certificates for only the server side authentications to establish a secure connection Client authentication is then done by sending username and password through the secure connection thus client identity is protected For client authentication EAP TTLS supports EAP methods and legacy authentication methods such as PA
345. traffic in lower index queues is dropped if the network is congested Table 47 Internal Layer2 and Layer3 QoS Mapping LAYER 2 LAYER 3 PRIORITY IEEE 802 1P USER QUEUE PRIORITY TOS IP DSCP IP PACKET ETHERNET PRECEDENCE LENGTH BYTE PRIORITY 0 1 0 000000 1 2 2 0 0 000000 71100 3 3 1 001110 250 1100 001100 001010 001000 4 4 2 010110 010100 010010 010000 5 5 3 011110 250 011100 011010 011000 6 6 4 100110 100100 100010 100000 5 101110 101000 7 7 6 110000 7 111000 AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 10 Quality of Service QoS AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Network Address Translation NAT 11 1 Overview This chapter discusses how to configure NAT on the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries NAT Network Address Translation NAT RFC 1631 is the translation of the IP address of a host in a packet for example the source address of an outgoing packet used within one network to a different IP address known within another network 11 1 1 What You Can Do in the NAT Screens Use the General screen Section 11 2 on page 152 to activate deactivate NAT for the default WAN connection PVCO e Use the Port Forwarding screen Section 11 3 on page 153 to configure forward incoming service requests to the server s on your local network e Use the DMZ screen to configure a default server Section 11 4 on page 156 11 1 2 What You Need To Know
346. ttack AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 15 Firewall 15 5 1 1 Threshold Values If everything is working properly you probably do not need to change the threshold settings as the default threshold values should work for most small offices Tune these parameters when you believe the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries has been receiving DoS attacks that are not recorded in the logs or the logs show that the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries is classifying normal traffic as DoS attacks Factors influencing choices for threshold values are 1 The maximum number of opened sessions 2 The minimum capacity of server backlog in your LAN network 3 The CPU power of servers in your LAN network 4 Network bandwidth 5 Type of traffic for certain servers Reduce the threshold values if your network is slower than average for any of these factors especially if you have servers that are slow or handle many tasks and are often busy e If you often use P2P applications such as file sharing with eMule or eDonkey it s recommended that you increase the threshold values since lots of sessions will be established during a small period of time and the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries may classify them as DoS attacks 15 5 2 Configuring Firewall Thresholds Click Security gt Firewall gt DoS gt Advanced to display the following screen Figure 89 Security gt Firewall gt DoS gt Advanced TCP SYN Flood Threshold TCP SYN Request Count 500 sec UDP Pac
347. tten as 2001 db8 1a2b 15 0 0 1a2 0 e Any number of consecutive blocks of zeros can be replaced by a double colon A double colon can only appear once in an IPv6 address So 2001 0db8 0000 0000 1a2 0000 0000 0015 can be written as 2001 0db8 1a2 0000 0000 0015 2001 0db8 0000 0000 1a2 0015 2001 db8 1a2 0 0 15 Or 2001 db8 0 0 la2f 15 Prefix and Prefix Length Similar to an IPv4 subnet mask IPv6 uses an address prefix to represent the network address An IPv6 prefix length specifies how many most significant bits start from the left in the address compose the network address The prefix length is written as x where x is a number For example 2001 db8 1a2b 15 1a2 0 32 means that the first 32 bits 2001 db8 is the subnet prefix Link local Address A link local address uniquely identifies a device on the local network the LAN It is similar to a private IP address in IPv4 You can have the same link local address on multiple interfaces on a device A link local unicast address has a predefined prefix of fe80 10 The link local unicast address format is as follows Table 109 Link local Unicast Address Format 1111 1110 10 0 Interface ID 10 bits 54 bits 64 bits AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Appendix E IPv6 Global Address A global address uniquely identifies a device on the Internet It is similar to a public IP address in IPv4 A global unicast address starts with a 2 o
348. tting Figure 160 Subnetting Example Before Subnetting Qmm U 192 168 1 0 2 am um um EE EE EM EM EE RE END EN E Um Ea m mE mE NN EM EM EM EN EN XM NN OE ON S You can borrow one of the host ID bits to divide the network 192 168 1 0 into two separate sub networks The subnet mask is now 25 bits 255 255 255 128 or 25 The borrowed host ID bit can have a value of either 0 or 1 allowing two subnets 192 168 1 0 25 and 192 168 1 128 25 The following figure shows the company network after subnetting There are now two sub networks A and B AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting Example Figure 161 Subnetting Example After Subnetting 4 9 192 168 1 0 25 py 192 168 1 128 25 am um um um um um um um um PF Gee eee m m e In a 25 bit subnet the host ID has 7 bits so each sub network has a maximum of 27 2 or 126 possible hosts a host ID of all zeroes is the subnet s address itself all ones is the subnet s broadcast address 192 168 1 0 with mask 255 255 255 128 is subnet A itself and 192 168 1 127 with mask 255 255 255 128 is its broadcast address Therefore the lowest IP address that can be assigned to an actual host for subnet A is 192 168 1 1 and the highest is 192 168 1 126 Similarly the host ID range for subnet B is 192 168 1 129 to 192 168 1 254 Four Subnets The previous example il
349. ttings Java Scripting Security Settings E 2 xl Settings Scripting Active scripting Q PRramp E Allow paste operations via script Q Disable 9 Enable Q Prompt E Scripting of Java applets Q Disable Prompt lleas Abe nkie Sion zs b Reset to Medium bd Reset te custom settings cmd Java Permissions 1 From Internet Explorer click Tools Internet Options and then the Security tab 2 Click the Custom Level button 3 Scroll down to Microsoft VM 4 Under Java permissions make sure that a safety level is selected 5 Click OK to close the window AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide 277 Appendix C Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions Figure 168 Security Settings Java Security Settings 2 xJ Settings Q Disable 9 Enable i Font download Q Disable 9 Enable y Q Prompt 5 Microsoft VM B Java permissions Q custom 9 High iov Q Low safety r Reset custom settings Reset to Medium Reset csi JAVA Sun 278 From Internet Explorer click Tools I nternet Options and then the Advanced tab Make sure that Use Java 2 for lt applet gt under Java Sun is selected Click OK to close the window Figure 169 Java Sun 7x General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Settings O Use inline AutoComplete O Use Passive FTP for firewall and DSL modem compatibility Use smooth scrolling
350. tup to establish a wireless connection WDS Use this screen to set up Wireless Distribution System WDS links to other access points WMM Use this screen to enable or disable Wi Fi MultiMedia WMM Scheduling Use this screen to configure when the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries enables or disables the wireless LAN Advanced Use this screen to configure advanced wireless settings such as output power AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator Table 2 Navigation Panel Summary LINK TAB FUNCTION Home LAN Setup Use this screen to configure LAN TCP IP settings and other Networking advanced properties Static DHCP Use this screen to assign specific IP addresses to individual MAC addresses IP Alias Use this screen to partition your LAN interface into different logical networks UPnP Use this screen to enable the UPnP function IPv6 LAN Setup Use this screen to configure the IPv6 settings on the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries s LAN interface Static Route Static Route Use this screen to view and set up static routes on the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries IPv6 Static Route Use this screen to configure IPv6 static routes QoS General Use this screen to enable QoS and decide allowable bandwidth using QoS Queue Use this screen to configure QoS queue assignment Class Setup Use this screen to set up classifiers to sort traffic in
351. ty is in lieu of all other warranties express or implied including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose ZyXEL shall in no event be held liable for indirect or consequential damages of any kind to the purchaser To obtain the services of this warranty contact ZyXEL s Service Center for your Return Material Authorization number RMA Products must be returned Postage Prepaid It is recommended that the unit be insured when shipped Any returned products without proof of purchase or those with an out dated warranty will be repaired or replaced at the discretion of ZyXEL and the customer will be billed for parts and labor All repaired or replaced products will be shipped by ZyXEL to the corresponding return address Postage Paid This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights that vary from country to country Registration Register your product online to receive e mail notices of firmware upgrades and information at www zyxel com for global products or at www us zyxel com for North American products Regulatory Information European Union The following information applies if you use the product within the European Union Declaration of Conformity with Regard to EU Directive 1999 5 EC R amp TTE Directive Compliance Information for 2 4GHz and 5GHz Wireless Products Relevant to the EU and Other Countries Following the EU Directive 1999 5 EC R amp TTE Directive
352. ultiplexing In this case one VC carries multiple protocols with protocol identifying information being contained in each packet header Despite the extra bandwidth and processing overhead this method may be advantageous if it is not practical to have a separate VC for each carried protocol for example if charging heavily depends on the number of simultaneous VCs 6 4 3 VPI and VCI Be sure to use the correct Virtual Path Identifier VPI and Virtual Channel Identifier VCI numbers assigned to you The valid range for the VPI is O to 255 and for the VCI is 32 to 65535 0 to 31 is reserved for local management of ATM traffic Please see the appendix for more information 6 4 4 IP Address Assignment A static IP is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you A dynamic IP is not fixed the ISP assigns you a different one each time The Single User Account feature can be enabled or disabled if you have either a dynamic or static IP However the encapsulation method assigned influences your choices for IP address and ENET ENCAP gateway AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 6 Broadband IP Assignment with PPPoA or PPPoE Encapsulation If you have a dynamic IP then the IP Address and Gateway IP Address fields are not applicable N A If you have a Static I P Address assigned by your ISP then they should also assign you a Subnet Mask and a Gateway IP Address IP Assignment with RFC 1483 Encapsulation In this case the IP address assi
353. ut having to rely on inconvenient Ethernet cables You can set up a wireless network with WPS WiFi Protected Setup or manually add a client to your wireless network AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 1 Introduction Figure 2 Wireless Access Example g 1 5 General Hardware Features Figure 3 General Hardware Features 0gou 7 oo POWER L ETHERNET 1 WLAN WPS DSL INTERNET The following table describes the LEDs Table 1 LED Descriptions LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION i Green On The AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries is receiving power and ready for O use POWER Blinking The AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries is self testing Red On The AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries detected an error while self testing or there is a device malfunction off The AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries is not receiving power Ethernet 1 4 Green On The AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries has an Ethernet connection with a device on the Local Area Network LAN Blinking The AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries is sending receiving data to from the LAN Off The AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries does not have an Ethernet connection with the LAN AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 1 Introduction Table 1 LED Descriptions LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION p Green On The wireless network is activated SN i Blinking The AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries is communicating with other WPS WLA
354. utes the traffic to B AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide 53 Chapter 4 Tutorials This tutorial uses the following example IP settings Table8 IP Settings in this Tutorial DEVICE COMPUTER IP ADDRESS The AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries s 172 16 1 1 WAN The AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries s 192 168 1 1 LAN A 192 168 1 34 R s N1 192 168 1 253 R s N2 192 168 10 2 B 192 168 10 33 To configure a static route to route traffic from N1 to N2 Log into the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries s Web Configurator Click Network Setting Static Route Click Edit on a new rule in the Static Route screen Add New Static Route Configure the Static Route Setup screen using the following settings 4a Type 192 168 10 0 and subnet mask 255 255 255 0 for the destination N2 4b Type 192 168 1 253 R s Ni address in the Gateway I P Address field 4c Enter 1 in the Metric field AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 4 Tutorials Add New Static Route x Destination IP Address 192 168 10 0 IP Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Gateway IP Address 192 168 1 253 Metric 1 4d Click OK Now B should be able to receive traffic from A You may need to additionally configure B s firewall settings to allow specific traffic to pass through 4 9 Port Binding Configuration This tutorial shows you how to configure port binding for WAN connections with different ATM QoS settings for differe
355. vation 155 configuration 153 example 153 rules 154 PPPoA 77 84 87 PPPoE 77 84 86 preamble 106 109 preamble mode 285 private IP address 132 probing firewalls 175 product registration 310 PSK 290 push button 18 Push Button Configuration see PBC push button WPS 113 Q QoS 139 802 1p 148 activation 141 DSCP 146 example 139 IP precedence 147 148 priority queue 149 Quality of Service see QoS Quick Start Guide 2 21 R RADIUS 286 message types 287 messages 287 shared secret key 287 RADIUS server 110 registration product 310 related documentation 2 remote management 223 DNS 230 FTP 226 ICMP 230 limitations 224 NAT 224 SSH 231 Telnet 226 WWW 224 reset 19 220 restart 221 restoring configuration 220 RFC 1483 77 84 87 RFC 3164 201 RIP 80 133 Routing Information Protocol see RIP RTS Request To Send 284 threshold 283 284 rules port forwarding 154 S schedules wireless LAN 105 SCR 60 85 89 security network 187 wireless LAN 109 Security Parameter Index see SPI Service Set 93 99 setup DHCP 124 IP alias 127 IP precedenceQoS IP precedence 146 IP MAC filter 168 port forwarding 153 static route 136 138 WAN 74 wizard 30 shaping traffic 88 89 Simple Network Management Protocol see SNMP SNMP 227 agents 228 Manager 228 managers 228 MIB 228 network components 228 AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide 317 Index versions 227 SPI 174
356. ved for local management of ATM traffic Enter the VCI assigned to you Enable VLAN This option is available if you select Ethernet ETH1 in the Line Type field The AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries supports Ether WAN function DSL users must connect an RJ11 cable to the DSL port Default while EtherWAN users must connect an RJ45 cable into LAN port 1 802 1Q VLAN ID The valid range for the VLAN ID as assinged by your provider is 5 to 4094 IP Address Obtain an IP Address This option is available if you select Router in the Mode field Automatically i A static IP address is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you A dynamic IP address is not fixed the ISP assigns you a different one each time you connect to the Internet Select Obtain an IP Address Automatically if you have a dynamic IP address otherwise select Static IP Address and type your ISP assigned IP address in the IP Address field and a gateway IP address supplied by your ISP below DNS Server This section is not available when you select Bridge in the Mode field Obtain DNS info Select this to have the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries get the DNS server addresses Automatically from the ISP automatically Use the following Select this to have the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries use the DNS server addresses Static DNS IP Address you configure manually Primary DNS Enter the first DNS server address assigned by the ISP Server Secondary DNS Enter the seco
357. vice itself or in its configuration utility or enter a PIN a unique Personal Identification Number that allows one device to authenticate the other in each of the two devices When WPS is activated on a device it has two minutes to find another device that also has WPS activated Then the two devices connect and set up a secure network by themselves 7 10 8 1 Push Button Configuration WPS Push Button Configuration PBC is initiated by pressing a button on each WPS enabled device and allowing them to connect automatically You do not need to enter any information Not every WPS enabled device has a physical WPS button Some may have a WPS PBC button in their configuration utilities instead of or in addition to the physical button Take the following steps to set up WPS using the button 1 Ensure that the two devices you want to set up are within wireless range of one another AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide 113 Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Look for a WPS button on each device If the device does not have one log into its configuration utility and locate the button see the device s User s Guide for how to do this for the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries see Section 7 6 on page 103 Press the button on one of the devices it doesn t matter which For the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries you must press the WPS button for more than three seconds Within two minutes press the button on the other device The registrar sends the netwo
358. work Alternatively select Manual and specify the DNS servers IPv6 address in the fields below Primary DNS This field is available if you choose Manual as the DNSv6 mode Enter the first DNS Secondary DNS server IPv6 address the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries passes to the DHCP clients This field is available if you choose Manual as the DNSv6 mode Enter the second DNS server IPv6 address the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries passes to the DHCP clients Information refresh time Enter the number of seconds a DHCPv6 client should wait before refreshing information retrieved from DHCPv6 Apply Click this to save your changes Cancel Click this to restore your previously saved settings AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 8 Home Networking 8 7 Home Networking Technical Reference This section provides some technical background information about the topics covered in this chapter 8 7 1 LANs WANs and the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries The actual physical connection determines whether the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries ports are LAN or WAN ports There are two separate IP networks one inside the LAN network and the other outside the WAN network as shown next Figure 53 LAN and WAN IP Addresses 8 7 2 DHCP Setup DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol RFC 2131 and RFC 2132 allows individual clients to obtain TCP IP configuration at start up from a server You can configure the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries a
359. ws XP and Windows 2003 support IPv6 This example shows you how to use the ipv6 install command on Windows XP 2003 to enable IPv6 This also displays how to use the ipconfig command to see auto generated IP addresses C gt ipv6 install Installing Succeeded C gt ipconfig Windows IP Configuration Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection Connection specific DNS Suffix IPE AddEGsSS2 dels ee ee Ge vox bo Lsl ud6 Subnet Mask s s pra Jan e 9 ox 1 255 255 255 0 IP Address fe80 2d0 59ff feb8 103c 4 Default Gateway 10 1 1 254 IPv6 is installed and enabled by default in Windows Vista Use the ipconfig command to check your automatic configured IPv6 address as well You should see at least one IPv6 address available for the interface on your computer Example Enabling DHCPv6 on Windows XP Windows XP does not support DHCPv6 If your network uses DHCPv6 for IP address assignment you have to additionally install a DHCPv6 client software on your Windows XP Note If you use static IP addresses or Router Advertisement for IPv6 address assignment in your network ignore this section This example uses Dibbler as the DHCPv6 client To enable DHCPv6 client on your computer 1 Install Dibbler and select the DHCPv6 client option on your computer AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Appendix E IPv6 2 After the installation is complete select Start gt
360. y 4 11 3 Testing the DDNS Setting Now you should be able to access the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries from the Internet To test this 1 Open a web browser on the computer using the IP address a b c d that is connected to the Internet 2 Type http zyxelrouter dyndns org and press Enter 3 The AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries s login page should appear You can then log into the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries and manage it AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 4 Tutorials AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide PART ll once Connection Status and System Info Screens 5 1 Overview After you log into the web configurator the Connection Status screen appears This shows the network connection status of the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries and clients connected to it Use the System Info screen to look at the current status of the device system resources and interfaces LAN WAN WLAN 5 2 The Connection Status Screen Use this screen to view the network connection status of the device and its clients A warning message appears if there is a connection problem If you prefer to view the status in a list click List View in the Viewing mode selection box You can configure how often you want the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries to update this screen in Refresh I nterval Figure 15 Connection Status Icon View ZyXEL AMG1302 T10B LA pm TWPCZT01 AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 5 Connection Status
361. y The following figure shows you how to set up a wireless network and its security on a AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries and a wireless client by using PIN method EB AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 4 Tutorials Wireless Client The Device fle Continuous Access Mode Method 2 PIN ferm sem of your new wireless client devil click Register Regter Step 2 Press the WPS button on your new wireless within 120 seconds Method 2 PIN a e Continuous Access Mode X ug ted Setup Step 1 Ente inesse BIN TT Manual input FEST f click Regis Register ZA 25327519 VS Step 2 Press the WPS button WITHIN 2 MINUTES v Authentication by PIN etus EB SECURITY INFO 4 4 3 Connecting Wirelessly to your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries This section describes how to connect wirelessly to your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries The connection procedure is shown here using Windows XP as an example 1 Right click the wireless adapter icon which appears in the bottom right of your computer monitor Click View Available Wireless Networks AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 4 Tutorials Disable Status Repair View Available Wireless Networks Change Windows Firewall settings 2 Select the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries s SSID name and click Connect A The SSID SecureWi
362. y saved settings AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide Chapter 22 System Settings AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries User s Guide 23 1 Overview Firmware Upgrade This chapter explains how to upload new firmware to your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries You can download new firmware releases from your nearest ZyXEL FTP site or www zyxel com to use to upgrade your device s performance Only use firmware for your device s specific model Refer to the label on the bottom of your AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries 23 2 The Firmware Screen Click Maintenance Firmware Upgrade to open the following screen The upload process uses HTTP Hypertext Transfer Protocol and may take up to two minutes After a successful upload the system will reboot Do NOT turn off the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries while firmware upload is in progress Figure 108 Maintenance gt Firmware Upgrade Upgrade Firmware FilePath Current Firmware Version 2 00 A4 4 0 b2 20121226 Browse The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 83 Maintenance Firmware Upgrade LABEL DESCRIPTION Current Firmware This is the present Firmware version Version File Path Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse to find it Browse Click this to find the bin file you want to upload Remember that you must decompress compressed zip files before you can upload them
363. ystem Log screen Use the System Log screen to see the system logs for the categories that you select in the upper left drop down list box Figure 99 System Monitor gt Log gt System Log ALL Level ALL v Refresh Clear Logs Export Email Log Now Time Level Message 40 Connecting PPPoE socket 00 00 00 00 00 00 1 Jan 1 00 10 17 INFO 0000 0x481088 4n Couldn t get channel number Transport endpoint 2 Jan 1 00 10 17 ERROR is motconhoded 3 Jan 1 00 10 17 WARNING Doing disconnect 4 Jan 1 00 11 17 INFO Sending PADI PT Connecting PPPoE socket 00 00 00 00 00 00 5 Jan 1 00 21 17 INFO 0000 0x48088 n 294 Couldnt get channel number Transport endpoint 6 Jan 1 00 21 17 ERROR Is fiobiconneded 7 Jan 1 00 21 17 WARNING Doing disconnect 8 Jan 1 00 22 17 INFO Sending PADI The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 75 System Monitor Log System Log LABEL DESCRIPTION Level Select a severity level from the drop down list box This filters search results according to the severity level you have selected When you select a severity the AMG1302 AMG1202 TSeries searches through all logs of that severity or higher Refresh Click this to renew the log screen Clear Logs Click this to delete all the logs Export Click this to download logs to a file on your computer Email Log Now Click this to send logs to a specified e mail address This field is a sequenti

ZyXEL AMG1302 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents